English Manual Template - for

English Manual Template - for
OPERATION
MANUAL
HVS-350HS
Digital Video Switcher
HVS-35OU
HVS-35ROU
Operation Unit
4th Edition - Rev. 4
Edition Revision History
Edit.
1
2
2
Rev.
1
3
Date
2010/07/29
2010/09/13
2010/11/05
2011/02/07
4
-
2011/06/30
4
1
2011/10/07
4
2
2011/12/27
4
4
3
4
2012/04/24
2013/03/29
Description
1080PsF supported
TSL tally added
Control panel and Remote panel connection
added
HVS-30TALR added
Note on ancillary data pass-through added
HVS-30OU for HVS-350HS added
COPY/SWAP added
AUX LINK added
Former sec. 21 divided into secs. 21 to 26.
VTR/VDCP control added
Router control added
Menus changed and factual errors corrected
"Features" changed
Former sec. 5-3 divided into 5-3 and 5-4
"XPT DELAY" added
"Clip Memory" added
"CG WIPE" added
Additions and changes by adding "Clip
Memory" and "CG WIPE"
WIPE BORDER corrected for KEY1 and 2
"Tally Link Using User Buttons" added
"Unit Specifications" changed
Menus changed and factual errors corrected
"Available inputs" added
KEY INSERT AUX added
Chromakey menu parameters added
Audio Mixer Control added
Unit Specifications (OU PS unit added)
Clip N Key operations changed
Factual errors corrected
Multiviewer tally link added
Event Last Load description changed
Internet Exploler deleted
Section, Page
Sec. 25-3
Sec. 31
Secs. 2-3, 2-4-6, 23-2
Sec. 31-2
Appendix 3
Sec. 4-3
Sec. 6-6
Secs 21-26
Secs. 21-2, 24
Secs. 21-2, 25, 26
Sec. 1-2
Secs. 5-3, 5-4
Sec. 5-5
Sec. 13
Sec. 14
Secs. 4-1, 5, 9, 12,
28-3-3
Sec. 9-3, 9-4, 9-6
Sec. 21-3
Sec. 33-1
Sec. 5-3
Sec. 10-4
Secs. 10-6-2 to 10-6-4
Sec. 27
Sec. 34-1
Secs. 14-2, 14-4, 24 to
26
Sec. 16-4-3
p127
Sec. 29-3
Precautions
Important Safety Warnings
[Power]
Operate unit only on the specified supply voltage.
Caution
Disconnect power cord by connector only. Do not pull on cable portion.
Stop
Do not place or drop heavy or sharp-edged objects on power cord. A damaged cord
can cause fire or electrical shock hazards. Regularly check power cord for
excessive wear or damage to avoid possible fire / electrical hazards.
[Grounding]
Ensure unit is properly grounded at all times to prevent electrical shock hazard.
Caution
Hazard
Do not ground the unit to gas lines, units, or fixtures of an explosive or dangerous
nature.
Ensure power cord is firmly plugged into AC outlet.
Caution
[Operation]
Hazard
Hazard
Do not operate unit in hazardous or potentially explosive atmospheres. Doing so
could result in fire, explosion, or other dangerous results.
Do not allow liquids, metal pieces, or other foreign materials to enter the unit. Doing
so could result in fire, other hazards, or unit malfunction.
If foreign material does enter the unit, turn power off and disconnect power cord
immediately. Remove material and contact authorized service representative if
damage has occurred.
[Transportation]
Caution
Handle with care to avoid shocks in transit. Shocks may cause malfunction. When
you need to transport the unit, use the original packing materials or alternate
adequate packing.
[Circuitry Access]
Do not remove covers, panels, casing, or access circuitry with power applied to the
unit! Turn power off and disconnect power cord prior to removal. Internal servicing /
adjustment of unit should only be performed by qualified personnel.
Stop
Do not touch any parts / circuitry with a high heat factor.
Capacitors can retain enough electric charge to cause mild to serious shock, even
after power is disconnected. Capacitors associated with the power supply are
especially hazardous. Avoid contact with any capacitors.
Hazard
Unit should not be operated or stored with cover, panels, and / or casing removed.
Operating unit with circuitry exposed could result in electric shock / fire hazards or
unit malfunction.
[Potential Hazards]
Caution
If abnormal smells or noises are noticed coming from the unit, turn power off
immediately and disconnect power cord to avoid potentially hazardous conditions. If
problems similar to above occur, contact authorized service representative before
attempting to again operate unit.
[Rack Mount Brackets, Ground Terminal, and Rubber Feet]
Caution
To rack mount or ground the unit, or to install rubber feet, do not use screws or
materials other than those supplied. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the internal
circuits or components of the unit. If you remove the rubber feet attached on the unit,
do not reinsert the screws securing the rubber feet.
[Consumables]
Caution
The consumables used in unit must be replaced periodically. For further details on
which parts are consumables and when they should be replaced, refer to the
specifications at the end of the Operation Manual. Since the service life of the
consumables varies greatly depending on the environment in which they are used,
they should be replaced at an early date. For details on replacing the consumables,
contact your dealer.
Upon Receipt
Unpacking
The Hanabi Series switchers and their accessories are fully inspected and adjusted prior to
shipment. Operation can be performed immediately upon completing all required connections
and operational settings. Check your received items against the packing lists below.
HVS-350HS Box
ITEM
HVS-350HS
AC Cord
Rack Mount Brackets
Operation Manual
QTY
1
1 set
1 set
1
Options
HVS-30HSDI-A
HVS-30HSDI
HVS-30HSDO
HVS-30HSAI
HVS-30HSAO
1-4
1-4
1-2
1-4
1-2
HVS-30PCIN
1-4
HVS-30PCO
1-2
HVS-30TALR
1-2
REMARKS
Main unit
Retaining clips included
EIA standard type
(This manual)
HS/SD SDI 4-Input Expansion Card (Max. 4 cards)
HS/SD SDI 4-Input Expansion Card (Max. 4 cards)
HS/SD SDI 3-Output Expansion Card (Max. 2 cards)
HS/SD Analog 2-Input Expansion Card (Max. 4 cards)
HS/SD Analog 2-Output Expansion Card (Max. 2 cards)
Digital/Analog RGB 2-Input Expansion Card
(Max.4 cards)
Digital/Analog RGB 2-Output Expansion Card
(Max. 2 cards)
Tally Output Expansion Card (Relay type, Max. 2 cards),
37-pin D-sub connector (1 set, for cable fabrication)
HVS-35ED
1
Editor control option (software option)
HVS-35PSM
1
Redundant Power Supply Unit for HVS-350HS
* Up to four input cards of HVS-30HSDI-A/HSDI/HSAI/PCIN can be installed.
* Up to two output cards of HVS-30HSDO/HSAO/PCO can be installed.
HVS-35OU Box
ITEM
HVS-35OU
HVS-35PSO
Control Cable
AC Cord
Rack Mount Brackets
QTY
1
1
1
1 set
1 set
REMARKS
Operation Unit (20-button type)
Redundant Power Supply Unit (Option)
BNC cable for ARCNET connection (10m)
Power cord with retaining clips
Optional
HVS-35ROU Box
ITEM
HVS-35ROU
HVS-35PSO
Control Cable
AC Cord
Rack Mount Brackets
QTY
1
1
1
1 set
1 set
REMARKS
Operation Unit (12-button type)
Redundant Power Supply Unit (Option)
BNC cable for ARCNET connection (10m)
Power cord with retaining clips
Optional
About the configuration for HVS-350 series system
The main unit for the HVS-350 series is HVS-350HS. The following standard methods for
operation are available. (HVS-30OU and HVS-30RU can also be used.) These control
methods can exist together in the same system.
HVS-35OU: A full-featured standard control panel.
HVS-35ROU: A compact type control panel
HVS-35GUI: Control software installed in the computer.
Other Options
ITEM
HVS-30RU
HVS-AUX8
HVS-AUX16
HVS-AUX32
HVS-AUX8RK,
HVS-AUXRK
QTY
1-2
1-5
1-5
1-5
REMARKS
Remote Control Unit
AUX bus Control Box (Hanabi Series Option)
AUX bus Control Box (Hanabi Series Option)
AUX bus Control Box (Hanabi Series Option)
Remote Kit for Aux bus Control Box
1
(Hanabi Series Option)
Tally Control Unit (Relay type)
HVS-TALR20/32 (*1)
1-3
(Hanabi Series Option)
HVS-TALOC20/32
Tally Control Unit (Open Collector type)
1-3
(*1)
(Hanabi Series Option)
BNC
cable for ARCNET connection (10m) , (BNC 5C2V
Control Cable
1
75Ω)
HVS-35VR
1
Virtual Link Option (Software)
(*1) Multiple HVS-TALOC / HVS-TALR configurations possible; up to 3 units max.
Optional devices or software are basically provided with the installation manuals (except
factory- installed ones) or specific operation manuals.
Check
Check to ensure no damage has occurred during shipment. If damage has occurred, or items
are missing, inform your supplier immediately.
Rack Mounting
The product can be mounted to EIA standard rack units. When rack mounting a unit, remove the
rubber feet and use the accessory rack mount brackets (rack ears).
Installing the AC Cord Retaining Clip
1) Insert both ends of the retaining clip into the holes on the sides of the hexagon head screws.
Retaining clip
Hexagon head screw
2) Plug the AC cord securely into the AC inlet
AC cable
3) Push the retaining clip into place against the AC cable.
(Push the retaining clip against
the AC cable until it locks.)
4) Installation is complete.
Table of Contents
1. Prior to Starting ........................................................................................................................ 1
1-1. Welcome ........................................................................................................................... 1
1-2. Features ............................................................................................................................ 1
1-3. About This Manual ............................................................................................................ 2
2. Panel Descriptions ................................................................................................................... 3
2-1. HVS-350HS....................................................................................................................... 3
2-2. HVS-35OU/35ROU (Operation Unit) ................................................................................. 5
2-3. Option Slots....................................................................................................................... 8
2-4. Interfaces........................................................................................................................... 9
2-4-1. EDITOR Connector .................................................................................................... 9
2-4-2. RS-422 Connector 1-4 ............................................................................................... 9
2-4-3. GPI IN Connector ..................................................................................................... 10
2-4-4. GPI/TALLY OUT Connector ..................................................................................... 11
2-4-5. GPI/TALLY OUT Connector (HVS-35OU/35ROU) ................................................... 12
2-4-6. TALLY OUT Connector (HVS-30TALR) ................................................................... 13
3. Connection ............................................................................................................................. 15
3-1. Basic Connection ............................................................................................................ 15
3-2. Optional Configuration..................................................................................................... 16
3-3. How to Connect between MU and OU Units ................................................................... 17
3-4. Power ON........................................................................................................................ 18
3-5. System Signal Format Selection at Initial Use................................................................. 19
4. Menu Operations.................................................................................................................... 20
4-1. How to Access Menus ..................................................................................................... 20
4-1-1. Menu Access Buttons............................................................................................... 20
4-1-2. Other Menu Access Buttons..................................................................................... 21
4-1-3. USER Button (Menu Shortcut) ................................................................................. 21
4-2. How to Set Values........................................................................................................... 22
4-2-1. Displaying Parameters ............................................................................................. 22
4-2-2. Changing Settings or Values Using F1 to F4 ........................................................... 23
4-2-3. Changing Settings or Values Using the Numeric Keypad ........................................ 24
4-2-4. Changing Settings or Values Using the Joystick ...................................................... 25
4-3. Copying / Swaping Settings............................................................................................. 27
4-3-1. Operation Example: Copying Settings from KEY2 to DSK1 ..................................... 27
4-4. How to Return Settings to Default ................................................................................... 28
4-4-1. Returning Parameters to Default .............................................................................. 28
4-4-2. Returning Menus to Default...................................................................................... 28
4-5. How to Back up Settings ................................................................................................. 28
5. Video Sources ........................................................................................................................ 29
5-1. How to Give Name to Sources ........................................................................................ 29
5-2. How to Assign Sources to Bus buttons ........................................................................... 30
5-3. Resize Function............................................................................................................... 31
5-4. Changing The Side Panel Image..................................................................................... 32
5-5. XPT DELAY..................................................................................................................... 32
5-6. Frame Synchronizer ........................................................................................................ 33
5-7. Bus Matte ........................................................................................................................ 33
5-7-1. Setting Up the Matte Color........................................................................................33
5-7-2. Setting Up the Gradation Matte ................................................................................34
5-8. Setting Up Additional Inputs.............................................................................................35
6. Video Outputs .........................................................................................................................37
6-1. How to Select Aux Signals ...............................................................................................37
6-1-1. Selecting Video via Bus Buttons ...............................................................................37
6-1-2. Selecting Video from Menu Selection .......................................................................37
6-1-3. AUX Image Crossfade Transition..............................................................................38
6-2. Preview Set Up ................................................................................................................39
6-2-1. Preview bus monitoring.............................................................................................39
6-2-2. Setting Up Preview Images.......................................................................................39
6-3. Clean Set Up....................................................................................................................40
6-4. Setting Up and Outputting KEY OUT ...............................................................................41
6-5. Setting Up Additional Outputs ..........................................................................................41
6-6. AUX LINK ........................................................................................................................43
6-6-1. Creating AUX Output Link Groups ............................................................................43
6-6-2. Creating Signal Link Groups .....................................................................................44
6-6-3. Enabling AUX LINK...................................................................................................44
7. Bus Operation .........................................................................................................................46
7-1. Selecting Video Sources..................................................................................................46
7-1-1. Selecting Video Sources on M/E and P/P.................................................................47
7-1-2. Selecting Video Sources for AUX Outputs................................................................47
7-2. Button Switching Mode in M/E and P/P bus.....................................................................48
7-3. Setting-up and Using the SHIFT function.........................................................................48
7-3-1. To Assign the SHIFT function to a Bus button: .........................................................48
7-3-2. Using the SHIFT function..........................................................................................49
8. Transition Operations..............................................................................................................50
8-1. Transition Block Description.............................................................................................51
8-2. Quick Reference for Available Transitions .......................................................................52
8-3. Black Transitions..............................................................................................................52
8-4. Background Transitions ...................................................................................................53
8-4-1. M/E Bus ....................................................................................................................53
8-4-2. P/P Bus.....................................................................................................................54
8-5. KEY Transitions ...............................................................................................................55
8-6. Simultaneous Transitions of BKGD, KEY1 and KEY2 .....................................................57
8-7. Pattern (WIPE/DVE) Transitions ......................................................................................58
8-8. How to Select Patterns ....................................................................................................59
8-8-1. Selecting Patterns in the Menu .................................................................................59
8-8-2. Direct Pattern Function .............................................................................................59
8-9. IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK...........................................................................62
8-9-1. Setting the ON AIR Button Function (USER Transition) ...........................................63
8-9-2. Setting the AUTO Button Function............................................................................64
8-10. Advanced Settings for Transitions .................................................................................65
8-10-1. Fader Limit..............................................................................................................65
8-10-2. Transition Rate........................................................................................................66
8-10-3. Endpoint Processing for DVE Transitions ...............................................................66
8-10-4. Effect Background...................................................................................................67
9. Modifying Patterns.................................................................................................................. 68
9-1. Preset Pattern Groups..................................................................................................... 68
9-2. Modified Patterns ............................................................................................................ 68
9-3. Pattern Modify Example1 (Pattern 20) ............................................................................ 69
9-4. Pattern Modify Example2 (Pattern 117) .......................................................................... 70
9-5. How to Reset the WIPE Menu......................................................................................... 71
9-6. WIPE Menu ..................................................................................................................... 72
9-6-1. No.0-99 .................................................................................................................... 72
9-6-2. No.100-137 .............................................................................................................. 73
9-6-3. No.140-147, 150-157, 161 and 162.......................................................................... 74
9-6-4. No.170-181 .............................................................................................................. 75
9-6-5. No.200-202 .............................................................................................................. 75
10. KEY and DSK....................................................................................................................... 76
10-1. Luminance Key.............................................................................................................. 77
10-2. Full Key ......................................................................................................................... 78
10-3. Bus Key ......................................................................................................................... 78
10-3-1. Key Link ................................................................................................................. 79
10-3-2. KEY INSERT MATT ............................................................................................... 79
10-4. KEY INSERT AUX......................................................................................................... 80
10-5. Adjusting the Key Signal ............................................................................................... 80
10-6. Chroma Key .................................................................................................................. 81
10-6-1. Creating a Chroma Key.......................................................................................... 81
10-6-2. Chroma Key adjustments ....................................................................................... 82
10-6-3. Advanced Example 1 (Using KEY INSERT AUX) .................................................. 84
10-6-4. Advanced Example 2 (Images with a Specified Color Left).................................... 84
10-7. Mask and Invert............................................................................................................. 85
10-7-1. Inverting Key and Background ............................................................................... 85
10-7-2. Key Masks.............................................................................................................. 85
10-8. Key Edge....................................................................................................................... 86
10-9. Where DSKs Appear ..................................................................................................... 87
11. DVE Effects on Keys ............................................................................................................ 88
11-1. How to Enable 2D DVEs ............................................................................................... 88
11-2. Changing Position ......................................................................................................... 88
11-3. Changing Sizes or Aspect Ratios .................................................................................. 89
11-4. FADE............................................................................................................................. 89
11-5. Rotation ......................................................................................................................... 90
11-5-1. Setting Example ..................................................................................................... 91
11-6. CROP ............................................................................................................................ 92
11-7. SUB EFFECT ................................................................................................................ 93
11-7-1. MONO COLOR ...................................................................................................... 93
11-7-2. DEFOCUS.............................................................................................................. 93
11-7-3. PAINT COLOR ....................................................................................................... 93
11-7-4. FREEZE, STROBE, NEGA, MOSAIC .................................................................... 94
11-8. BORDERS..................................................................................................................... 95
12. Still Store .............................................................................................................................. 96
12-1. How to Save Stills ......................................................................................................... 96
12-2. Backing-up Stills............................................................................................................ 97
13. Clip Memory..........................................................................................................................98
13-1. Recording ......................................................................................................................98
13-1-1. Recording Video .....................................................................................................98
13-1-2. Recording Video and Key .......................................................................................99
13-1-3. Recording Modes....................................................................................................99
13-2. Playing Clips ................................................................................................................100
13-2-1. Ex. 1: Playback on PGM Bus ................................................................................100
13-2-2. Ex. 2: Playback on KEY1 ......................................................................................100
13-2-3. Setting Playback IN/OUT Points ...........................................................................101
13-3. Delay Line ....................................................................................................................102
13-4. Clearing Clip Memory ..................................................................................................103
13-5. Video Clip Operation Quick Reference ........................................................................103
14. CG WIPE ............................................................................................................................104
14-1. CG WIPE Operation Example 1...................................................................................105
14-2. CG WIPE Operation Example 2...................................................................................106
14-3. Saving CG WIPE Settings ...........................................................................................108
14-4. CG WIPE Menu Quick Reference................................................................................108
15. Picture-in-Picture ................................................................................................................110
15-1. Selecting Video for PinP ..............................................................................................110
15-2. Inserting PinP Video ....................................................................................................111
15-2-1. IN/OUT Effects for PinP ........................................................................................111
15-2-2. PinP Image Crossfade Transition .........................................................................112
15-2-3. Changing Position and Size of PinP .....................................................................113
15-2-4. Rotating PinP ........................................................................................................113
15-2-5. Crop and Border ...................................................................................................114
16. Multiviewer ..........................................................................................................................115
16-1. Assigning the Multiviewer to an AUX Bus ....................................................................115
16-2. Selecting the Split-screen Type ...................................................................................116
16-3. Selecting Video for Each Split Area .............................................................................116
16-4. Adding Titles, On-air Tally and Frame Border..............................................................117
16-4-1. Titles .....................................................................................................................117
16-4-2. On-air Tally ...........................................................................................................118
16-4-3. Tally Link...............................................................................................................118
16-4-4. Frame Border........................................................................................................119
17. Event Memory.....................................................................................................................120
17-1. Storing Events..............................................................................................................120
17-2. Recalling Events ..........................................................................................................122
17-2-1. DIRECT Mode.......................................................................................................122
17-2-2. Using the RECALL Button ....................................................................................123
17-2-3. Transitions Using Event Recall .............................................................................124
17-3. Overwrite Protection ....................................................................................................125
17-4. Deleting Events............................................................................................................125
17-5. Setting the User Default Menu when Storing an Event ................................................126
17-6. Loading an Event at Start-up .......................................................................................126
18. Sequence Operation ...........................................................................................................128
18-1. Sequence Operation Examples ...................................................................................129
18-1-1. Creating New Sequences..................................................................................... 129
18-1-2. Playing Back Sequences...................................................................................... 130
18-1-3. Quick Recall (Direct Mode) .................................................................................. 131
18-1-4. Playing Back Sequences Using Advanced Settings............................................. 132
18-1-5. Editing Sequences: Adding or Inserting Steps ..................................................... 134
18-1-6. Editing Sequences: Copying and Deleting Steps ................................................. 136
18-1-7. Editing Sequences: Setting Interpolation and Duration ........................................ 137
18-2. Sequence Menu and Keypad Mode ............................................................................ 138
18-2-1. SEQUENCE Mode ............................................................................................... 138
18-2-2. SEQ EDIT Mode................................................................................................... 139
18-3. Sequence Memory Operation Examples ..................................................................... 141
18-3-1. Setting Overwrite Protection on Sequence Memory 2.......................................... 141
18-3-2. Deleting "Sequence Memory 2"............................................................................ 141
18-4. Backing Up Sequence Data ........................................................................................ 141
19. File Operations ................................................................................................................... 142
19-1. USB Flash Memory ..................................................................................................... 142
19-2. Available Files ............................................................................................................. 142
19-3. Saving Data to USB Flash Memory............................................................................. 143
19-4. Loading Data from USB Flash Memory ....................................................................... 144
19-4-1. To Load Setting Data ........................................................................................... 144
19-4-2. To Download Image Files..................................................................................... 144
19-5. Moving between USB Flash Memory Directories ........................................................ 145
19-6. Deleting Files in USB Flash Memory........................................................................... 145
19-7. Renaming Files in USB Flash Memory........................................................................ 146
20. System Setup Settings ....................................................................................................... 147
20-1. Selecting System Signal Format ................................................................................. 147
20-2. Crosspoint Switch Timing ............................................................................................ 147
20-3. Selecting Reference Signal ......................................................................................... 148
20-3-1. To Set Reference Input ........................................................................................ 148
20-3-2. To Set Reference Output ..................................................................................... 148
20-4. Adjusting Video Signal Levels ..................................................................................... 149
20-4-1. Proc Amp ............................................................................................................. 149
20-4-2. Video Level Clip ................................................................................................... 149
20-5. Safety Area Markers.................................................................................................... 150
20-6. Ancillary Data .............................................................................................................. 151
20-6-1. M/E Bus................................................................................................................ 151
20-6-2. P/P Bus ................................................................................................................ 151
20-6-3. AUX and Optional Outputs ................................................................................... 151
20-7. Setting Date and Time................................................................................................. 152
20-8. Buzzer, Brightness and Screen Saver......................................................................... 152
21. USER Button ...................................................................................................................... 153
21-1. USER Button Operation .............................................................................................. 153
21-2. USER Button Settings ................................................................................................. 153
21-3. Triggering User Buttons .............................................................................................. 158
22. Reboot and Initialize ........................................................................................................... 160
22-1. Rebooting System ....................................................................................................... 160
22-2. System Initialization..................................................................................................... 160
23. GPI IN/OUT and Tally Outputs............................................................................................161
23-1. GPI Control ..................................................................................................................161
23-1-1. GPI IN ...................................................................................................................161
23-1-2. GPI OUT ...............................................................................................................162
23-1-3. OU GPI/O .............................................................................................................162
23-2. Tally Output..................................................................................................................165
23-2-1. Tally Color Setting.................................................................................................165
23-2-2. Tally Output Settings (GPI/TALLY OUT)...............................................................165
23-2-3. Tally Output Settings (HVS-30TALR)....................................................................168
23-2-4. Sending Tally Signals to Tally Units......................................................................169
24. VTR / VDCP Control ...........................................................................................................170
24-1. Assigning a VTR or VDCP Channel to an RS-422 Port ...............................................170
24-2. Selecting a VTR or VDCP Channel..............................................................................171
24-3. Selecting the VDCP Type ............................................................................................171
24-4. Playback and Recording ..............................................................................................172
24-5. Assigning Functions to User Buttons ...........................................................................172
24-6. VDCP Operation ..........................................................................................................173
24-6-1. Creating Playlists ..................................................................................................173
24-6-2. Jumping to an IN or OUT point or a Specified Position.........................................175
24-6-3. Changing CLIP ID and Deleting Clips ...................................................................175
24-6-4. Copying and Clearing Playlists .............................................................................176
24-6-5. Creating New Clips (Recording using VDCP) .......................................................176
25. Connecting to FOR-A MFR Series Router ..........................................................................178
25-1. Assigning Router Channel to RS-422 port ...................................................................179
25-1-1. Assigning Router Control Function .......................................................................179
25-1-2. Setting MFR Link ..................................................................................................179
25-2. Router Control..............................................................................................................179
25-2-1. Crosspoint Switches using the Menu ....................................................................179
25-2-2. Crosspoint Switches with Bus Buttons (Setup) .....................................................180
25-2-3. Crosspoint Switches using the Bus Buttons..........................................................181
25-2-4. Displaying Destination / Source Settings ..............................................................181
25-2-5. Saving and Loading Crosspoints ..........................................................................182
25-2-6. Salvo Switching.....................................................................................................183
25-3. Linking Titles by Sending TSL messages ....................................................................184
25-3-1. TSL Tally...............................................................................................................184
26. Connecting to Routers ........................................................................................................185
26-1. Assigning a Router Channel to an RS-422 port ...........................................................185
26-2. Router Control..............................................................................................................185
26-3. Linking Titles and Tallies in the System via TSL Protocol............................................185
26-3-1. Linking Titles in the System by Receiving TSL messages ....................................186
26-3-2. TSL Tally by Sending TSL messages ...................................................................186
27. Audio Mixer Control ............................................................................................................187
27-1. Connecting Audio Mixers .............................................................................................187
27-2. Audio-Follow-Video Setting..........................................................................................187
28. Editor Control (Option) ........................................................................................................189
28-1. Editor Control Settings .................................................................................................189
28-2. Connection Settings with Editor (EDITOR port setting) ............................................... 190
29. Network Settings ................................................................................................................ 191
29-1. Arcnet .......................................................................................................................... 191
29-2. Ethernet....................................................................................................................... 192
29-3. Image Data Transfer ................................................................................................... 193
29-3-1. Setup Before Connection ..................................................................................... 193
29-3-2. Sending / Receiving Still Images .......................................................................... 194
29-3-3. Sending Images to Clip Memory .......................................................................... 195
30. Status Information .............................................................................................................. 196
30-1. Checking Alarm Status ................................................................................................ 196
30-2. Verifying Versions ....................................................................................................... 196
30-3. Installed Options.......................................................................................................... 197
31. Upgrading Operational Version .......................................................................................... 198
31-1. How to Verify Version .................................................................................................. 198
31-2. Upgrading HVS-350HS ............................................................................................... 198
31-3. Loading Setting Data................................................................................................... 199
32. Connecting Control and Remote Panels ............................................................................ 200
32-1. Connecting Remote Panels (HVS-30RU).................................................................... 200
32-2. Connecting Control Panels (HVS-30OU/35OU/35ROU) ............................................. 201
33. Setup Setting for HVS-30RU .............................................................................................. 203
33-1. Assigning Sources to PGM/PST Bus buttons.............................................................. 203
33-2. Setting USER Buttons on HVS-30FP and HVS-30RU ................................................ 204
33-3. OSD Operation............................................................................................................ 204
34. Specifications and Dimensions........................................................................................... 205
34-1. Specifications .............................................................................................................. 205
34-2. External Dimensions ................................................................................................... 208
34-2-1. HVS-350HS.......................................................................................................... 208
34-2-2. HVS-35OU ........................................................................................................... 209
34-2-3. HVS-35ROU......................................................................................................... 209
Appendix 1. Available File List
Appendix 2. Transition Pattern List
2-1 WIPE Type
2-2 DVE Type
Appendix 3. HVS-30OU for HVS-350HS
Index
1. Prior to Starting
1-1. Welcome
Congratulations! By purchasing HVS-350 series Hanabi Switcher you have entered the world of
FOR-A and its many innovative products. Thank you for your patronage and we hope you will
turn to FOR-A products again and again to satisfy your video and audio needs.
FOR-A provides a wide range of products, from basic support units to complex system
controllers, which have been increasingly joined by products for computer video based systems.
Whatever your needs, talk to your FOR-A representative. We will do our best to be of continuing
service to you.
1-2. Features
<Standard features>
Compact HD/SD main unit (3U high)
5 types of control panels
HVS-35OU: 1.5 M/E Operation Unit
HVS-35ROU: 1.5 M/E Remote Control Panel (Rack size)
HVS-30OU: 1 M/E Operation Unit
HVS-30RU: 1 M/E Remote Unit
HVS-35GUI: Remote Control Software
HD/SD-SDI 8-input/8-output, Max. 24-input/12-output
Variety of I/O options such as HD/SD-SDI, analog/digital RGB (VGA, DVI-D), HD/SD analog
component, analog composite
Accepts both HD and SD inputs with a frame synchronizer on each input and up-resize
engine on 4 inputs within 8 inputs.
Built-in 16-way multiviewer, supporting 4, 10 or 16-way split views with tally and title display
2 Up-stream Keyers with chroma key, and 4 DSKs, 2.5D DVE on each channel
Dual Picture in Picture function
More than 150 of various 2D and 3D DVE transition patterns
10 sequence memories (max. 80 steps for each)
Crossfade transitions available when loading events, switching AUX signals and inserting
PinP images
4 channels of still stores
Safety area markers
Internal color-bar generator
<Optional features>
Input/output options
HVS-30HSDI/HSDI-A/HSAI/PCIN
HVS-30HSDO/HSAO/PCO
HVS-35ED: Editor Interface software
HVS-35VR: Virtual Link software
HVS-35S3D: 3D Monitoring software
HVS-30TALR: Tally Relay Output card
HVS-35PSM: Redundant Power Supply Unit for Main Unit
HVS-35PSO: Redundant Power Supply Unit for Operation Unit
1
1-3. About This Manual
This manual is intended to help the user easily operate the Hanabi series switchers and make
full use of their functions during operations. Before configuring or operating your system, read
this operation manual thoroughly to ensure you understand the product. After reading, it is
important to keep this manual in a safe place and available for future reference.
Font Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
Boxed text (for example MATT, F1, TRANS, and AUX1) is used for the control panel
buttons.
Bold text (such as SIGNAL, TYPE and COLOR is used for the setting parameters in the
menus.
Shaded text (such as MATT, ON, OFF, 50.0, 30, and PGM is used for the setting values in
the menus.
Text enclosed by square brackets (such as [SETUP-SYSTEM]) indicates the menu name.
2
2. Panel Descriptions
2-1. HVS-350HS
Front Panel
HVS-350HS
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
POWER 1ALARM
POWER 2ALARM
POWER 1
No.
1
Name
Power switch 1
POWER 1
indicator
ALARM 1
indicator
Power switch 2
2
POWER 2
indicator
ALARM 2
indicator
POWER 2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Description
For Power 1 ON/OFF.
Lit green
Power is supplied to the unit.
Power is not supplied to the unit. Or power unit is not
Unlit
installed.
Lit red when a cooling fan fails. In such a case, power off the unit and
consult your FOR-A supplier. The indicator is normally unlit.
This indicator works the same as the ALARM indicator located on the
Control panel.
For Power 2 ON/OFF (option).
Lit green
Power is supplied to the unit.
Power is not supplied to the unit. Or power unit is not
Unlit
installed.
Lit red when a cooling fan fails. In such a case, power off the unit and
consult your FOR-A supplier. The indicator is normally unlit.
This indicator works the same as the ALARM indicator located on the
Control panel.
3
Rear Panel
2
1
AC10 0V - 24 0V 50 /60 Hz IN
AC 10 0 - 240 V 50 /60Hz IN
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A CE
B D F
1
2
3
4
I/O
5
6
SDI IN PUT
7
8
PG M
PGM
M/E
P/P
1
2
4
3
5
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
ED ITOR
LA N
GPI IN
GPI/TALLY OU T
1
TO OU
RE F OUT
GENLOCK
Name
SDI INPUT
2
RS-422
R EF IN
CP U/GE NLO CK
6
AU X
3
4
RS-422
Description
Used to input HD/SD SDI video signal. 8 inputs (BNC)
Used
to output HD/SD SDI video signal. 8 outputs (M/E
SDI OUTPUT
PGM, P/P PGM and 6 auxiliary outputs) (BNC)
EDITOR
Used for editor connection. (9-pin D-sub, female)
Used
for 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Ethernet connection.
LAN
(RJ-45)
GPI IN
Used for GPI input. (15-pin D-sub, female)
GPI/TALLY OUT Used for GPI output and Tally output. (25-pin D-sub,
female)
Used for HVS-35OU/35ROU connection via Arcnet. It can
also be used to connect the Hanabi AUX control boxes.
(BNC)
TO OU
One of two terminals is used for loop-through connection. It
must be 75-ohm terminated if not looped-through.
Used to input a genlock signal; tri-level sync or black burst.
(BNC)
REF IN
The center terminal is used for loopthrough connection. It
must be 75-ohm terminated if not looped-through.
REF OUT
Used to output a reference signal
4 ports (9-pin D-sub, female)
Used to connect external devices such as Hanabi tally
RS-422
units, HVS-30RU, VTR/VDCP devices, routers and audio
mixers.
Option Slots
Used to install optional input/output expansion cards.
Power 1 connection with ground terminal
AC IN1
(AC100V-240V 50/60 Hz)
Power 2 connection with ground terminal
AC IN2
(AC100V-240V 50/60 Hz)
4
Refer to
5
6
20-3
2-4-1
2-4-3
2-4-3
2-3
3
3
2-4-2
3
2-2. HVS-35OU/35ROU (Operation Unit)
HVS-35OU Control Panel
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
BLACK
TRANS
CONTROL
USB MEMORY
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
SWAP
NEW
MATT
8
FILE
9
5
4
KEY1
W IPE
CHANNEL
KEY2
KEYER/P IN P
6
(2D DVE)
INS
POWER1
1
2
USER BUTTON
7
COPY
STILL
DEC
ALARM
BKGD
INC
SETUP
PAGE
KEY1
POWER2
KEY2
4
F2
1
2
PGM
F4
F3
3
PREV
4
CLEAN
5
AUX
PGM
7
CUT
DSK2
0
RECALL
STOP
COPY
PASTE
8
POS
ROT
FINE
DEF
3
DEL
ADD
DSK3
CLEAR
WIPE POS
DSK4
MENU
HVS-350HS
JOYSTICK
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
PREV
M/E
6
PLAY
DSK1
P IN P2
2
1
+/F1
P IN P1
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
P/P
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
FADER LIMIT
NEXT TRANSITION
DVE
KEY 1
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
MIX
20
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
ON AIR
DVE
DSK 1
DVE
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
P/P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
M/E
DVE
AUTO
CUT
DSK 4
ON AIR
HVS-35ROU Control Panel
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
COPY/SWAP
SEQEDIT
BLACK
TRANS
CONTROL
MENU USER BUTTON
USB MEMORY
BKGD
ALARM
POWER2
1
1
7
COPY
SWAP
NEW
STILL
MATT
FILE
DEC
4
PAGE
F1
5
6
F2
F4
F3
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
+/-
1
2
3
PLAY
CUT
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
0
RECALL
COPY
PASTE
STOP
1
KEYER
2
3
P IN P
9
KEY1
CLEAR
2
8
KEY1
WIPE
CHANNEL
KEY2
KEYER/P IN P
(2D DVE)
INS
POWER1
1
2
USER BUTTON
INC
SETUP
2
4
1
PGM
DSK
2
3
4
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
AUX
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
DEL
WIPE POS
POS
ROT
FINE
DEF
ADD
DSK4
MENU
HVS-350HS
JOYSTICK
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
P/P
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
P IN P
2
12
BKGD
KEY2
KEY1
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MIX
12
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
ON AIR
DVE
DSK 1
DVE
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
P/P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M/E
DVE
AUTO
CUT
DSK 4
ON AIR
5
No.
Name
1
ALARM indicator
2
Menu Control Block
3
SELECT/
KEYPAD
4
BLACK TRANS
5
USB MEMORY
6
USER BUTTON
7
BUS SELECT Block
8
KEY/AUX Bus
9
10
M/E Bus
P/P Bus
11
Joystick Block
12
M/E Transition Block
13
KEY/DSK/PINP
Transition Block
P/P Transition Block
14
Description
Indicates the fan alarm status in the main unit.
The indicator blinks red when an alarm occurs. In
such a case, power off the system and consult your
FOR-A supplier. The indicator is normally unlit.
This indicator works the same as the ALARM indicator
located on the front panel of the main unit.
The menu control block is composed of the menu
display, menu control push-buttons (F1 to F4) and
page up/down buttons.
Used for menu setting, number input, pattern
selection, event control and sequence operation.
Four memory buttons (WIPE, 2D DVE, EVENT,
SEQUENCE) and four control buttons (MENU, USER
BUTTON, COPY/SWAP and SEQ EDIT) above the
keypad change the keypad mode.
Used to perform black transitions.
Used to connect a USB flash memory for image file
import and export or system setting backup.
(USB1.1, Type-A)
User assignable buttons. Menu shortcuts or functions
can be assigned to these buttons.
Used to select a bus, then to select a video in the
KEY/AUX bus (No 8).
Used to select video for the bus selected in the BUS
SELECT block (No. 7).
The video can be selected from KEY/AUX bus
buttons, PGM, PREV, CLEAN and MV.
Used to select video for M/E background.
Used to select video for P/P background.
Used to set position, size or color settings in the
specific menu parameters.
Used to perform transitions for M/E background and
KEY.
Refer to
4
4-1-1
4-2-3
8-8-2
17
18
8-3
19
21
6-1-1
10
15-1
16-1
5
4-2-4
8
Used to perform transitions for KEY, DSK and PINP.
16-2
Used to perform transitions for P/P background.
8
6
HVS-35OU Rear Panel
POWER 1
RATING LABEL
C O NT RO L
TO M U
(SER VICE)
SE R .N O .
POWER 2
ON
PO W ER
AC100- 240V 50/60Hz IN
G PI/T A LLY O U T
OF F
HVS-35OU
HVS-35ROU Rear Panel
POWER 2
POWER 1
RATING LABEL
CONTROL
TO MU
SER.NO.
ON
POWER
AC1 00-240V 5 0/60H z IN
GPI/TALLY OUT
(SERVICE)
OF F
HVS-35OU
No.
1
Name
CONTROL
2
TO MU
3
4
5
GPI/TALLY OUT
AC IN
POWER1
6
POWER2
Description
Refer to
Used for service purposes. Do not use.
Arcnet port. Used for the main unit connection.
The other connector (loopthrough) can be used for AUX
29-1
unit connection. The loopthrough connector must be 75
ohm terminated if it is not connected to other system
equipment.
Used for GPI input/output and tally output
Used to supply AC power. (100VAC - 240VAC 50/60 Hz)
Used to power the unit On/Off.
Used for installing redundant power supply. (HVS-35PSO
option)
7
2-3. Option Slots
All expansion cards can be fitted via the rear of the main unit. The bottom 6 slots (A to E shown
in the figure in this page) are dedicated to these optional cards.
IMPORTANT
For further details on system expansion (optional cards) and fan replacement, contact
your FOR-A supplier.
Slots for Option Cards at Main Unit Rear Panel
Four input expansion cards can be installed in slots IN1-4 (A, B, C, and D).
Two output expansion cards can be installed in slot OUT1-2 (E and F).
Two tally relay expansion cards (HVS-30TALR) can be installed in Slot A to F.
2
1
‚`‚b‚P‚O‚O |‚Q‚S‚O‚u @ ‚T‚O ^‚U‚O‚g‚š @‚h‚m
‚`‚b‚P‚O‚O |‚Q‚S‚O‚u @ ‚T ‚O ^‚U‚O‚g‚š @‚h‚m
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A C E
B D F
1
3
2
5
4
I/O
6
7
SDI INPUT
8
PGM
PGM
M/E
P/P
1
3
2
4
5
Option Slot
EDITO R
LAN
(1 0/100 BAS E-T )
GPI IN
Available card
HVS-30HSDI-A
IN 1-4
(A, B, C, D)
HVS-30HSDI
HVS-30HSAI
HVS-30PCIN
HVS-30HSDO
OUT 1-2
(E, F)
HVS-30HSAO
A to F
HVS-30TALR
HVS-30PCO
GP I/TALL Y OUT
1
TO OU
2
RS- 422
REF OU T
REF IN
CPU/GENLOCK
6
AUX
GEN LOCK
3
4
RS- 422
Available Video Signal
(Connector)
HD/SD SDI (BNC)
(w/o resize function)
HD/SD SDI (BNC)
(w/ resize function)
HD/SD analog component or
HD/SD analog composite (BNC)
Digital RGB (DVI-D) and
Analog RGB (VGA)
HD/SD SDI (BNC)
HD/SD analog component or
HD/SD analog composite (BNC)
Digital RGB (DVI-D) and
Analog RGB (VGA)
Tally Relay Output (37-pin D-sub)
8
Number of
input/output
per card
Refer to
4 inputs
4 inputs
5-8
2 inputs
2 inputs
3 outputs
6-5
2 outputs
6-5
2 outputs
6-5
18 outputs
2-4-6,
23-2-3
2-4. Interfaces
2-4-1. EDITOR Connector
9-pin D-sub (male)
with inch screws

Pin Assignment Table
Pin No. Signal Name
1
FG
2
T3
R+
4
SG
5
NC
6
SG
7
T+
8
R9
FG
In/Out
Out
In
Out
In
Description
Frame ground
Transmit data (-)
Receive data (+)
Signal ground
Not used
Signal ground
Transmit data (+)
Receive data (-)
Frame ground
2-4-2. RS-422 Connector 1-4
9-pin D-sub (female)
with inch screws

Pin Assignment Table
Pin No. Signal Name
1
FG
2
R3
T+
4
SG
5
NC
6
SG
7
R+
8
T9
FG
In/Out
In
Out
In
Out
Description
Frame ground
Receive data (-)
Transmit data (+)
Signal ground
Not used
Signal ground
Receive data (+)
Transmit data (-)
Frame ground
RS-422 ports are used for the following device connections. See the related chapters to
configure the connections.
See section 3-3. "How to Connect between MU and OU Units."
See section 32-1. "Connecting Remote Panels (HVS-30RU)."
Tally Units:
See section 23-2. "Tally Output."
VTR/VDCP devices: See section 24."VTR / VDCP Control."
Routers:
See sections 25 and 26.
HVS-30RU:
9
2-4-3. GPI IN Connector
15-pin D-sub (female)
with inch screws

Pin Assignment Table
Pin No.
Description
1
M/E BKGD AUTO TRANS (default setting)
2
KEY1 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
3
KEY2 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
4
PinP1 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
5
PinP2 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
6
P/P BKGD AUTO TRANS (default setting)
7
DSK1 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
8
DSK2 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
9
DSK3 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
10
DSK4 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
11
Not used
12
Not used
13
Signal ground
14
Signal ground
15
Signal ground
The pin assignment shown above is the factory default assignment. Pin assignments can be
changed via operational menus. See section 23-1-1 "GPI IN".
GPI IN Circuit
Switch or Relay
Open corrector
External Device
HVS-350HS
VCC
External Device
VCC
HVS-350HS
VCC
10
VCC
2-4-4. GPI/TALLY OUT Connector
25-pin D-sub (female)
with inch screws

Pin Assignment Table
Pin No.
Description
1
RED TALLY-IN01 (default setting)
2
RED TALLY-IN02 (default setting)
3
RED TALLY-IN03 (default setting)
4
RED TALLY-IN04 (default setting)
5
RED TALLY-IN05 (default setting)
6
RED TALLY-IN06 (default setting)
7
RED TALLY-IN07 (default setting)
8
RED TALLY-IN08 (default setting)
9
RED TALLY-IN09 (default setting)
10
RED TALLY-IN10 (default setting)
11
RED TALLY-IN11 (default setting)
12
RED TALLY-IN12 (default setting)
13
RED TALLY-IN13 (default setting)
14
RED TALLY-IN14 (default setting)
15
RED TALLY-IN15 (default setting)
16
RED TALLY-IN16 (default setting)
17
RED TALLY-IN17 (default setting)
18
RED TALLY-IN18 (default setting)
19
RED TALLY-IN19 (default setting)
20
RED TALLY-IN20 (default setting)
21
Frame ground
22
Frame ground
23
Frame ground
24
Frame ground
25
+5V output (MAX 0.5A)
The pin assignments shown above are the factory default assignments. Pin
assignments can be changed via operational menus. See section 23-1-2 "GPI OUT"
and 23-2-2 "Tally Output Settings (GPI/TALLY OUT)".
GPI OUT/ TALLY Out Circuit
HVS-350HS
External Device
Max voltage: 40V
Max load current:
100mA
11
2-4-5. GPI/TALLY OUT Connector (HVS-35OU/35ROU)
15-pin D-sub (female)
with inch screws

Pin Assignment Table
Pin No.
IN/OUT
Description
1
IN
M/E BKGD AUTO TRANS (default setting)
2
IN
KEY1 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
3
IN
KEY2 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
4
IN
PinP1 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
5
IN
PinP2 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
6
IN
P/P BKGD AUTO TRANS (default setting)
7
Signal ground
8
Signal ground
9
OUT
M/E BKGD TRANS STS (default setting)
10
OUT
KEY1 TRANS STS (default setting)
11
OUT
KEY2 TRANS STS (default setting)
12
OUT
PinP1 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
13
OUT
PinP2 AUTO TRANS (default setting)
14
OUT
P/P BKGD TRANS STS (default setting)
15
+5V output (MAX 0.5A)
The pin assignments shown above are the factory default assignments. Pin
assignments can be changed via operational menus. See section 23-1-3 "OU
GPI/O". See the previous sections for the GPI IN and GPI/TALLY OUT circuits.
12
2-4-6. TALLY OUT Connector (HVS-30TALR)
The TALLY OUT connectors are available only when HVS-30TALR cards are installed.

Pin Assignment Table (37-pin D-sub, female, with inch screws)
Pin No. Output signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TALLY OUT1 Normally Open
TALLY OUT1 COMMON
TALLY OUT2 Normally Open
TALLY OUT2 COMMON
TALLY OUT3 Normally Open
TALLY OUT3 COMMON
TALLY OUT4 Normally Open
TALLY OUT4 COMMON
TALLY OUT5 Normally Open
Channel Pin No.
No.
20
1
21
22
2
23
24
3
25
26
4
27
28
5
29
30
6
31
32
7
33
34
8
35
36
9
37
Output signal
TALLY OUT10 Normally Open
TALLY OUT10 COMMON
TALLY OUT11 Normally Open
TALLY OUT11 COMMON
TALLY OUT12 Normally Open
TALLY OUT12 COMMON
TALLY OUT13 Normally Open
TALLY OUT13 COMMON
TALLY OUT14 Normally Open
Channel
No.
10
11
12
13
14
10
TALLY OUT5 COMMON
TALLY OUT14 COMMON
11
TALLY OUT6 Normally Open
TALLY OUT15 Normally Open
15
12
TALLY OUT6 COMMON
TALLY OUT15 COMMON
13
TALLY OUT7 Normally Open
TALLY OUT16 Normally Open
16
14
TALLY OUT7 COMMON
TALLY OUT16 COMMON
15
TALLY OUT8 Normally Open
TALLY OUT17 Normally Open
17
16
TALLY OUT8 COMMON
TALLY OUT17 COMMON
17
TALLY OUT9 Normally Open
TALLY OUT18 Normally Open
18
18
TALLY OUT9 COMMON
TALLY OUT18 COMMON
19
Reserved
* Normally Open: Open when a tally is present and closed with COMMON pin when no tally is present.
* Do not connect Pin 19.
Channel No.
Tally Output for Card 1
Tally Output for Card 2
1
RED TALLY-IN01 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN01 (default)
2
RED TALLY-IN02 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN02 (default)
3
RED TALLY-IN03 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN03 (default)
4
RED TALLY-IN04 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN04 (default)
5
RED TALLY-IN05 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN05 (default)
6
RED TALLY-IN06 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN06 (default)
7
RED TALLY-IN07 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN07 (default)
8
RED TALLY-IN08 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN08 (default)
9
RED TALLY-IN09 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN09 (default)
10
RED TALLY-IN10 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN10 (default)
11
RED TALLY-IN11 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN11 (default)
12
RED TALLY-IN12 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN12 (default)
13
RED TALLY-IN13 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN13 (default)
14
RED TALLY-IN14 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN14 (default)
15
RED TALLY-IN15 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN15 (default)
16
RED TALLY-IN16 (default)
GREEN TALLY-IN16 (default)
17-18
Do not use. (default)
Do not use. (default)
* Whether Card 1 or Card 2 is chosen on a dipswitch on the HVS-30TALR card.
Tally outputs can be freely assigned. (See section 23-2-3. "Tally Output Settings (HVS-30TALR)".)
13

TALLY OUT circuit (Relay output)
HVS-30TALR side
TALLY OUT
connector
External device
COM.
IA
VCC
C.
VCC = 24VDC
IA = 400 mA (max)
RELAY
The maximum switching current for each output is 400 mA.
The HVS-30TALR is a relay board. Use the supplied or commercially-prepared 37-pin
D-sub male connector (with #4-40 inch screws) for making a connection cable.
14
3. Connection
3-1. Basic Connection
To other devices
M/E PGM
P/P PGM
Reference
HD/SD SDI
Preview
(AUX1)
Reference (BNC)
HD/SD SDI
TSG (Reference)
Video Server
VCR, etc
2
To AC
power
source
1
AC 10 0V - 24 0V 50 /60 Hz IN
AC 10 0 - 240 V 50 /60H z IN
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A CE
B D F
1
2
3
5
4
I/O
6
7
SDI IN PUT
8
PG M
PGM
M/E
P/P
1
2
4
3
ED ITOR
LA N
GPI/TALLY OU T
GPI IN
2
RS-422
RE F OUT
REF IN
CP U/GE NLO CK
1
6
5
AU X
TO OU
3
4
RS-422
GENLOCK
ARCNET (BNC)
75-ohm terminator
POWER 1
RATING LABEL
C O NT ROL
TO MU
(SE R V ICE)
SER .N O .
POWER 2
ON
P OW ER
AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN
GP I/T A LLY O U T
OF F
HVS-35OU
75-ohm terminator
To AC
power
source
NOTE
See section 29-1. "ARCNET" for connecting between the main unit and
HVS-35OU/35ROU via Arcnet. See section 20-3. "Selecting Reference Signal" for
reference signal setting. See section 6-2. "Preview Set Up" for how to display the
preview image.
15
3-2. Optional Configuration
HD/SD SDI
To other devices
M/E PGM
P/P PGM
Reference
HD/SD SDI
Preview
(AUX1)
TSG (Reference)
Multiviewer
(AUX2)
Video Server
VCR, etc
2
To AC
power
source
1
AC10 0V - 24 0V 50 /60 Hz IN
AC 10 0 - 240 V 50 /60Hz IN
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A CE
B D F
1
2
3
5
4
I/O
6
7
SDI IN PUT
8
PG M
PGM
M/E
P/P
1
2
4
3
5
ED ITOR
LA N
GPI IN
RE F OUT
TO OU
GPI/TALLY OU T
2
RS-422
R EF IN
CP U/GE NLO CK
1
6
AU X
3
4
RS-422
GENLOCK
75-ohm
terminator
Editor
Tally Unit1
Tally Unit2
Tally Unit3
GPI Controller
ETHERNET
Router
VTR
HVS-35GUI
ARCNET (BNC)
To other devices
(GPI OUT)
75-ohm
terminator
AUX Control box
AUX Control box
AUX Control box
75-ohm terminator
C O NT ROL
TO MU
75-ohm
RATING LABEL
terminator
(SER VICE)
POWER 1
SER .N O.
POWER 2
ON
PO W ER
AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN
G PI/T ALLY OU T
75-ohm terminator
16
OF F
HVS-35OU
To AC
power
source
NOTE
See section 16. "Multiviewer" for multi-display connection and setup.
See section 23-1. "GPI Control" and section 23-2-2. "Tally Output Settings (GPI/TALLY
OUT)" for setting up GPI input, GPI output and tally output.
See section 23-2-4. "Sending Tally Signals to Tally Units", if you configure the tally
units (Hanabi series option).
See section 28. "Editor Control (Option)" for editor control.
The HVS-AUX8/16/32 units (Hanabi series option), which are used for selecting AUX
signals, can be deployed in the same Arcnet LAN as HVS-35OU/35ROU. See section
29-1. "ARCNET" for Arcnet connection. See the operation manual of the Auxiliary Unit
for how to connect the AUX units to the switcher.
3-3. How to Connect between MU and OU Units
The multiple control panels (OU) and remote units (RU) can be connected to single HVS-350HS
(MU). The maximum system configuration is:
MU (HVS-350HS)
1
OU (HVS-35OU, HVS-35ROU, HVS-30OU) 3 (Multiple of same model is possible.)
RU (HVS-30RU)
2
MU and OU units communicate via Arcnet. If your MU and OU connection is a one-to-one
connection: an HVS-350HS and HVS-35OU or an HVS-350HS and HVS-35ROU, setup is very
easy. Just connect the MU and OU. Any additional network setting is not necessary.
However, if your HVS-350 series system has two or three OU units, the Arcnet ID of devices
should be changed before configuring the system, because the Arcnet does not work if two
devices with the same ID exist in the network. (The remote control units connect to the MU via
RS-422.)
Model
HVS-35OU
HVS-35ROU
HVS-350HS
Arcnet ID (default setting)
1
1
250
To Change the Arcnet OU ID
(1) Connect the MU (HVS-350HS) and an OU (HVS-35OU or HVS-35RU) via Arcnet using a
BNC cable as shown below.
MU ID: 250
OU ID: 1
2
‚`‚b ‚P‚O‚O |‚Q‚S‚O‚u @ ‚T‚O ^‚U‚O‚g‚š @‚h ‚m
‚`‚b ‚P‚O ‚O
1
|‚Q ‚S‚O ‚u @ ‚T ‚O ^‚U‚O‚g‚š @‚h‚m
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A C E
B D F
POWER 1
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
PG M
PGM
M /E
P/P
1
2
4
3
5
6
1
RATING LABEL
2
C O NT RO L
TO MU
SER .N O .
POWER 2
ON
PO W ER
AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN
GP I/T ALLY O U T
(SER VICE )
OF F
I/O
SDI INPUT
AUX
CPU/GE NLOCK
EDITO R
LAN
( 1 0/ 100 BA S E-T )
GP I IN
GP I/TALL Y OUT
TO OU
75Ω terminator
HVS-35OU
RS-422
REF OU T
REF IN
GEN LOCK
3
4
RS-422
Arcnet
75Ω terminator
(75Ω BNC cable)
(2) The MENU control button at the right of the menu display should light up at power ON.
(3) Press the MENU control button and then press the SETUP button.
(4) The SETUP menu's top page appears in the menu display. Turn F1 to select SYSTEM and
then press F1.
17
SETUP
MENU
:>SYSTEM >INPUT
>OUTPUT >PANEL
:>GPI/TLY >FUNCTION>EXT I/F >STATUS
PAGE
(5) In the [SETUP-SYSTEM] menu, turn F1 to select ARCNET and then press F1 to display the
[SETUP-SYSTEM-ARCNET] menu.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
SYSTEM
ARCNET
: OU ID :OU NO :CTRL MU:
: = 1
:=OU1 : =250 :
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
: 1/2
:
(6) To change the ID of OU, turn F1 to change ID to 2 , for example. Then press F1 to confirm
the change.
SYSTEM
ARCNET
: OU ID :OU NO :CTRL MU:
: = 2 :=OU1 : =250
:
: 1/2
:
Change the ID numbers until all of your devices in the Arcnet have different ID numbers.
(7) Turn off the power of the MU and OU units.
(8) Connect all devices in the system and power them on.
3-4. Power ON
Before powering on the system, verify that all system connections are properly made according
to section 3. "Connection."
Control Pannel Power supply
Supply AC power to the control panel using the provided power cord and turn on the power
switch located at the rear panel of HVS-35OU/35ROU.
MU (Main Unit) Power supply
Supply power to the MU using the provided power cable and turn on the power switch located
at the front panel.
IMPORTANT
If a redundant power supply option is installed, turn on both power switches.
18
3-5. System Signal Format Selection at Initial Use
When first switching on your unit, please select a signal format as shown below.
(1) The MENU control button at the right of the menu display should light up at power ON.
(2) Press the MENU control button and then press the SETUP button.
(3) The SETUP menu's top page appears in the menu display. Turn F1 to select SYSTEM and
then press F1.
SETUP
MENU
:>SYSTEM >INPUT
>OUTPUT >PANEL
:>GPI/TLY >FUNCTION>EXT I/F >STATUS
PAGE
(4) The [SETUP - SYSTEM] menu as shown below appears. Turn F1 to select FORMAT and
then press F1.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>TIME
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>INIT
>REBOOT
>ETHERNET
(5) The [SETUP - SYSTEM - FORMAT] menu as shown below appears. Turn F1 to select the
signal format used in the switcher. Then turn F3 to select the aspect ratio.
SYSTEM
FORMAT
:
FORMAT
: =1080/59.94i
:ASPECT :SW TMNG: 1/1
: =16:9 : =ANY :
PAGE
(6) Press the page up button to return to the [SETUP - SYSTEM] menu.
(7) Turn F1 to select REBOOT and press F1. Press ENTER in the SELECT/KEYPAD block to
reboot the switcher
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
MENU
SETUP
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
CONTROL
MENU USER BUTTON COPY/SWAP
USB MEMORY
8
SEQ EDIT
INC
7
COPY
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
DEC
4
5
9
6
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
INS
F1-F4
PAGE
F1
F2
F3
F4
PAGE UP
PAGE DOWN
+/-
1
2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
CLEAR
0
RECALL
STOP
COPY
PASTE
ENTER
DSK4
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
(8) The selected format and aspect are applied after restarting the switcher.
19
4. Menu Operations
4-1. How to Access Menus
4-1-1. Menu Access Buttons
Press the MENU control button below, which changes the buttons in the SELECT/KEYPAD
block to the menu buttons, and then press the buttons on the Keypad to access menus.
MENU
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
CONTROL
MENU USER BUTTON COPY/SWAP
USB MEMORY
8
SEQ EDIT
INC
7
COPY
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
DEC
4
5
9
6
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
INS
PAGE
+/F1
F2
F3
F4
1
2
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
COPY
PASTE
CLEAR
STOP
KEYPAD block
3
PLAY
DSK1
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD

KEYPAD Block
Button
Accessed menu
SET UP
SETUP MENU
STILL
STILL STORE
MATT
FILE
KEY1-2
P in P1-2
DSK1-4
WIPE
MATT COLOR
FILE TOP
KEY1-2 SETUP
PinP1-2 SETUP
DSK1-4 SETUP
WIPE
Menu Description
Accesses menu for setups of system, panel, video
input, video output and external interface.
Accesses menu for operations with still images and
video clips.
Accesses menu for matte color
Accesses menu for file operations using a USB
Accesses menu for KEY setup and KEY effects.
Accesses menu for PinP 1 and PinP 2 setup.
Accesses menu for DSK setup and DSK effects.
Accesses menu for WIPE pattern modification.
SELECT / KEY PAD Block
The SELECT/KEYPAD block has four control modes and
four memory modes as shown in the table below. Eight
control buttons above the Keypad change the Keypad
mode.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
CONTROL
MENU USER BUTTON COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
Mode Selection Buttons
Button
Function
Changes the Keypad to menu access buttons. Pressing on a button
in the Keypad displays the related menu.
MENU
The MENU control button blinks if a parameter has changed and
requires rebooting. In this case, reboot the switcher. (See section
22-1. "Rebooting System.")
USER BUTTON
Changes the Keypad to user buttons.
COPY/SWAP
Changes the Keypad to copy/swap operation buttons.
SEQ EDIT
Changes the Keypad to sequence edit buttons.
WIPE
Changes the Keypad to WIPE pattern memory buttons
2D DVE
Changes the Keypad to 2D DVE pattern memory buttons
EVENT
Changes the Keypad to event memory buttons.
SEQUENCE
Changes the Keypad to sequence memory buttons.
20
4-1-2. Other Menu Access Buttons
By pressing once or twice specific buttons in the bus select section or transition control
section, the related menus can be displayed. (See the figure and tables below.)
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQEDIT
8
9
BLACK
TRANS
CONTROL
USB MEMORY
COPY
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
PAGE
KEY1
POWER2
F1
F2
F4
F3
KEY2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
PGM
2
PREV
3
CLEAN
4
AUX
PGM
M/E
5
6
7
P IN P2
2
3
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK2
STOP
2
P IN P1
1
PLAY
DSK1
KEYER
KEY1
WIPE
CHANNEL
KEY2
6
+/-
CLEAR
1
5
4
KEYER/P IN P
(2D DVE)
INS
POWER1
1
2
USER BUTTON
7
DEC
ALARM
BKGD
INC
8
DSK3
0
RECALL
COPY
PASTE
DSK4
WIPE POS
MENU
POS
ROT
FINE
DEF
HVS-350HS
JOYSTICK
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
P/P
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
MIX
20
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
ON AIR
DVE
DSK 1
DVE
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
P/P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
M/E
DVE
AUTO
CUT
DSK 4
ON AIR
M/E bus and P/P bus
Button
Action
Accessed Menu
MATT1- 2 (*1)
Pressing twice quickly
[MATT] menu
STL11-4 (*1)
Pressing twice quickly
[STILL] menu
STKY (*1)
Pressing twice quickly
[STILL-CLIP/DLY](6/6) menu
SHIFT
Pressing twice quickly
[SETUP-INPUT-ASSIGN](4/4) menu
(*1) Note that MATT1-2 and STL1-4 and STKY buttons represent the bus buttons assigned to
MATT1, MATT2 and STILL1 to STILL2, STILLKEY signals respectively at M/E, P/P and
KEY/AUX. (Refer to section 5. "Video Sources."
BUS SELECT and KEY/AUX block
Button
Action
KEY1-2
Pressing twice quickly
DSK1-4
Pressing twice quickly
MV1-2
Pressing twice quickly
P IN P 1-2
Pressing twice quickly
PREV (M/E, P/P) Pressing twice quickly
CLEAN (M/E)
Pressing twice quickly
AUX1-8
Pressing twice quickly
Transition Block
Button
BKGD
KEY1, KEY2
MIX
WIPE
FADER LIMIT
TRANSITION RATE
PATTERN
Accessed Menu
[KEY(1, 2) -SETUP] menu
[DSK (1, 2, 3, 4) -SETUP] menu
[SET UP-OUTPUT-MV(1, 2)] menu
[PinP (1, 2)-SETUP] menu
[SET UP-OUTPUT-CLN/PREV](2/3)(3/3) menu
[SET UP-OUTPUT-CLN/PREV](1/3) menu
[SETUP-OUTPUT-AUX XPT] (1/2) menu
Action
Pressing twice quickly
Pressing twice quickly
Pressing twice quickly
Pressing twice quickly
Pressing once
Pressing once
Pressing once
Accessed Menu
[TRANS](1/6) menu
[TRANS](2/6) menu
[TRANS](1/6) menu
[WIPE PATTERN] menu
[TRANS LIMIT] menu
[TRANS](1/6) menu
[WIPE PATTERN] menu
4-1-3. USER Button (Menu Shortcut)
User buttons can be assigned to specific menu pages and used as menu shortcuts.
Refer to section 21. "USER Button" for details.
21
4-2. How to Set Values
4-2-1. Displaying Parameters
See section 4-1. "How to Access Menus" to display a desired menu. If a menu has multiple
submenus such as the SETUP menu, navigate to submenus following the procedure below.
Menu navigation (Example for the SETUP menu)
(1) Press the MENU control button to the right of the menu display. Then press the SETUP
button in the Keypad to display the SETUP menu. The SETUP menu's top page will then
appear on the display, as shown below.
Menu title
SETUP
MENU
Submenu title
:>SYSTEM >INPUT
>OUTPUT >PANEL
:>GPI/TLY >FUNCTION>EXT I/F >STATUS
(2) Select a submenu to open by turning F1 (The INPUT submenu is selected in the example
below.) Then press F1 or the page down button to the right to open the selected
submenu.
The current selection is shown in reverse video.
SETUP
MENU
:>SYSTEM >INPUT
>OUTPUT >PANEL
:>GPI/TLY >FUNCTION>EXT I/F >STATUS
PAGE
(3) The [SETUP-INPUT] menu then opens. The [SETUP-INPUT] menu also has got four
submenus. Select a submenu to open by turning and then press F1 or turning F1 and
pressing the page down button to open it. The ">" in front of menu items indicates that a
detail submenu can be accessed by pressing F1.
SETUP
INPUT
:>SIGNAL
:
>PROC AMP>RENAME
>ASSIGN
(4) The [SETUP-INPUT- PROC AMP] menu is displayed as shown below. Now users can
change the parameter values.
Menu title
Parameters
Page / Total page
INPUT
:SELECT : Y-Lv : BLK-Lv:ENABLE : 1/3
PROC AMP: =IN04 : =1.00 : =0
: =ON
:
Values
Page Navigation
As shown in the example below, the [SETUP-INPUT-PROC AMP] submenu spreads across
three pages. When first accessed, page 1 of 3 will be displayed. To go to page 2, simply press
the page down button. Pressing the page up button returns you to page 1.
Pressing the page up button when located at the first page brings you up one level in the
menus. The same happens when pressing the page down button when located at the last
page of a menu.
22
Page no. / Total page
INPUT
:SELECT : Y-Lv : BLK-Lv:ENABLE : 1/3
PROC AMP: =IN04 : =1.00 : =0
: =ON
:
PAGE
INPUT
:SELECT : Pb-Lv : Pr-Lv :ENABLE : 2/3
PROC AMP: =IN04 : =1.00 : =1.00 : =ON
:
PAGE
INPUT
CLIP
:WHT-Lv :BLK-Lv : Pb-Lv : Pr-Lv : 3/3
: =1019 : =4
: =500 : =500 :
SETUP
INPUT
:>SIGNAL
:
>PROC AMP>RENAME
PAGE
>ASSIGN
4-2-2. Changing Settings or Values Using F1 to F4
Once parameters appear in the display window, data is displayed over 2 lines. A maximum of
four parameters can be displayed at a time. The "=" or ">" in front of value indicates that it is
possible to change a parameter setting by turning a menu control push-button (F1 – F4), or
trigger an action by pressing it.
Parameters (First line)
Settings (Second line)
Title
INPUT
SIGNAL
Page/Total page
:SELECT :FORMAT
:RESIZE : FS : 1/3
: =IN01 : =SD-SDI : =4:3 : =ON :
PAGE
Menu Control Push-buttons
(F1 to F4)
Turn clockwise
Turn counter-clockwise
Press and hold down
at least 1 sec.
Turn while pressing
Description
Increases value.
Decreases value.
Reset the parameter to default value.
Quickly increases/decreases value.

System Parameters Requiring Confirmation
Some system parameters require users to confirm any parameter setting change after the
change by pressing a menu control push-button. This prevents users from making mistakes
when changing important system settings.

Parameters with the sign ">"
Parameters with the sign ">" in front of them are executable by pushing the relevant menu
control push-button. For example, pressing a menu control push-button initializes menus
(See section 4-4. "How to Return Settings to Default."), stores still images (See section 12-1.
"How to Save Stills."), saves or loads data (See section 19. "File Operations").
Parameters for selecting colors can be select a color among eight standard
For color parameters, a menu control should be pressed after selecting a color from 8
standard colors. (See section 5-7. "Bus Matte")
23
4-2-3. Changing Settings or Values Using the Numeric Keypad
Users can also use the keypad to input numerical settings to a menu. The procedure
example for changing the matte color by using the keypad is as follows.
(1) Press the MENU control button.
(2) Press the MATT button to display the BUS MATT COLOR menu.
(3) To change the S (Saturation) item, press F1.
(4) Input a new setting from the keypad.
(5) Press ENTER to confirm the setting.
(6) To change the L (Luminance) item, press F2, input the new setting from the keypad and
press ENTER.
(7) To change the H (Hue) item, press F3, input the new setting from the keypad and press
ENTER.
MATT1
COLOR
:
BUS MATT1 COLOR
:RECALL : 1/4
:S=50.0 L=80.2 H=125.5: >GREEN:
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
CONTROL
MENU USER BUTTON COPY/SWAP
USB MEMORY
8
SEQ EDIT
INC
7
COPY
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
DEC
4
5
9
6
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
INS
PAGE
+/F1
F2
F3
F4
1
2
PLAY
CUT
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
CLEAR
0
RECALL
COPY
PASTE
STOP
DEL
3
ADD
DSK4
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
IMPORTANT
When pressing a push-button, press it down lightly and release it within 1 sec. Note
that if you press and hold a control button for more than 1 sec., related settings will be
returned to their default value and a beep will sound.
Pressing CLEAR before ENTER cancels the changes just made.
To enter a negative number, enter the number, press ± then press ENTER.
KEYPAD Operation in Numeric Input mode
The KEYPAD can operate in multiple modes by using the control buttons above the
KEYPAD. To use the KEYPAD for menu input, display a desired parameter, press the
menu control push-button just below the parameter (F1-F4), and enter the value using the
numeric keypad and then press ENTER in the KEYPAD.
24
4-2-4. Changing Settings or Values Using the Joystick
Users can also use the joystick to set position, size and color settings to specific parameters.
The menu pages controllable from the JOYSTICK block are shown in the table below.
MATT, KEY, DSK, PinP and MV menu
Menu
Menu Page
MATT1
BUS MATT1 COLOR
KEY1-2
PinP1-2
INPUT SIDE
Menu
MATT2
BORDER COLOR
POSITION SIZE (*1)
LOCAL ROTATION (*2)
CENTER POSITION
INSERT MATT COLOR
KEY EDGE COLOR
KEY AUTO CK
BORDER COLOR
POSITION SIZE (*1)
LOCAL ROTATION (*2)
CENTER POSITION
MATT COLOR
DSK1-4
Menu Page
BUS MATT2 COLOR1
BUS MATT2 COLOR2
BORDER COLOR
POSITION SIZE (*1)
LOCAL ROTATION (*2)
CENTER POSITION
INSERT MATT COLOR
MV1-2
BORDER COLOR
(*1) Quickly pressing KEY1-2, DSK1-4 or PinP1-2 in the BUS SELECT section twice and then quickly
pressing POS in the Joystick section twice opens the related menu.
(*2)Quickly pressing twice KEY1-2, DSK1-4 or PinP1-2 in the BUS SELECT section and then quickly
pressing ROT in the Joystick section twice opens the related menu.
WIPE MODIFY menu
Pattern No.
All
0 to 99
100 to 137
140 to 162
Menu page
BORDER COLOR
POSITION ANGLE (*1)
POSITION SIZE (*1)
WARP LIGHT COLOR
(*1) Pressing WIPE POS in the Joystick section opens the related menu.
How to Use the Joystick
Users can simultaneously perform up to three item settings using the joystick as below.
(1) Open a menu page you want to set. The position, rotation and color setting pages can be
directly open using the buttons on the Joystick section.
PinP1
:
BORDER COLOR
BDR COL :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
:RECALL : 3/3
: >BLUE :
(2) Press the MENU button in the joystick block.
(3) Move the joystick to the desired direction to change three items simultaneously.
X-axis Moves the joystick left and right (for S item above).
Y-axis Moves the joystick up and down (for L item above).
Z-axis Twist the joystick clockwise or counterclockwise
(for H item above).
MENU Button
Pressing the MENU button in the Joystick block allows the user to control menu items with
the joystick if controllable items are included in the displayed menu.
25
FINE Button
The FINE button allows the user to finely control the
joystick when the button lights up.
WIPE POS button
The WIPE POS button is used to quickly access the
related menu pages in the WIPE MODIFY menu
without moving among submenus. (See the previous
page.)
BKGD
KEY1 WIPE
CHANNEL
KEY2
KEYER/P IN P
WIPE POS
POS
(2D DVE)
ROT
POS and ROT buttons in KEY/PinP (2D DVE)
The POS button is used to quickly access the menu
JOYSTICK
pages related to position and size parameters for KEY,
DSK and PinP menus. The ROT button is used to quickly access the menu pages related to
rotation parameters. See below for how to use these buttons.
MENU
FINE
DEF
(1) Select a bus (KEY1-2, DSK1-4 or PinP1-2) by pressing a button in the BUS SELECT
block or displaying a menu for bus.
(2) Pressing POS or ROT as shown in the table below to access menu pages. (See also the
previous page.)
Operation
Press POS.
Press ROT.
Press POS and ROT
at the same time.
Press a menu button
while pressing POS
or ROT.
Quickly press POS
twice.
Quickly press ROT
twice.
Description
Allows users to adjust the position of KEY, DSK and PinP with the
joystick.
For KEY and DSK, 2D DVE must be enabled.
Allows users to adjust the rotation of KEY, DSK and PinP with the
joystick.
For KEY and DSK, 2D DVE must be enabled.
Allows users to set the center of rotation of KEY, DSK and PinP with the
joystick.
Allows users to adjust the position or rotation of the selected bus (KEY1,
KEY2, PinP1, PinP2 or DSK1 to4).
Displays the menu page related to position.
If KEY1 - 2 selected:
[KEY1-2-POS/SIZE](1/5) is displayed
If DSK1 - 4 selected:
[DSK1-4-POS/SIZE](1/5) is displayed.
If PinP1 - 2 selected:
[PinP1-2-POS/SIZE](1/5) is displayed.
Displays the menu page related to rotation.
If KEY1 - 2 selected:
[KEY1-2-POS/SIZE](3/5) is displayed
If DSK1 - 4 selected:
[DSK1-4-POS/SIZE](3/5) is displayed.
If PinP1 - 2 selected:
[PinP1-2-POS/SIZE](3/5) is displayed.
26
4-3. Copying / Swaping Settings
DSK, keyer and PinP can be set up easier with this feature by copying settings from PinP1 to
PinP2, swapping settings between PinP1 and PinP2, or copying settings from KEY1 to KEY2 or
DSK.
4-3-1. Operation Example: Copying Settings from KEY2 to DSK1
(1) Press the COPY/SWAP button in the SELECT/KEY PAD CONTROL. The button's light
turns on and the COPY SWAP menu is displayed (see "DIRECT ON/OFF" and "XPT
ON/OFF.") and available buttons on the keypad turns on green.
(2) Press the COPY button. (Press SWAP if you want to swap settings.)
(3) Press KEY2 to copy the settings. The button will light up orange.
(4) Press DSK1 to set the destination bus. The button will light up orange.
(5) Press ENTER to paste the settings to DSK1. To cancel the process, press COPY/SWAP.
(If DIRECT mode is ON, copy and paste are performed without pressing ENTER. See
"DIRECT ON/OFF" below.)
MEMORY
(1)
(2)
(3)
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
9
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
6
INS
P IN P2
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
CLEAR
STOP
COPY
PASTE
(4)
3
PLAY
DSK1
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
(5)
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
Copying and swapping settings are available among KEY1, KEY2 and DSK1 to 4. However,
keyer's additional features such as Wipe and Chromakey are not copied or swapped.
Copying and swapping settings are also possible between PinP1 and PinP2.

DIRECT ON/OFF
If DIRECT is set to ON, copy and paste are performed without pressing ENTER.
COPY/
SWAP
:DIRECT :
: =OFF :
:XPT
:=---
:
:
:1/1
:

XPT ON/OFF
If XPT is set to ON, the signal selections such as key source and insert signal settings are
also copied to or swapped between.
27
4-4. How to Return Settings to Default
4-4-1. Returning Parameters to Default
Pressing and holding down Control Push-buttons
Press and hold the control push-button (F1 - F4) below each parameter to return their
settings to factory default.
Briefly pressing the DEF button
If you need to reset parameters controllable from the JOYSTICK block to factory default,
display parameters and press the DEF button. These parameters are returned to factory
default all together.
4-4-2. Returning Menus to Default
Pressing and holding down the DEF button
If you need to reset all parameters in the currently displayed menu to factory default, press
and hold down the DEF button for a while. All parameters in the menu are returned to factory
default all together.
Using INIT parameters
Some menus have an INIT parameter in the menu top page. Selecting INIT and pressing the
control push-button returns all parameters in the menu to their default setting. Turn the
related push-button to select ALL or a category you want to return to default if INIT can be set,
and then press the push-button to reset the parameters.
Menu where INIT included
[SETUP-SYSTEM] menu
WIPE menu's top page
[KEY -SETUP] menu
[DSK -SETUP] menu
[PinP - SETUP] menu
Menus to be returned to default settings
See section 22-2. "System Initialization."
Each submenu in a [WIPE MODIFY] menu
Each submenu in a [KEY-SETUP] menu
Each submenu in a [DSK-SETUP] menu
Each submenu in a [PinP-SETUP] menu
4-5. How to Back up Settings
One of the following three operations backs up panel settings and loads them automatically at
startup. It is recommended to do any one of these operations after changing menu settings.
Rebooting (Be sure to reboot the switcher instead of turning the power off then on. See
section 22-1. "Rebooting System.")
Moving to the top page in the SETUP menu.
Saving / loading an event.
Backed up settings
All settings in the SETUP menu
All settings in the STILL menu
USER TRANS and ADV CTL settings in the TRANS menu
Non-backed up settings
Other menu settings not listed above including [TRANS BKGD], MATT, PinP, KEY and
DSK menu settings.
If you want to load panel settings automatically at startup including KEY, DSK and PinP settings,
save the panel settings that you want to load to the event memory and specify the event number
to load at startup in the menu. See section 17-6. "Loading an Event at Start-up" for details.
28
5. Video Sources
5-1. How to Give Name to Sources
Signals available for selection on the M/E, P/P and the KEY/AUX bus can be assigned
user-specific names, to make them easier to identify for operators. User names can be given to
input signals, internally generated black matt and matt signals, and still pictures. Follow the
procedure below to name a signal.
(1) Press the MENU control button above the numeric keypad and then press the SETUP button
to display the SETUP menu's top page.
(2) Turn F1 to select INPUT. Then press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUPINPUT] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select RENAME. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUPINPUT- RENAME] menu.
SETUP
INPUT
:>SIGNAL
:
>PROC AMP>RENAME
>ASSIGN
(4) Turn F1 to select a signal under SELECT. (See the table below.)
INPUT
RENAME
SELECT
BLACK
IN01IN08
STILL1 to
STILL4
STILK
MATT1 to 2
CLBAR
INA1 to INA4
INB1 to INB4
INC1 to INC4
IND1 to IND4
:SELECT :SHORT : LONG NAME (MV)
: =IN04 : =IN04 : =INPUT04
: 1/1
:
SHORT
default setting
BLAK
IN01 to IN08
LONG NAME
default setting (*1)
BLACK
INPUT01 to INPUT08
Black signal
SDI video input to rear connectors 1-8
STL1 to STL4
STILL1 to STILL4
Still images 1 to 4
STKY
MAT1 to MAT2
CLBR
STILLKEY
MATTE1 to MATTE2
COLOR BAR
Still KEYOUT
BUS matte color 1 and 2
Color bar
IN09 to IN24
(*2)
INPUT09 to INPUT24
(*2)
Optional video inputs on Slot A to D
(See section 2-3.)
Signal description
(*1) Long names are used for titles displayed on the multiviewer screen.
(*2) IN09 and following inputs are determined by the type and number of the installed input expansion card.
(5) To change the short name of a signal, use F2 to give it a name up to 4 characters in length,
entering the characters one by one. First, press F2 to highlight a character. When the latter is
highlighted, turn F2 to change it. Alphabet, numbers and symbols (ASCII characters) can be
used for names.
(6) To change the long name of a signal, use F3 to give it a name up to 8 characters in length,
entering the characters one by one. First, press F3 to highlight a character. When the latter is
highlighted,, turn F3 to change it. Alphabet, numbers and symbols (ASCII characters) can be
used for names.
29
5-2. How to Assign Sources to Bus buttons
Primary and optional video inputs, internally generated signals (black, mattes etc) and captured
stills can be freely assigned to any M/E, P/P or KEY/AUX bus buttons using the procedure
below.
(1) Press the MENU control button and then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP
menu's top page.
(2) Turn F1 to select INPUT. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP – INPUT]
menu.
SETUP
INPUT
:>SIGNAL
:
>PROC AMP>RENAME
>ASSIGN
(3) Turn F1 to select ASSIGN. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP –
INPUT - ASSIGN] (1/3) menu.
INPUT
:BUTTON : SIGNAL NAME
:INHIBIT: 1/4
OU ASSGN: =01
: =IN04 : =IN04 : =OFF :
(4) Turn F1 to select a bus button under BUTTON.
(5) Turn F2 to select the signal to be assigned under SIGNAL. Users can also select a signal by
turning F3 under NAME. SIGNAL and NAME are linked to each other. (See section 5-1.
"How to Give Name to Source" for more details.)
Submenu
OU ASSIGN
BUTTON
01 to 20,
sft01 to sft20
(shifted
buttons)
Parameter
BUTTON
INHIBIT
Default
1
IN01
IN01
OFF
SIGNAL setting
NONE
BLACK
IN01 to IN08
STIL1 to STIL4
STILK
MATT1, MATT2
CLBAR
M/E
SHIFT
INA1-INA4
INB1-INB4
INC1-INC4
IND1-IND4
Description
No signal assignment
Black signal
Video input to rear connectors 1-8
Still pictures 1 and 2
Still KEYOUT
BUS MATT Color 1 and 2
Internally generated color bar signal
M/E program re-entry (P/P bus only)
Shift button function
Optional video input to slot A (*1) (See section 2-3.)
Optional video input to slot B (*1) (See section 2-3.)
Optional video input to slot C (*1) (See section 2-3.)
Optional video input to slot D (*1) (See section 2-3.)
SIGNAL
NAME
Setting range
1-24, sft1-sft24 (shifted buttons)
(See the table below)
(Signal name set in SETUP-INPUT menu)
OFF, M/E, P/P, ME&PP
(*1) Inputs vary by the type and number of the installed input expansion card.
(6) Users can inhibit specific bus buttons. If INHIBIT is set to M/E, P/P or ME&PP, the selected
bus button on the M/E bus, P/P bus or both cannot be selected. This is useful to help reduce
the risk of incorrect input selection.
IMPORTANT
The INHIBIT setting has no effect for the KEY/AUX bus. Even if a bus button cannot be
used on the M/E and P/P, it can be used for the key source, key insert or AUX output.
30
5-3. Resize Function
A resize function allows users to input SD signals at the same frame-rate as HD mode and use
them as HD images by upsizing.
The Resize function is available in the following inputs:
IN01 to IN04
Up to 2 inputs
IN05 to IN08
Up to 2 inputs
HVS-30HSDI (extension card)
All 4 inputs
To use this function, proceed as follows.
(1) Display the [SETUP-INPUT] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select SIGNAL. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP – INPUT
- SIGNAL] menu.
SETUP
INPUT
:>SIGNAL
:
>PROC AMP>RENAME
>ASSIGN
(3) Turn F1 to select an input signal for resizing.
(4) Turn F2 to set AUTO or SD-SDI for FORMAT.
(5) Turn F3 to select an aspect ratio under RESIZE.
INPUT
SIGNAL
:SELECT :FORMAT
:RESIZE : FS : 1/3
: =IN04 : =SD-SDI : =4:3 : =ON :
IN01 (HD)
(1080/59.94i)
FORMAT (AUTO)
RESIZE (OFF)
IN04 (SD)
(525/59.94i)
FORMAT (SD-SDI)
RESIZE (4:3)
IN04 (SD)
(525/59.94i)
FORMAT (SD-SDI)
RESIZE (SQUEEZE)
IN04 (SD)
(525/59.94i)
FORMAT (SD-SDI)
RESIZE (LETTER)
IMPORTANT
The Resize function is automatically enabled when SD signals are input to the
switcher in HD mode, and FORMAT in the [SYSTEM-INPUT- SIGNAL] menu is set to
SD-SDI. (Please make sure the Resize function stays disabled if HD-SDI is set for
FORMAT.)
31
5-4. Changing The Side Panel Image
The side panel image of 4:3 video can be changed as shown in the procedure below.
(1) Display the [SETUP-INPUT] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select SIGNAL. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP – INPUT
- SIGNAL] menu.
INPUT
SIGNAL
:SELECT :
SIDE PANEL
: =IN01 :En=ON S=IN02
:XPT DLY: 2/3
: =0
:
(3) To change the side bar color for 4:3 images, press the page down button to go to PAGE 2.
(4 Turn F1 to select an input signal to which side panels are to be added.
(5) Turn F2 to set the side panel to ON.
(6) Turn F3 to select an input signal to be used for the side panel. Options are BLACK,
INPUT01-24, STILL1-4, STILL KEY, MATT1-2 and SDMT.
(7) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 3.
(8) Turn F4 to select a color from the following 8 standard colors. Then press F4 to apply the
setting.
WHITE, YELLOW, CYAN, GREEN, MAGENTA, RED, BLUE and BLACK
If you want to adjust the selected color or set the color by entering its HSL values, turn F1, F2
and F3 to enter these values or press F1, F2 and F3, enter a value from the Keypad and then
press ENTER (from the keypad). Users can also set these three parameters via the JOYSTICK
block. (See section 4-2-4. "Changing Settings or Values Using the Joystick.")
COLOR=WHITE
IN02 (SD)
(525/59.94i)
5-5. XPT DELAY
The XPT DELAY (crosspoint delay) feature allows you to add a time delay until a signal is
changed after pressing a bus button. To enable the feature, proceed as follows:
(1) Display the [SETUP – INPUT] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select SIGNAL. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP – INPUT
- SIGNAL] menu.
(3) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2.
INPUT
SIGNAL
:SELECT :
SIDE PANEL
: =IN01 :En=ON S=IN02
:XPT DLY: 2/3
: =30
:
(4) Turn F1 to select an input signal. Select IN01 in this example.
(5) Turn F4 to set a delay value in frames.
(6) Press IN01 (the bus button to which IN01 is assigned) on the P/P PGM bus. The PGM image
is switched to the IN01 image 30 frames after the bus button is pressed.
32
5-6. Frame Synchronizer
A video frame synchronizer is provided for every input (this includes optional inputs). It is used to
synchronize asynchronous signals. Users can select whether to apply frame synchronization to
input signals or not (for each of them) as shown in the procedure below.
(1) Display the [SETUP - INPUT - SIGNAL] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select an input signal for use.
(3) Turn F4 to set FS to ON and activate the frame synchronizer.
INPUT
SIGNAL
:SELECT : FORMAT
: =IN02 : =AUTO
:RESIZE : FS : 1/3
: =16:9 : =ON :
Ancillary data in input video cannot be passed through if FS (input frame synchronizer) is
set to ON or RESIZE is enabled. To pass ancillary data, input the video synchronized with
the genlock signal and set FS to OFF. Be sure to that ancillary data in SD inputs cannot be
used when the switcher operates in HD mode.
5-7. Bus Matte
One matte signal can be assigned to the M/E, P/P and KEY/AUX bus buttons. The matte signals
can be assigned to any bus button (Default assignment: Buttons 19 and 20). Refer to section
5-2. "How to Assign Sources to Bus buttons" for the matte assignment. The color for the bus
mattes can be specified in the [MATT COLOR] menu.
5-7-1. Setting Up the Matte Color
(1) Press the MENU control button and then press the MATT button to display the MATT
menu.
MATT1
COLOR
:
BUS MATT1 COLOR
:RECALL : 1/4
:S=50.0 L=80.2 H=125.5: >GREEN:
(2) Turn F4 to select a color from the following 8 standard colors. Then press F4 to apply the
setting.
WHITE, YELLOW, CYAN, GREEN, MAGENTA, RED, BLUE and BLACK
If you want to adjust the selected color or set the color by entering its HSL values, turn F1,
F2 and F3 to enter these values or press F1, F2 and F3, enter a value from the Keypad
and then press ENTER (from the keypad). Users can also set these three parameters via
the JOYSTICK block. (See section 4-2-4. "Changing Settings or Values Using the
Joystick.")
Parameter
Setting Range
Description
S(saturation)
0.0 to 100.0
Adjusts color saturation.
L (luminance)
0.0 to 100.0
H (Hue)
0.0 to 359.5
Joystick operation
Moves Joystick horizontally
(X -axis)
Adjusts color luminance.
Moves Joystick vertically
(Y -axis)
Adjusts color hue.
Twists Joystick cw or ccw.
(Z -axis)
33
5-7-2. Setting Up the Gradation Matte
(1) Press the MENU control button and then press the MATT button to display the [BUS
MATT 2 COLOR](2/4) menu.
(2) To select an extreme color for the gradation matte, turn F4 to select a color or enter the
HSL values to specify the color.
MATT2
COLOR1
:
BUS MATT2 COLOR1
:RECALL : 2/4
:S=50.0 L=80.2 H=125.5: >GREEN:
(3) Press the page down button to go to the [MATT 2 COLOR2](3/4) menu.
(4) To select the other extreme color for the gradation matte, turn F4 to select a color or enter
the HSL values to specify the color.
MATT2
COLOR2
:
BUS MATT2 COLOR2
:RECALL : 3/4
:S=50.0 L=80.2 H=125.5: >GREEN:
(5) Press the page down button to go to the [BUS MATT 2 GMAT](4/4) menu.
(6) Turn F1 to select a pattern for the gradation matte. Set the position at POS and adjust the
softness gradation at SOFT.
MATT2
GMAT
:PATTERN
: =H
PATTERN setting
COLOR1
H
V
H/V
: POS
: =0
: SOFT
: =0
: 4/4
:
Description
Displays the matte color set at BUS MATT2 COLOR1.
Displays a horizontal gradient from COLOR1 to COLOR2.
Displays a vertical gradient from COLOR1 to COLOR2.
Displays a diagonal gradient from COLOR1 to COLOR2.
34
5-8. Setting Up Additional Inputs
Up to 4 cards of additional inputs can be installed into Slot A through Slot D.
2
1
‚`‚b‚P‚O‚O |‚Q‚S‚O‚u @ ‚T‚O ^‚U‚O‚g‚š @‚h‚m
‚`‚b‚P‚O‚O |‚Q‚S‚O‚u @ ‚T ‚O ^‚U‚O‚g‚š @‚h‚m
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A C E
B D F
1
2
3
5
4
I/O
6
SDI INPUT
7
8
PGM
PGM
M/E
P/P
1
4
3
2
5
Option
Slot
EDITO R
LAN
(1 0/100 BAS E-T )
GP I/TALL Y OUT
Available card
HVS-30HSDI-A
HVS-30HSDI
A, B, C, D
GPI IN
HVS-30HSAI
HVS-30PCIN
1
TO OU
2
RS- 422
REF OU T
REF IN
CPU/GENLOCK
6
AUX
GEN LOCK
3
4
RS- 422
Signal (connector)
HD/SD SDI (BNC) (w/ FS)
HD/SD SDI (BNC) (w/ FS and up-size function)
HD/SD analog component or
analog composite (BNC, mini-DIN 7-pin)
Digital RGB (DVI-D) / Analog RGB signal (VGA)
Number of
inputs per card
4 inputs
2 inputs
2 inputs
Each card provides four or two channels of input and each channel can be set up respectively as
described below.
(1) Open the [SETUP – INPUT – SIGNAL] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select an input channel. Select from IN09 to IN12 if the card installed to Slot A has
four inputs. Select between IN09 and IN10 if the card installed to Slot A has two inputs. In the
same way select from successive numbers after the inputs on Slot A if the card is installed to
Slot B.
(3) Turn F2 to specify the signal format for the channel.
INPUT
SIGNAL
:SELECT : FORMAT
: =IN09 : =AUTO
:RESIZE : FS : 1/3
: =4:3 : =OFF:
Normally set to AUTO. The following settings are available as needed.
Expansion card Slot
Number
of inputs
FORMAT setting
HVS-30HSDI-A A, B, C, D
HVS-30HSDI
4 inputs
AUTO, HD-SDI, SD-SDI
HVS-30PCIN
A, B, C, D
2 inputs
HVS-30HSAI
A, B, C, D
2 inputs
AUTO (If set to AUTO, input signal format is
automatically detected and set.) (See the table
below.)
HD Component, SD Component, Composite
HVS-30PCIN available format
Format
Resolution
1024 x 768 (XGA), 1280 x 1024 (SXGA), 1600 x 1200 (UXGA),
1080
1280 x 768 (WXGA), 1680 x 1050 (WSXGA), 1920 x 1200 (WUXGA)
720
1024 x 768 (XGA), 1280 x 1024 (SXGA), 1280 x 768 (WXGA)
SD
640 x 480 (VGA), 800 x 600 (SVGA), 1024 x 768 (XGA)
35
HVS-30HSAI available format
System
HD
standard
Component
1080/59.94i
Available
720/59.94i
1080/50i,
Available
720/50p
525/60
–
625/50
–
Other standards
Available
Composite
Component
SMPTE
Component
BetaCam
Component
Available*
Available
Available*
–
Available
–
–
Available
Available*
Available
–
Available
–
–
Available*
–
–
–
Available
–
* Video signals with and without 7.5% Setup can be accepted. If a signal with 7.5% Setup is input, the
symbol "+" follows immediately after the name of the signal.
(4) When operating in HD mode, SD signals can be input, upsized by using the Resize function
and used as HD signals. This function is available only when the SD signals have the same
frame rate as that of the current video format.

HVS-30HSDI/30HSAI
See 5-3. "Resize Function".

HVS-30PCIN
If 4:3 signals are input, the aspect ratio is selectable between two below.
RESIZE setting
Description
NORMAL
Adds black bars to the left and right of the screen.
FULL
Expands the video image to 16:9 aspect ratio.
Displays image in full-screen by cropping off the top and bottom of the
ZOOM
image.
Resizing
(NORMAL)
(FULL)
(4:3 image)
(ZOOM)
INPUT
SIGNAL
:SELECT :FORMAT
: =IN09 : =AUTO
:RESIZE : FS : 1/3
: =NORML: =OFF:
36
6. Video Outputs
6-1. How to Select Aux Signals
The AUX output signals can be selected from all bus sources (primary inputs, stills, mattes, etc.),
program, preview, clean and key out signals. There are two procedures to select signals for
auxiliary outputs: via bus buttons or from menu selection. If you want to select a signal easily
and quickly, select the signal in the KEY/AUX bus. If you want to select a signal not assigned to
bus buttons, select it in the menu.
6-1-1. Selecting Video via Bus Buttons
(1) Press an AUX button, from AUX1 to AUX8 indicated below.
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
2
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
AUX
M/E
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
(2) Press a button in the KEY/AUX bus section to select a signal for the selected AUX output.
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
2
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
AUX
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
AUX signal selection via bus buttons can be disabled if AUX CTRL is set to OFF in the
[SETUP - OUTPUT - AUX XPT] (2/2) menu to prevent any operational mistakes.
OUTPUT : M/EKEY: P/PKEY:
AUX CONTRL : 2/2
AUX XPT : =D_PGM: =PPKEY: S=AUX1 E=OFF :
6-1-2. Selecting Video from Menu Selection
(1) Press the MENU control button and then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP
menu's top page.
(2) Turn F1 to select OUTPUT. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUPOUTPUT] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select AUX XPT. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUPOUTPUT-AUX XPT] menu.
SETUP
OUTPUT
:>MARKER
:>MV1
>CLN/PREV>ANCI
>MV2
>OPTION
>AUX XPT
(4) Turn F1 to select an AUX bus.
(5) Turn F2 to select a video signal.
OUTPUT :SELECT : XPT
: TRANS RATE
AUX XPT : =AUX1 : =BLACK: En= OFF
=0
37
: 1/2
:
Available signal selections are as described below.
Button
Signal
BLACK, IN01-08,
STILL1-4,
Signals assignable to the bus buttons in M/E, P/P and
MATT1-2, CLBAR,
KEY/AUX.
IN09-24 (option)
M/E PGM
M/E program video
M/E preview video
M/E PREV
(next video with or without KEY1-2, DSK1-4 and/or PinP1-2)
M/E clean video
M/E CLEAN
(program video with or without KEY1-2, DSK1-4 and/or PinP1-2)
D_PGM
Key cut signal for M/E program video
PGM
P/P program video
PREV
P/P preview video
CLEAN
P/P clean video
P/P KEY
Key cut signal for P/P program video
MV1-2
Multiviewer video
Refer to
5-2
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-2
6-3
6-4
16-1
6-1-3. AUX Image Crossfade Transition
The background image displayed on an AUX bus can be switched by just selecting the next
image in the KEY/AUX bus. The auxiliary image will fade out and new auxiliary image will
fade onto the screen. The following example shows how to setup and perform the Crossfade
Transition of AUX1.
Setting Rate(Time) for Crossfade Transition
(1) Quickly press the AUX1 button in the BUS SELECT block to display the [SETUPOUTPUT- AUX XPT](1/2) menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select AUX1.
(3) Turn F3 to set the Crossfade transition to ON.
(4) Turn F4 to set the transition rate other than 0. Setting range is 0 to 999 in frames.
OUTPUT :SELECT : XPT
: TRANS RATE
AUX XPT : =AUX1 : =BLACK: En=ON
=30
: 1/2
:
Performing Crossfade Transition of AUX1
Turn F2 in the [SETUP- OUTPUT- AUX XPT](1/2) menu to change the image. The
background on AUX1 fades out and a new image fades onto the screen.
To perform the Crossfade transition on the control panel, press AUX1 in the BUS SELECT
block, and then select a desired image below the BUS SELECT section.
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
2
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
AUX
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
38
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
6-2. Preview Set Up
The switcher does not have a dedicated PREVIEW output. The preview bus output can be
assigned to, however, an auxiliary output. Users can also add the KEY, DSK and PinP images to
PREVIEW. This can be done as explained below:
6-2-1. Preview bus monitoring
Follow the procedure below to assign the preview video to an AUX output. AUX1 is used in
the example below.
(1) Open the [SETUP-OUTPUT-AUX XPT] menu referring to section 6-1. "How to Select Aux
signals."
(2) Turn F1 to select AUX1.
(3) Turn F2 to select PREV.
OUTPUT :SELECT : XPT
: TRANS RATE
AUX XPT : =AUX1 : =PREV : En=OFF
=0
: 1/2
:
6-2-2. Setting Up Preview Images
(1) Open PAGE 2 and PAGE 3 in the [SETUP – OUTPUT – CLEAN/PREVIEW] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to F4 to set whether the KEY, DSK and PinP images are to be displayed on the
preview image. Then press the push-button to confirm the setting for each.
OUTPUT : KEY1
PREV OUT: =OFF
: KEY2
: =OFF
: PinP1 : PinP2 : 2/3
: =OFF : =OFF :
OUTPUT : DSK1
PREV OUT: =OFF
: DSK2
: =OFF
: DSK3 : DSK4
: =OFF : =OFF
: 3/3
:
KEY
KEY image on
On-Air/Off-Air
PREVIEW
ON
KEY button ON
On-Air
Not displayed
ON
KEY
button
OFF
On-Air
Displayed
PREVIEW
OUT ON
KEY button ON
Off-Air
Displayed
KEY1-2
ON
KEY button OFF
Off-Air
Not displayed
OFF
----Not displayed
Whether the KEY images are displayed on the preview depends on both the PREVIEW OUT
settings and KEY button status in the NEXT TRANSITION section.
Item
Setting
Item
PREVIEW OUT - DSK1-4
PREVIEW OUT - PinP1/2
NEXT TRANSITION
Setting
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
DSK or PinP image on PREVIEW
Displayed
Not displayed
Displayed
Not displayed
39
6-3. Clean Set Up
The switcher can output the CLEAN video via an auxiliary output. Users can also add the KEY
image to CLEAN. Follow the procedure below to assign the clean video to an AUX output. AUX3
is used in this example
Routing an M/E Clean Video to AUX Output
(1) Open the [SETUP-OUTPUT-AUX XPT] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select AUX3.
(3) Turn F2 to select MECL.
OUTPUT :SELECT : XPT
: TRANS RATE
AUX XPT : =AUX3 : =MECL : En=OFF
=0
: 1/2
:
Displaying KEY Images on M/E Clean
(1) Open the [SETUP – OUTPUT – CLEAN/PREVIEW] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to insert the KEY1 image into the clean image. Then press the push-button to
confirm the setting.
(3) Turn F2 to insert the KEY2 image into the clean image. Then press the push-button to
confirm the setting.
OUTPUT
CLEAN
: KEY1
: =ON
: KEY2
: =ON
: PinP1 : PinP2 : 1/3
: =ON
: =OFF :
Displaying PinP Images on M/E Clean
(1) Open the [SETUP – OUTPUT – CLEAN/PREVIEW] menu.
(2) Turn F3 and F4 to Insert the PinP1 and PinP2 images into the clean image. Then press the
push-button to confirm the setting.
Item
KEY1-2
PinP1-2
Setting
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Description
KEY image is added to Clean
KEY image is not added to Clean.
PinP image is added to Clean
PinP image is not added to Clean.
40
6-4. Setting Up and Outputting KEY OUT
The KEY OUT signal (switcher processed key cut signal) can be assigned to AUX outputs.
Several kinds of key signals can be used as KEY OUT, such as KEY and DSK mixed key signal
and DVE key signal. This feature is useful for checking key signals while processing chroma
keys.
(1) Open the [SETUP-OUTPUT-AUX XPT] (2/2) menu referring to section 6-2. "Preview Set Up."
(2) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2.
OUTPUT : M/EKEY: P/PKEY:
AUX CONTRL : 2/2
AUX XPT : =D_PGM: =PPKEY: S=AUX1 E=OFF :
(3) Turn F1 to select a KEY OUT signal. Various types of KEY OUT signals are available as
shown in the table below. Press F1 or ENTER to confirm the setting.
Item
Setting
D_PGM
D_PST
D_MEA
D_MEB
KEY1-2
PinP1-2
ME KEY
DSK1-4
PP KEY
M/E
KEY
P/P
KEY
Description
Key signal of M/E PGM when using DVE
Key signal of M/E PST when using DVE
Key signal of M/E-A when using DVE
Key signal of M/E-B when using DVE
Key signal of KEY1-2 when using DVE
Key signal of PinP1-2 when using DVE
Key signal of M/E PGM including KEY1-2 and PinP1-2 when using DVE
Key signal of DSK1-4 when using DVE
Key signal of P/P PGM including DSK1-4 when using DVE
6-5. Setting Up Additional Outputs
Up to two cards of additional outputs can be installed into slots E and F.
2
1
AC10 0V - 24 0V 50 /60 Hz IN
AC 10 0 - 240 V 50 /60Hz IN
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A CE
B D F
1
2
3
4
I/O
5
6
7
SDI IN PUT
8
PG M
PGM
M/E
P/P
1
2
4
3
5
Option Slot
ED ITOR
LA N
GPI IN
Available card
GPI/TALLY OU T
1
TO OU
2
RS-422
R EF IN
CP U/GE NLO CK
6
AU X
RE F OUT
GENLOCK
3
4
RS-422
Available Video Signal (Connector)
HVS-30HSDO
Number of outputs
per card.
HD/SD-SDI (BNC)
3 outputs (*1)
HVS-30HSAO HD/SD analog component or
2 outputs
E, F
SD analog composite (BNC)
Digital RGB (DVI-D) and
HVS-30PCO
2 outputs
Analog RGB (VGA)
(*1) HVS-30HSDO can send two output channels to three connecters: Ch 1 to Connector 1 and Ch
2 to Connectors 2 and 3.
41
Each card has two output channels whose signals can be selected respectively in the menu as
shown in the procedure below.
(1) Open the [SETUP – OUTPUT – OPTION] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select an output channel. E-Ch1 and E-Ch2 is for Slot E and F-Ch1 and F-Ch2 is
for Slot F.
(3) Turn F2 to select an image to be output from MEPGM, MEPREV, MECLN, PGM, PREV,
CLN, AUX1 to AUX8, MV1 to MV2.
OUTPUT
OPTION
:SELECT :OUTPUT :FORMAT :ASPECT : 1/2
: =E-Ch1: =MEPGM : =SXGA : =4:3 :
(4) Select the signal format and aspect ratio. Available selections are shown in the tables below.
If HVS-30HSDO is installed:
System format
Channel
HD
Ch1
1080i/59.94, 50,
Ch2
1080PsF/29.97, 25
720p/59.94, 50
SD
Ch1, Ch2
If HVS-30HSAO is installed:
System format
Channel
Ch1
HD
SD
Ch2
Ch1,
Ch2
FORMAT setting
HD-SDI (Fixed)
HD-SDI (Fixed)
ASPECT setting
---------
SD-SDI (Fixed)
4:3, SQUEEZE, LETTER
SD-SDI (Fixed)
---
FORMAT setting
HDComponent
HDComponent
SDComponent,
Composite *
Component *
(SMPTE or BetaCam level),
Composite *
ASPECT setting
--------4:3, SQUEEZE,
LETTER
-----
* You can choose whether to add 7.5% Setup to the output signals if the switcher is running in 59.94 Hz
mode. If 7.5% Setup is added to a signal, the symbol "+" follows immediately after the name of the
signal.
If HVS-30PCO is installed:
System format Channel
FORMAT setting
1280x1024 (SXGA), 1600x1200 (UXGA)
Ch1,
1080i
1680x1050
(WSXGA), 1920x1200 (WUXGA),
Ch2
1920x1080 (HDTV) *
1280x1024 (SXGA)
Ch1,
720p
Ch2
1280x768 (WXGA)
Ch1,
SD
800x600 (SVGA)
Ch2
ASPECT setting
4:3, LETTER
----4:3, LETTER
---------
* You can choose between 60 Hz and 50 Hz for the output frequency for DVI-D (Ch 1) if the switcher is
running in 50 Hz mode (1080/50i, 720/50p or 625/50). See step (5) below.
(5) Select the output frequency for HVS-30PCO between 60Hz and 50Hz in the [SETUP –
OUTPUT – OPTION] (2/2) menu. The setting can be made for each channel by turning menu
controls. The setting is available only when the switcher is running in 50Hz mode.
OUTPUT
OPTION
: HVS-30PCO V SCAN FREQUENCY
: 2/2
:E1=60Hz E2(60Hz)F1=60Hz F2(60Hz):
42
6-6. AUX LINK
In the AUX-LINK function, the auxiliary outputs are grouped, and the master and slave outputs
are set to allow all slave output signals to be switched simultaneously by simply selecting the
master output signal. A group consists of one master output and up to three slave outputs.
Seven auxiliary output groups can be set. Examples of AUX LINK settings and operation are
shown below.
6-6-1. Creating AUX Output Link Groups
(1) Open the [SETUP – FUNCTION] menu. Turn F1 to select AUX LINK. Press F1 or the
page down button to display the AUX LINK menu.
SETUP
:>KEY/DSK >VIRTUAL >AUX LINK>3D
FUNCTION:
FUNCTION:ENABLE :
AUX LINK: =OFF :
: 1/3
:
(2) Press the page down button again to go to the [AUX LINK - AUX GRP] menu page.
FUNCTION:SELECT:MASTER: SLAVE SEL/AUX : 2/3
AUX GRP : =1
: =AUX1:1=AUX2 2=AUX3 3=AUX4
(3) Turn F1 to select a group to be set from 1-7
(4) Turn F2 to set the auxiliary output serving as the MASTER. Available outputs are shown
below.
Master Output
AUX01-8, MEPG, MEPST, PGM, PST
ME-A, ME-B, PP-A, PP-B
KEY1, KEY2, PiP1, PiP2, DSK1, DSK2, DSK3,
DSK4
(5) Select the auxiliary outputs (up to three) serving as the SLAVE linking to the MASTER
output. Available outputs are shown below. Press F3 and then turn F3 to select an output
for Slave 1. Press F3 and then turn F3 to select an output for Slave 2. Select an output for
Slave 3 in the same way.
Slave Output
(Normal link)
Same options as Master Output.
(Note that video set as Master cannot be selected for
the Slave.
The A or B bus cannot be set for AUX LINK output when the M/E PGM or M/E PST bus is
selected. In the same way, the M/E PGM or M/E PST bus cannot be set for AUX LINK
output when the A or B bus is selected.
43
6-6-2. Creating Signal Link Groups
(1) Press the page down button to go to the [AUX LINK – LINK GRP] menu.
FUNCTION:SELECT:MASTER: SLAVE SEL/AUX : 3/3
LINK GRP: =1
: =IN01:1=IN02 2=IN03 3=IN04
Available Signals
(If AUX1-8 is selected for the
MASTER or SLAVE bus)
BLK, IN01 to IN24, STL1 to STL4,
CB, MAT1, MAT2, M/E
MEPG, MEPV, MECL, MEKY,
PGM, PREV, CLN, PPKY, MV1, MV2
(2) Turn F1 to select an AUX LINK group to be set in the LINK GROUP menu.
(3) Turn F2 to select a signal to be set for MASTER
(4) To set the SLAVE output signals (up to three) that link to the MASTER output signal, press
F3 and then turn F3 to select a signal for Slave 1. Press F3 and then turn F3 to select a
signal for Slave 2. Select a signal for Slave 3 in the same way.
NOTE
The same MASTER output signal cannot be selected twice. SLAVE output signals can
be selected multiple times.
6-6-3. Enabling AUX LINK
(1) Display the [SETUP – FUNCTION -AUX LINK] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to set ENABLE to ON. This activates all AUX LINK groups.
FUNCTION:ENABLE :
AUX LINK: =ON
:
: 1/3
:

Operation examples:
Assume that the AUX output link groups and their signal link groups were set as shown
below.
:SELECT:MASTER: SLAVE
AUX GRP : =1
: =AUX1:1=AUX2
: =2
: =AUX7:1=AUX8
: =3
: =PGM :1=DSK1
: =4
: =ME-A:1=ME-B
: =5
: =MEPG:1=PiP1
: =6
: =OFF :1=OFF
: =7
: =OFF :1=OFF
SEL/AUX : 2/3
2=AUX3 3=AUX4
2=OFF 3=OFF
2=DSK2 3=OFF
2=OFF 3=OFF
2=PiP2 3=OFF
2=OFF 3=OFF
2=OFF 3=OFF
:SELECT:MASTER: SLAVE
LINK GRP: =1
: =IN01:1=IN02
: =2
: =MEPG:1=MEPV
: =3
: =IN05:1=STL1
: =4
: =IN06:1=IN07
: =5
: =IN10:1=IN11
: =6
: =--- :1=--: =7
: =--- :1=---
SEL/AUX : 3/3
2=IN03 3=IN04
2=OFF 3=OFF
2=STL2 3=OFF
2=OFF 3=OFF
2=IN12 3=OFF
2=--- 3=--2=--- 3=---
44
Press AUX1 in the BUS SELECT-AUX block and select IN01 on the AUX/KEY bus:
>> IN02 is assigned to AUX2, IN03 to AUX3 and IN04 to AUX4.
Press AUX7 in the BUS SELECT-AUX block and select M/E PGM:
>> M/E PREV is assigned to AUX8.
Select IN05 in P/P-PGM bus:
>> STL1 is assigned to DSK1-INSERT and STL2 to DSK2-INSERT.
Select IN06 in M/E- A bus:
>> IN07 is assigned to M/E-B bus
Select IN10 in M/E-PGM bus:
>> IN11 is assigned to PinP1 and IN12 to PinP2
45
7. Bus Operation
The video signals input to the switcher are assigned to the bus buttons on the control panel for
usage. The assigned signals are shared by the M/E, P/P, and AUX/KEY bus sections.
As a factory default settings, video inputs, Stills and Mattes are assigned to the bus buttons. The
signal assignments are freely changeable. The Button Inhibit function for preventing accidental
button operations is also available. (See section 5-2. "How to Assign Sources to Bus buttons.")
7-1. Selecting Video Sources
HVS-35OU
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
P/P
REV
KEY/AUX bus
D
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
BKG
N
M/E bus
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T
A
P/P bus
P/P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Bus button 1
15
16
17
18
19
REV
DI
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
BKG
M/E bus
P/P bus
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A
P/P
1
2
M/E
Bus button 20
HVS-35ROU
KEY/AUX bus
20
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bus button 1
10
11
12
M/E
Bus button 12
46
M/E re-entry
button
M/E re-entry
button
7-1-1. Selecting Video Sources on M/E and P/P
Press the desired bus button on the PGM bus row. The video signal assigned to the selected
bus button is displayed on the program output screen. At the factory default setting, the
PGM bus is the upper row and the PST bus is the bottom row both in the M/E and P/P bus
sections.
M/E
PGM row
M/E
M/E PGM output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
PST row
P/P
PGM row
P/P
1
P/P PGM output
M/E
PST row
M/E re-entry
button
Press the desired bus button on the PST bus. The video signal assigned to the selected bus
button is displayed on the preview output screen. Then move the fader lever from end to
end to check how the button indication changes as the signals are switched. Once the
transition is complete, the selected signals on PGM and PST are switched (flip-flop).
The switcher's basic operation is to select the next video on the PST bus and send it to air via
transition. And Repeat them again and again.
Users can change the button switching mode for the M/E and the P/P from P/P to A/B. (See
section 7-2. "Button Switching Mode in M/E and P/P bus.")
Button Indication on the P/P and the M/E buses
Indicates that the video is displayed on the P/P program screen.
Red
(Re-entry)
M/E bus
Green
Indicates that the video is displayed on the M/E program screen.
Orange
Indicates that the video is set to next output on the M/E bus.
Red
Indicates that the video is displayed on the P/P program screen.
P/P bus
Orange
Indicates that the video is set to next output on the P/P bus.
7-1-2. Selecting Video Sources for AUX Outputs
(1) Press the desired AUX button in the Bus Select section. The button will light up.
(2) Press a desired button on the KEY/AUX bus.
Bus selection buttons
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
PGM
2
3
4
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
KEY/AUX bus
AUX
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Example1) To Select IN1 for AUX1
Press AUX1. Then press 1 (IN01) on the KEY/AUX.
Example2) To Select M/E PREV for AUX2
Press AUX2. Then press M/E PREV on the KEY/AUX.
See section 10. "KEY and DSK" and section 13. "Picture-in-Picture" for how to select video
sources for KEY, DSK and PinP.
47
7-2. Button Switching Mode in M/E and P/P bus
Users can change the button switching mode for the M/E, P/P bus from P/P to A/B. In P/P mode,
the source selections in the PGM and PST buses are switched when transitions occur and users
can always select the next background signal from the PST bus (the bottom row). In A/B mode,
the source selections in the PGM and PST buses do not switch when transitions occur and the
next signal selection must be done in the different bus after each transition. The default setting is
P/P.
To Change the Switching Mode to A/B:
(1) Press the MENU control button and then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP
menu's top page.Turn F1 to select PANEL. Press F1 or the page down button to display the
[SETUP- PANEL] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select TRS CTRL.Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP PANEL-TRS CTRL] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select A/B. Press F1 or ENTER in Keypad to confirm the setting.
PANEL
:BUSTYPE:TRSEDGE: FADER OFFSET : 1/2
M/E CTRL: =A/B : =ON
:U=1.00 L=1.00 :
PANEL
:BUSTYPE:
P/P CTRL: =A/B :
: FADER OFFSET : 2/2
:U=1.00 L=1.00 :
7-3. Setting-up and Using the SHIFT function
In M/E, P/P and KEY/AUX, users can select a video signal from 20 sources in HVS-35OU and
12 in HVS-35ROU, because each bus row has 20 or 12 bus buttons. On the control panel the
SHIFT function can also be assigned to a bus button in the same way video sources can. The
SHIFT button allows users to select a video signal among 38 sources in the HVS-35OU and 22
in the HVS-35ROU. (The SHIFT button is also available in the KEY/AUX bus.) The SHIFT
function is not assigned to a button by default. To use the SHIFT function, assign it to a bus
button as shown in the procedure below.
7-3-1. To Assign the SHIFT function to a Bus button:
(1) Press the MENU control button and then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP
menu's top page. Turn F1 to select INPUT. Press F1 or the page down button to display the
[SETUP - INPUT] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select ASSIGN. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP –
INPUT - ASSIGN] menu.
SETUP
INPUT
:>SIGNAL
:
>PROC AMP>RENAME
>ASSIGN
(3) Turn F1 to select a bus button for use.
(4) Turn F2 or F3 to select SHIFT under SIGNAL.
INPUT
:BUTTON : SIGNAL NAME
:INHIBIT: 1/4
OU ASSGN: =20
: =SHIFT =SHIFT : =OFF :
48
7-3-2. Using the SHIFT function
Once the SHIFT function has been assigned to a bus button, the SHIFT button works in
normal mode by default. The SHIFT operation mode can be changed to toggle mode. The
SHIFT operation mode is set at the SHIFT item in the [SETUP- INPUT-ASSIGN](4/4) menu.
In the description below, assume that the SHIFT is assigned to Button 20.
When SHIFT works in NORMAL mode:
To select 1 to 19, simply press a bus button with SHIFT turned OFF.
Pressing 2 selects Button 2.
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Pressing 1 selects Button 1
To select Shifted Button 1 to 19 (sft1 to sft19), press a bus button while holding down the
SHIFT button.
Pressing 2 selects Button 2.
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Pressing both 1 and 20 (SHIFT)
selects Shifted Button 1 (sft1).
When SHIFT works in TOGGLE mode:
To select 1 to 19, simply press the relevant button with SHIFT turned OFF. Please note that
this procedure is the same as in Normal mode.
To select sft1 to sft19, press and hold down the SHIFT button and then press a bus
button (with SHIFT lit).
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Press SHIFT (Button 20).
Pressing 2 selects Shifted Button 2 (sft2).
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
49
16
17
18
19
20
Pressing 1 selects Shifted Button 1(sft1).
8. Transition Operations
Available Transitions on the M/E bus
BLACK transition (M/E or PP selectable)
Background CUT, MIX, Pattern transitions
KEY CUT, MIX, SLIDE IN/OUT, SCALER and Pattern transitions
PinP CUT, MIX, SLIDE IN/OUT, SCALER transitions
-Transitions setup by next transition bus selection (BKGD and KEY)
-Transitions with the AUTO button or the fader lever
-On-Air indicators for KEY, DSK and PinP1/2.
-More than 150 types of various preset patterns.
-Simultaneous pattern transitions of BKGD, KEY1 and KEY2
-2Ch-DVE pattern transitions for BKGD
Chromakey
Background pattern transition
PinP
PinP cutting in
Available Transitions on the P/P bus
BLACK transition (M/E or PP selectable)
Background CUT and MIX transitions
DSK CUT, MIX and SLIDE IN/OUT and SCALER (M/E or PP selectable)
-Transitions with the AUTO button or the fader lever
-Transitions using M/E re-entry
Caption (DSK1)
M/E re-entry
Logo (DSK1) sliding in and Caption (DSK2) cutting in
Other Transitions
AUX image Crossfade transitions (See section 6-1-3)
PinP image Crossfade transitions (See section 15-2-2)
Transitions using Event Recall (See section 17-2-3.)
50
Logo (DSK2)
8-1. Transition Block Description
M/E transition section
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
ON AIR
DVE
DSK 1
P/P transition section
DVE
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
DVE
AUTO
CUT
DSK 4
ON AIR
M/E transition section
No.
Description
1
For pattern transition direction setting
2
For next transition bus selection
3
For transition type selection
4
AUTO transition button for BKGD and KEY
5
CUT transition button for BKGD and KEY
6
For pattern selection
7
BKGD and KEY fader lever and fader limit ON/OFF button
P/P transition section
12
BKGD fader lever and fader limit ON/OFF button
13
AUTO (MIX only) transition button for BKGD
14
CUT transition button for BKGD
Other transition related buttons
8
For transition rate setting. Pressing the button opens the related menu.
9
ON AIR and AUTO transition buttons for PinP.
10
ON AIR and AUTO transition buttons for KEY and DVE indicator.
11
ON AIR and AUTO transition buttons for DSK and DVE indicator.
BLACK TRANS
For BLACK transition use. (Located on the left next to the joystick)
button
51
8-2. Quick Reference for Available Transitions
Bus
PGM Out
BLACK M/E or P/P
DSK
KEY
M/E or P/P
M/E
Available
Fader
Limit
–
Pattern
Direction
–
CUT
–
–
–
MIX
Available
–
–
BLACK TRANS button
DSK ON AIR button
DSK AUTO button
DSK AUTO button
USER
TRANS(1)
Available
–
–
DSK ON AIR button
CUT
–
Available
Available
Available
-Available
Available
Available
KEY >> CUT button
KEY ON AIR button
KEY AUTO button
KEY >> MIX >> AUTO button
–
KEY AUTO button
NOR/REV Fader lever
NOR/REV KEY >> WIPE> > AUTO button
NOR/REV Fader lever
Type
Rate
BLACK
MIX
WIPE
PinP
BKGD
M/E
M/E
Transition Execute Button or Tool
–
–
Available
USER
TRANS (1)
Available
–
–
KEY ON AIR button
CUT
–
–
–
PinP ON AIR button
PinP AUTO button
MIX
USER
TRANS (1)
CUT
Available
–
–
PinP AUTO button
Available
–
–
PinP ON AIR button
Available
-Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
–
NOR/REV
NOR/REV
MIX
WIPE
(M/E only)
BKGD >> CUT button
BKGD >> MIX >> AUTO button
Fader lever
BKGD >>WIPE >> AUTO button
–
Available NOR/REV Fader lever
CUT
–
Available
–
BKGD >> CUT button
BKGD
P/P
MIX
Available Available
–
BKGD >> AUTO button
(1) Selectable from CUT (default), SCALER, SLIDE (4 directions) and WIPE (4 directions).
8-3. Black Transitions
Just pressing the BLACK TRANS button can perform the BLACK transitions. The BLACK
transitions can be performed either on the M/E or P/P bus, but the BLACK TRANS button is
disabled as a factory default setting.
To Enable the Black Transitions
(1) Press the TRANSITION RATE button to display the [TRANS-BKGD/BLK] menu.
(2) Turn F3 to change the setting from OFF to M/E or P/P.
TRANS
: M/E
BKGD/BLK: =30
: P/P
: =30
: BLACK TRANS
: =P/P : =30
: 1/6
:
(3) If necessary, set the transition rate. See section 8-10-2. "Transition Rate" for details.
(4) Press the BLACK TRANS button (to the left of the joystick) to perform the transition. Pressing
the button initiates a fade to black of whichever source is currently on air (program output).
Pressing the button again starts another fade from black to the previous video.
52
8-4. Background Transitions
8-4-1. M/E Bus
CUT Transition
(1) Select a video source in the PST bus block.
(2) Press the BKGD button in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(3) Press CUT to perform the background CUT transition.
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
MIX Transition
(1) Select a video source in the PST bus block.
(2) Press the BKGD button in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(3) Press MIX in the TRANSITION TYPE block.
(4) Press AUTO or move the fader lever to perform the background MIX transition.
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
WIPE Transition
(1) Select a video source in the PST bus block.
(2) Press the BKGD button in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(3) Press WIPE in the TRANSITION TYPE block.
(4) The [TRANS - BKGD] menu appears in the menu display.
(5) Turn F1 to select a desired pattern. (See section 8-8 "How to Select Patterns.")
(5) Press AUTO or move the fader lever to perform the background WIPE transition.
See section 8-7. "Pattern (WIPE) Transitions" for the WIPE transition details.
See section 8-10-2. "Transition Rate" for the transition rate.
See section 8-10-1. "Fader Limit" for the fader limit.
53
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2

To Check Next Video:
To check the Preview video, assign the Preview video to an AUX bus to display the image.
(See section 6-2. "Preview Set Up.") To check the clean video, assign the Clean video to an
AUX bus to display the clear signal of program video. (See section 6-3. "Clean Set Up.")
8-4-2. P/P Bus
CUT Transition
(1) Select a video source in the PST bus block.
(2) Press CUT to perform the background CUT transition.
DVE
DSK 1
DVE
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
DVE
AUTO
CUT
DSK 4
ON AIR
MIX Transition
(1) Select a video source in the PST bus block.
(2) Press AUTO or move the fader lever to perform the background MIX transition.
DVE
DSK 1
DVE
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
DVE
AUTO
CUT
DSK 4
ON AIR
The pattern transitions cannot be performed on the P/P bus.
54
8-5. KEY Transitions
The KEY1 and KEY2 are displayed on the M/E output screens (M/E PGM and M/E PREV).
(1) Set up a key for the KEY. (See section 10. "KEY and DSK.")
(2) Perform a desired transition referring to the transition procedures below..
CUT Transition
<Method 1>
(1) Press KEY1 (or KEY2) in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(2) Press CUT to perform a KEY CUT transition.
<Method 2>
Press the KEY1 ON AIR (or KEY2 ON AIR) button to insert the KEY on the M/E program video.
Press the button again to remove the KEY from the screen. (See section 8-9. " IN/OUT Effects
for PinP, KEY and DSK" for details.)
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
Method 1
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
Method 2
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
MIX Transition
<Method 1>
(1) Press KEY1 (or KEY2) in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(2) Press MIX in the TRANSITION TYPE block.
(3) Press AUTO or KEY AUTO, or move the fader lever to perform the KEY MIX transition.
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
The KEY1 AUTO button behaves the same as the AUTO button when selecting KEY1 for
the next transition. For example, if MIX is set for the KEY1 transition type in the NEXT
TRANSITION section, pressing KEY1 AUTO performs the KEY1 mix transition and if
WIPE is set, pressing KEY1 AUTO performs the KEY1 wipe transition.
55
Pattern transition
(1) Press KEY1 (or KEY2) in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(2) Press WIPE in the TRANSITION TYPE block.
(3) Press PATTERN to display the [WIPE PATTERN] menu.
(4) Turn F2 or F3 to select a desired pattern. (See section 8-8 "How to Select Patterns.")
WIPE:BKGD
PATT:00
:KEY1
:20
:KEY2
:00
: 1/1
:
(5) Press AUTO or KEY AUTO, or move the fader lever to perform the pattern transition.
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
See section 8-7. "Pattern (WIPE/DVE) Transitions" for the WIPE transition details.
See section 8-10-2. "Transition Rate" for the transition rate.
See section 8-10-1. "Fader Limit" for the fader limit.
USER Transitions
Press the KEY1 ON AIR (or KEY2 ON AIR) button to insert the KEY on the M/E program video
by using a USER transition (scaler, slide in/out or wipe in/out). (See section 8-9. " IN/OUT
Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK" for details.)
56
8-6. Simultaneous Transitions of BKGD, KEY1 and KEY2
Two or three background, KEY1 and KEY2 buses can be performed transitions at the same time
in the M/E bus section. The way to perform simultaneous transitions on three buses is as
follows:
(1) Set the transition type for the background , KEY1 and KEY2 to MIX or WIPE. Select a pattern
using the menu if set to WIPE. (See the note below.)
(2) Set the transition rate or direction, if necessary.
(3) Press BKGD, KEY1 and KEY2 simultaneously to light up the buttons.
(4) Press AUTO, or move the fader lever to perform the simultaneous transition.
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
Limitations of Use of WIPE or DVE Patterns
Up to two channels of WIPE patterns (No. 0-99) are available at the same time. KEY1
and KEY2, however, cannot use WIPE patterns simultaneously.
Up to two channels of DVE patterns (No.100-162) are available, but only one channel of
2Ch-DVE patterns (No.170-181) can be used at the same time.
If two channels of WIPE or DVE have been already assigned to any buses, the settings
cannot be made and the WIPE button will not light up when the button is pressed. In this
case, cancel another WIPE or DVE setting, and then press the WIPE button again.
When performing pattern transitions with a DVE pattern (No.100-162) for KEY1 or
KEY2, all 2D DVE menu settings are disabled.
See section 8-7. "Pattern (WIPE/DVE) Transitions." for details about transition settings.
57
8-7. Pattern (WIPE/DVE) Transitions
Pattern transitions are available on the M/E bus (for Background, KEY1 and KEY2). This section
explains how to perform pattern transitions.
(1) Select a background video source on the PGM and PST bus. To perform KEY1 or KEY2
transitions, set up the key.
(2) Press BKGD, KEY1 or KEY2 in the NEXT TRANSITION section to select a bus to be
transitioned. A simultaneous transition of these three buses is also possible. (See section 8-6.
"Simultaneous Transitions of BKGD, KEY1 and KEY2.")
(3) Press WIPE in the TRANSITION TYPE block.
If the WIPE button will not light up...
There are no free channels for WIPE or DVE. In this case, cancel another WIPE or DVE
setting by selecting MIX for the bus, and then press the WIPE button again for the desired
bus. See the previous page for limitations on the pattern selection.
(4) Press the PATTERN button to display the [WIPE PATTERN] menu. Select a disired pattern
for the bus using F1 to F3. The patterns can be selected using the Direct Pattern function.
See section 8-8. "How to Select Patterns" for details.
(5)Users can modify the pattern here to add a border, change the aspect ratio, change the start
position and so on. (See section 9. "Modifying Patterns. ")
(6) Set the transition direction by using the direction buttons (NOR/REV and REVERSE).
Transition direction
Always Normal
Always Reverse
Normal at Normal/Reverse operation
Reverse at Normal/Reverse operation
RON/REV button
Unlit
Unlit
Lit
Lit
REV button
Unlit
Lit
Unlit
Lit
Transition Rate
The transition duration for the AUTO transitions (Transition Rate) can be set in the menu.
See section 8-10-2. "Transition Rate."
Fader Limit
When performing transitions there may be times when you want the transition to the next
signal to only complete to a certain degree instead of fully switching from one picture to
another. In this case, change the Fader Limit in the menu. See section 8-10-1. "Fader
Limit."
(7) Press AUTO or move the fader lever to perform the background pattern transition.
The KEY AUTO buttons are available for KEY1 and KEY2 pattern transitions.
58
8-8. How to Select Patterns
Wipe patterns are available for background and KEY transitions. More than 150 preset patterns
are provided. This chapter explains how to select patterns for transitions, how to check which
pattern is currently selected and how to select patterns quickly using the Direct Pattern function.
8-8-1. Selecting Patterns in the Menu
(1) Press the PATTERN button in the Transition block to display the [WIPE-PATTERN]
menu.
Users can also display the [WIPE-PATTERN] menu by quickly pressing the WIPE
button twice.
The number and icon of the currently selected pattern are displayed in the menu display.
The letter M is added in front of the number if the pattern is modified. (See section 9
"Modifying Patterns.")
WIPE:BKGD
PATT:00
:KEY1
:20
:KEY2
:00
: 1/1
:
(2) To change the pattern, turn F1 to F3 to select a desired pattern.
8-8-2. Direct Pattern Function
The Direct Pattern Selection feature uses the number buttons on the keypad (0-9), to which
WIPE patterns previously registered can be recalled at the touch of one button. So it is useful
to assign frequently used patterns to number buttons. Up to 20 patterns can be registered.
To Register a Pattern:
(1) Press the PATTERN button in the Transition block to display the [WIPE-PATTERN]
menu.
(2) Turn F1 to F3 to select a pattern for registration.
(3) Modify the pattern, if needed. See section 9 "Modifying Patterns" for the pattern
modification.
(4) Press the WIPE button above the SELECT/KEYPAD block. The [DIRECT PATTERN]
menu is displayed and the keypad changes to DIRECT PATTERN mode.
DIRECT : PAGE
PATTERN : =0
:DIRECT :CLEAR
: =ON
: >OFF
:
:
: 1/1
:
(5) Turn F1 to select a page of the Direct Pattern memory. The patterns 0-9 are stored on
PAGE 1 and the patterns 10-19 are stored on PAGE 2.
(6) Press the STORE button.
(7)Press the WIPE CHANNEL button once or twice to select the bus where the pattern is
being used.
(8) Press a number button (0-9). The selected pattern is saved to the number button of the
selected page.
(9) Repeat steps (1) to (8) to register patterns.
59
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
INC
7
8
9
BLACK
TRANS
CONTROL
SETUP
COPY
SWAP
NEW
STILL
MATT
FILE
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
PASTE
KEY2
KEYER/P IN P
(2D DVE)
WIPE POS
POS
ROT
FINE
DEF
3
DEL
COPY
WIPE
CHANNEL
INS
P IN P2
CUT
STOP
KEY1
6
PLAY
CLEAR
BKGD
MENU
JOYSTICK
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
When pressing the WIPE memory button, the number buttons onto which patterns are
already saved light up. If a user presses one of them to save a selected pattern, the
number button blinks. To overwrite the pattern, press the number button again. (To cancel
overwriting, press STORE.)
If users cannot overwrite the number buttons (lit red), cancel the operation and change the
OVER WR (overwrite) item from DISBL (disable) to ENABL (enable) in the [DIRECT
RECALL] menu. The [DIRECT RECALL] menu is automatically displayed when pressing
the number button where a pattern is stored on the KEYPAD.
To Select a Pattern:
(1) Press the WIPE CHANNEL button to select the bus where the pattern is recalled.
(2) Press the WIPE button above the SELECT/KEYPAD block. The [DIRECT PATTERN]
menu is displayed and the keypad changes to DIRECT PATTERN mode.
(3) Turn F1 to select a page of the Direct Pattern memory in the menu.
DIRECT : PAGE
PATTERN : =0
:DIRECT :CLEAR
: =ON
: >OFF
:
:
: 1/1
:
(4) Press the number button where the desired pattern has been saved. The transition type is
automatically switched to WIPE and the current pattern is changed to the new one.
If the DIRECT item in the [DIRECT PATTERN] menu is set to OFF, a direct pattern cannot
be recalled just by pressing a number button. In this case, press a number button and then
press RECALL on the KEYPAD.
To Set Overwrite Protection
(1) Press the WIPE button above the SELECT/KEYPAD block. The [DIRECT PATTERN]
menu is displayed and the keypad changes to DIRECT PATTERN mode.
(2) Turn F2 to change DIRECT to OFF, if it is ON.
DIRECT : PAGE
PATTERN : =0
:DIRECT :CLEAR
: =OFF : >OFF
:
:
: 1/1
:
(3) Turn F1 to select a page of the Direct Pattern memory in the menu.
(4) Press the number button to be cleared. The [DIRECT RECALL] menu will then be
displayed.
60
(5) Turn F3 to change OVER WR (Overwrite) to ON to set overwrite protection.
DIRECT
RECALL
:PATTERN
: =020
:OVER WR:DELETE : 1/1
: =ON
: =OFF :
NOTE
Before setting overwrite protection, set the DIRECT item to OFF. Otherwise, the
selected pattern will be applied the panel when pressing the number button.
To Clear a Direct Pattern Registration Individually
(1) Press the WIPE button above the SELECT/KEYPAD block. The [DIRECT PATTERN]
menu is displayed and the keypad changes to DIRECT PATTERN mode.
(2) Turn F1 to change DIRECT to OFF, if it is ON.
(3) Turn F1 to select a page of the Direct Pattern memory in the menu.
DIRECT : PAGE
PATTERN : =0
:DIRECT :CLEAR
: =OFF : >OFF
:
:
: 1/1
:
(4) Press the number button to be cleared. The [DIRECT RECALL] menu will then be
displayed.
(5) Turn F4 to change DELETE to ON. Press F4 to delete the registration.
DIRECT
RECALL
:PATTERN
: =020
:OVER WR:DELETE : 1/1
: =OFF : =ON
:
NOTE
Before clearing a direct pattern registration, set the DIRECT item to OFF. Otherwise,
the selected pattern will be applied the panel when pressing the number button.
To Clear All Direct Pattern Registrations
(1) Press the WIPE button above the SELECT/KEYPAD block. The [DIRECT PATTERN]
menu is displayed and the keypad changes to DIRECT PATTERN mode.
(2) Turn F3 to change CLEAR to ALL. Then press F3 to clear all direct patterns.
DIRECT : PAGE
PATTERN : =0
:DIRECT :CLEAR
: =OFF : >ALL
61
:
:
: 1/1
:
8-9. IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK
There are two transition buttons available for each of PinP 1-2, KEY1-2 and DSK1-4: ON AIR
and AUTO. (See the figure below.) They are multiple function buttons. The CUT, MIX, SLIDE (4
types) and WIPE (4 types) transitions can be performed using these two buttons for each bus.
To Perform PinP, KEY and DSK Transitions
(1) Set up a desired key or a PinP. (See section 10. "KEY and DSK or 15. "Picture-in-Picture".)
(2) Press the ON AIR button. For example, to insert the PinP1 on M/E program video by using
CUT, press PinP1 ON AIR (button's default setting).
(3) Then press the AUTO button. For example, pressing PinP1 AUTO fades out the PinP1 from
the screen (button's default setting), if it is on the image.
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
DVE lamps for KEY:
Light up red if DVE patterns
are used.
Light up green if 2D DVE
effects are enabled.
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
ON AIR button
CUT
OFF
CUT (default)
Scaler
Slide In/Out
Wipe In/Out
TRANSITION TYPE
AUTO
DVE
KEY 2
ON AIR
DVE
DSK 1
AUTO button
OFF
MIX (default)
CUT (press)
MIX (press and hold)
DVE
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
DVE
AUTO
CUT
DSK 4
ON AIR
Buttons turn on while On-Air.
Buttons turn off while Off-Air.
Buttons turn on while On-Air.
DVE lamps for PinP and DSK:
Lights up green if 2D DVE effects (Light color varies by output bus)
Buttons turn off while Off-Air.
are enabled.
Light Indications of the AUTO button, ON AIR button and the DVE lamp
The AUTO and ON AIR buttons turn on while On-Air and turn off while Off-Air. The light color of
AUTO varies depending on the output bus.
State
PinP/KEY/DSK ON
PinP/KEY/DSK ON
Transition
PinP/KEY/DSK OFF
Output bus
P/P PGM (*1)
M/E PGM (*2)
P/P PGM, M/E PGM
-
AUTO indication
Lit red
Lit green
Flashing
-
ON AIR indication
Lit
Lit
Lit
-
(*1) Lit red when DSK is on the P/P PGM image or any key or PinP is on the P/P PGM image using the
re-entry function.
(*2) Lit green when DSK is on an AUX bus.
62
8-9-1. Setting the ON AIR Button Function (USER Transition)
As factory default setting, the function of the ON AIR buttons is set to CUT.
To set the PinP1 ON AIR button to SLIDE TOP, proceed as follows:
(1) Press the TRANSITION RATE button above the PinP1 ON AIR button to display the
[TRANS] menu.
Users can also display the [TRANS] menu by quickly pressing the following buttons twice:
BKGD, KEY1, KEY2 and MIX in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(2) Turn F1 to select PinP1 at SELECT.
(3) Turn F2 to select SLIDE TOP.
TRANS
:SELECT : USER TRANS
USER/ADV: =PinP1: =SLIDE TOP
:ADV CTL: 4/6
: =AUTO :
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
ON AIR button
CUT
OFF
CUT (default)
Scaler
Slide In/Out
Wipe In/Out
TRANSITION TYPE
AUTO
DVE
KEY 2
ON AIR
DVE
DSK 1
DVE
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
DVE
AUTO
CUT
DSK 4
ON AIR
Buttons turn on while On-Air.
Buttons turn off while Off-Air.
ON-AIR button Setting
Item
Setting
CUT
Description
Cuts images in or out.
Scales up to insert images or scales down to
remove images.
SCALER
USER
TRANS
SLIDE RIGHT/LEFT
SLIDE TOP/BOTTOM
WIPE RIGHT/LEFT
WIPE TOP/BOTTOM
OFF
Slides in to insert images or slides out to remove
images.
Wipes images in or out.
Disables the button function.
63
8-9-2. Setting the AUTO Button Function
In the factory default setting, the function of the AUTO buttons is set to AUTO (MIX).
To change the DSK1 ON AIR button function so that the CUT transitions can be performed by
briefly pressing the button and the AUTO (MIX) transitions cab be performed by pressing and
holding down the button, proceed as follows:
(1) Press the TRANSITION RATE button above the PinP1 ON AIR button to display the
[TRANS] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select DSK1 at SELECT.
(3) Turn F4to select C/AT.
TRANS
:SELECT : USER TRANS
USER/ADV: =DSK1 : =CUT
:ADV CTL: 4/6
: =C/AT :
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
ON AIR
DVE
DSK 1
AUTO button
OFF
MIX (default)
CUT (press)
MIX (press and hold)
DVE
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
DVE
AUTO
CUT
DSK 4
ON AIR
Buttons turn on while On-Air.
(Light color varies by output bus)
Buttons turn off while Off-Air.
AUTO Button Setting
Item
Setting Description
AUTO Always performs MIX transitions regardless of how long the button is pressed.
ADV
Performs Cut transitions when button is briefly pressed.
C/AT
CTL
Performs MIX transitions when button is pressed and held down.
OFF
Disables the button function.
The transition time for MIX transitions can be set under RATE in the [TRANS] (1/6)-(3/6)
menus. See section 8-10-2. "Transition Rate" for details.
Users can perform KEY1 and KEY 2 transitions in the NEXT TRANSITION block in the
same way as those for the M/E background. Therefore, if KEY1 is set up to MIX or WIPE in
the NEXT TRANSITION block, pressing KEY1 AUTO performs the MIX or WIPE transition
in the same way as that for the AUTO button in the NEXT TRANSITION.
The DVE lamps for KEY1 and KEY2 light up red to indicate that the key uses a DVE
pattern. This is useful for checking the currently used DVE channels, because only two
DVE channels can be used at the same time.
64
8-10. Advanced Settings for Transitions
8-10-1. Fader Limit
The fader limit setting determines how far your transition can proceed. When performing
transitions (mix or other) there may be times when you want the transition to the next signal to
only complete to a certain degree instead of fully switching from one picture to another. In this
case, you will need to limit the fader range. The procedure to do this is as follows.
(1) Press the FADER LIMIT button in the TRANSITION block to display the [TRANS - LIMIT]
menu. Set the fader limit value at L (Limit). The default setting is 100.0. With this setting,
the transition is complete with pictures switching fully. Set E (Enable) to ON to enable the
fader limit function.
TRANS
LIMIT
:
M/E BKGD
:L=100.0:E=ON
:
P/P BKGD
:L=100.0:E=ON
: 1/5
:
(2) Press the page down button to go to the following pages and set the fader limit for KEY,
PinP and DSK in the same way.
The FADER LIMIT buttons turn on when the fader limit function is enabled. Pressing the
FADER LIMIT buttons on the fader levers toggle the fader limit feature of the background to
ON or OFF.
(3) Press AUTO or move the fader lever to perform transitions.
Adjusting the Fader Offset:
The fader OFFSET for the lever can also be adjusted in the [SETUP-PANEL-TRS CTRL]
menu. Turn F3 and F4 to adjust the fader offset.
PANEL
:BUSTYPE:TRSEDGE: FADER OFFSET : 1/2
M/E CTRL: =P/P : =OFF :U=1.00 L=1.00 :
PANEL
:BUSTYPE:
P/P CTRL: =P/P :
Item
FADER
OFFSET
Setting
U
L
: FADER OFFSET : 2/2
:U=1.00 L=1.00 :
Description
Sets the upper edge offset.
Sets the bottom edge offset.
65
8-10-2. Transition Rate
The transition rate setting determines how long the transition takes in frames to complete.
(1) Press the TRANSITION RATE button above the PinP1 ON AIR button to display the
[TRANS] menu.
Users can also display the [TRANS] menu by quickly pressing the following buttons twice:
BKGD, KEY1, KEY2 and MIX in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(2) Turn F1 to F4 to set the transition rate for each bus. To enter the rate in the KEYPAD,
press F1 or other related control-push button, enter the rate in the KEYPAD and then
press ENTER in the KEYPAD to store the new transition rate.
The transition rate can be set for each bus respectively as shown in the following menu
pages. Use the page up and down buttons to move between the menu pages. The setting
range is 0 to 999 on a frame basis.
TRANS
: M/E
BKGD/BLK: =30
: P/P
: =30
: BLACK TRANS
: =30
: =P/P
TRANS
: KEY1
RATE-M/E: =30
: KEY2
: =30
: PinP1 : PinP2 : 2/6
: =30
: =30
:
TRANS
: DSK1
RATE-P/P: =30
: DSK2
: =30
: DSK3
: =30
: DSK4
: =30
: 1/6
:
: 3/6
:
8-10-3. Endpoint Processing for DVE Transitions
In DVE operations, differences in video delay times when entering and exiting DVE effects
can cause the video to appear choppy. This choppiness can be reduced by menu setting so
that the DVE effect always exits at the transition start and end points (TRS EDGE to OFF in
the [SETUP-PANEL-TRS CTRL] menu).
PANEL
:BUSTYPE:TRS EDGE: FADER OFFSET : 1/2
M/E CTRL: =P/P : =OFF
:U=1.00 L=1.00 :
66
8-10-4. Effect Background
The effect background is the bottom layer placed below the DVE effects. It is used to
transition images with a 2Ch-DVE pattern.
Effect background
DVE image
(1) Press the TRANSITION RATE button above the PinP1 ON AIR button to display the
[TRANS] menu.
(2) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 5.
TRANS
: XPT
:
EFF BKGD: =MATT :
: 5/6
:
(3) Turn F1 to select the DVE background image from MATT, AUX7 or AUX8.
If AUX7 or AUX8 is set, the currently selected image for AUX7 or AUX8 is used.
If MATT is set, go to the next page (PAGE 6) to specify the color for MATT. See section
5-7-1. "Setting Up the Matte Color" for color setting.
67
9. Modifying Patterns
9-1. Preset Pattern Groups
The WIPE preset patterns (No.0-202) can be changed or modified from their original patterns.
Basically the preset patterns are categorized into five different groups. The available items in the
WIPE modify menu are also different according to the type of groups
Pattern No.
0 to 99
100 to 137
140 to 147,
150 to 157,
161 and 162
170 to 181
200 to
Type of Group
WIPE
2D/2.5D DVE
Available modification settings
2D border, multi, 2D position, 2D size, etc.
2D border, 2D position, 2D size, crop, etc.
3D DVE
2D border, lighting effects, warp effects, crop, etc.
2D/2.5D DVE (2ch)
MIX, FAM, NAM
2D border, 2D position, 2D size, crop, etc.
---
To modify a pattern, select a WIPE pattern, open the WIPE menu and change desired
parameters to modify the pattern. This section explains how to modify patterns using examples
for the KEY transition and background transition.
See section 9-6. "WIPE Menu" for details about modification settings.
9-2. Modified Patterns
Press the PATTERN button in the Transition block to display the [WIPE-PATTERN] menu. The
currently selected patterns are displayed in the menu. When a pattern is modified, the letter "M'
is added in front of the pattern number as shown in the menu below. When the CG WIPE feature
is enabled (ENABLE in the [WIPE MODIFY-CG WIPE] menu is set to ON.), the letter "C' is
added in front of the pattern number.
WIPE:BKGD
PATT:M00
:KEY1
:M20
:KEY2
:00
: 1/1
:
The same pattern can be individually modified for the background, KEY1 and KEY2. However,
when you change the pattern to another one of the same type (WIPE or DVE) after modifying the
pattern, the modified pattern data will be lost. To preserve and recall a modified pattern easily,
register it to the Direct Pattern memory. (See section 8-8-2. "Direct Pattern Function.")
Returning Pattern to Normal Settings
When you change a pattern to another one of the same type after the pattern modification in
some cases, some modification data set for the specified pattern may be preserved and applied
to the newly selected pattern. In these cases, if you wish the modified pattern to return to the
default settings, reset the pattern. (See section 9-5. "How to Reset WIPE Menu".)
Baking Up Modified Data
The modified pattern data is lost when powering off the switcher. It is recommended that
important modified data be backed up to the event memory or a USB flash memory stick. For
details about backup procedures, refer to section 17 "Event Memory" and section 19. "File
Operations." The Direct Pattern data is included in the switcher's backup data (ALL data).
68
9-3. Pattern Modify Example1 (Pattern 20)
This modification example adds a border effect to background transitions using Pattern 20.
(1) Select a desired signal on the M/E PST bus.
(2) Press BKGD in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(3) Press WIPE in the TRNSITION TYPE block.
(4) Press PATTERN in the TRANSITION block to display the [WIPE PATTERN] menu.
(5) Turn F1 to select 20.
WIPE:BKGD
PATT:20
:KEY1
:00
:KEY2
:00
: 1/1
:
(6) Press the WIPE CHANNEL button to the right of the Keypad to turn BKGD to ON.
(7) Press the MENU control button, then press the WIPE button in the Keypad to display the
[WIPE] menu.
(8) Turn F1 to select BORDER. Press F1 or the page down button.
WIPE BG :>BORDER >POS/ANGL>MULTI
No.020 :>CG WIPE >INIT
>SUB EFF
(9) The [WIPE - BORDER] menu appears. Turn F1 to select the signal used for the border under
SIGNAL. Select MATT in this example. Set the border width under WIDTH and border
softness under SOFT.
WIPE BG :SIGNAL : WIDTH : SOFT
BORDER : =MATT : =5.0 : =2.0
:
:
: 1/2
:
(10) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2.
(11) Turn F4 to select a border color among eight standard colors. Press F4 to apply the
selected color. If you want to adjust the selected color or set the color by entering HSL values,
turn F1, F2 and F3 to adjust values or press F1, F2 and F3, enter a value in the Keypad,
and then press ENTER in the Keypad. Users can also set these three parameters in the
JOYSTICK block. (See section 4-2-4. "Changing Settings or Values Using the Joystick".)
WIPE BG :
BORDER COLOR
BORDER :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
69
:RECALL : 2/2
: >BLUE :
9-4. Pattern Modify Example2 (Pattern 117)
This modification example also adds a border effect to KEY1 transitions using Pattern 117.
However Pattern 117 has different border settings than Pattern 20. It can use both inside and
outside border effects.
(1) Set up KEY1 (See section 10. "KEY and DSK.")
(2) Press KEY1 in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(3) Press WIPE in the TRNSITION TYPE block.
(4) Press PATTERN in the TRANSITION block to display the [WIPE PATTERN] menu.
(5) Press F2, enter "117" in the Keypad and press ENTER in the Keypad to select Pattern 117.
WIPE:BKGD
PATT:M20
:KEY1
:117
:KEY2
:00
: 1/1
:
(6) Press the WIPE CHANNEL button to the right of the Keypad to turn KEY1 to ON.
(7) Press the MENU control button, then press the WIPE button in the Keypad to display the
[WIPE] menu.
(8) Turn F1 to select BORDER. Press F1 or the page down button.
WIPE K1 :>BORDER
No.117 :>INIT
>POS/ANGL>MULTI
>SUB EFF
(9) The [WIPE - BORDER] menu appears. To use the inside border, set the border width under
INSIDE X and Y. To use the outside border, set the border width under OUTSIDE X and Y.
WIPE K1 :
INSIDE
BORDER :X=20
Y=50
:
OUTSIDE
:X=5
Y=5
: 1/3
:
(10) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2. Set the softness for the inside border under
INSIDE X and Y. Set the softness for the outside border under OUTSIDE.
WIPE K1 :
INSIDE
BDR SOFT:X=3
Y=3
:OUTSIDE:
: =0
:
: 2/3
:
(11) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 3.
(12) Turn F4 to select a border color among eight standard colors. Press F4 to apply the
selected color. If you want to adjust the selected color or set the color by entering HSL values,
turn F1, F2 and F3 to adjust values or press F1, F2 and F3, enter a value in the Keypad and
then press ENTER in the Keypad. Users can also set these three parameters in the
JOYSTICK block. (See section 4-2-4. "Changing Settings or Values Using the Joystick.")
WIPE K1 :
BORDER COLOR
BDR COL :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
70
:RECALL : 3/3
: >BLUE :
9-5. How to Reset the WIPE Menu
All parameters in the WIPE menu can be returned to factory default settings by the procedures
below.
To Reset a Part of the Modified Pattern using the WIPE Menu:
The INIT items in the menu allows the user to reset a submenu respectively in the WIPE menu.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
INC
7
8
9
BLACK
TRANS
CONTROL
SETUP
COPY
SWAP
NEW
STILL
MATT
FILE
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
+/-
1
2
3
DEC
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
COPY
PASTE
WIPE
CHANNEL
KEY2
KEYER/P IN P
6
PLAY
STOP
KEY1
(2D DVE)
INS
DSK1
CLEAR
BKGD
WIPE POS
MENU
POS
ROT
FINE
DEF
JOYSTICK
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
(1) Press the WIPE CHANNEL button to turn on the lamp of the bus where the pattern is used.
(2) Press the MENU control button, then press the WIPE button in the Keypad to display the
[WIPE] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select INIT. And then press and hold down F1 for a while.
WIPE BG :>BORDER >POS/ASP >CROP
No.117 :>CG WIPE >INIT
>SUB EFF
(4) Turn F1 to select the parameter group you want to reset under INIT. Press F1 to reset the
selected parameter values.
WIPE BG :INIT
:
INIT
:=BORDER:
: 1/1
:
To Reset a Modified Pattern using the WIPE PATTERN Menu:
(1) Press PATTERN in the TRANSITION block to display the [WIPE PATTERN] menu. The
letter "M" appears in front of the modified pattern.
WIPE:BKGD
PATT:00
:KEY1
:M20
:KEY2
:00
: 1/1
:
(2) Press and hold down F2 to reset Pattern 20 in the above example.
To Reset a Modified Pattern using User Buttons:
(1) Assign the reset function of the WIPE menu (OTHER - WIPE MOD BKGD RESET, WIPE
MOD KEY1 RESET or WIPE MOD KEY2 RESET) to a USER button.
(2) Press the USER button. All parameters for the selected bus in the WIPE menu are returned
to factory default settings. (See section 21. "USER Button.")
71
9-6. WIPE Menu
9-6-1. No.0-99
The pattern number is displayed instead of "0XX" in the top page of the submenu.
"BG" (BKGD), "K1"(KEY1) or "K2"(KEY2) is displayed instead of "XX" on each page.
WIPE XX :>BORDER >POS/ANGL>MULTI
No.0XX :>CG WIPE >INIT
>SUB EFF
WIPE XX :SIGNAL : WIDTH : SOFT
BORDER : =MATT : =0.0 : =0.0
:
:
: 1/2
:
WIPE XX :
BORDER COLOR
BORDER :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
:RECALL : 2/2
: >BLUE :
WIPE XX :
POSITION
POS/ANGL:X=0
Y=0
: ANGLE :ASPECT : 1/1
: =0.0 : =0.0 :
WIPE XX :
MULTI
:X=1
:
:
MULTI
Y=1
: 1/1
:
WIPE XX :EFFECT :
MONO COLOR
SUB EFF : =NOR :S=0.0
H=0.0 En=OFF
: 1/3
:
WIPE XX :
DEFOCUS
SUB EFF :H=0.0
V=0.0
: 2/3
:
:
PAINT
:Y=0
C=0
WIPE XX :FREEZE :STROBE : NEGA
SUB EFF : =OFF : =OFF : =OFF
:MOSAIC : 3/3
: =OFF :
See section 14 for details about the CG WIPE pages.
The WIPE menu for KEY 1 and KEY 2 does not have CG WIPE pages.
WIPE XX : INIT
INIT
: >OFF
:
:
: 1/1
:
The SUB EFF pages are not available in No.0-99 for KEY1 and KEY2.
Only softness can be set in the BORDER page in No.0-99 for KEY1 and KEY2.
72
9-6-2. No.100-137
The pattern number is displayed instead of "1XX" in the top page of the submenu.
"BG" (BKGD), "K1"(KEY1) or "K2"(KEY2) is displayed instead of "XX" on each page.
WIPE XX :>BORDER >POS/ASP >CROP
No.1XX :>CG WIPE >INIT
>SUB EFF
WIPE XX :
INSIDE
BORDER :X=0
Y=0
:
OUTSIDE
:X=0
Y=0
: 1/3
:
WIPE XX :
INSIDE
BDR SOFT:X=0
Y=0
:OUTSIDE:
: =0
:
: 2/3
:
WIPE XX :
BORDER COLOR
BDR COL :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
WIPE XX :
POSITION
POS/SIZE:X=0
Y=0
:RECALL : 3/3
: >BLUE :
: SIZE :
: =1000 :
: 1/2
:
WIPE XX :
ASPECT
:FADE LV:
ASPT/FAD:X=1000 Y=1000 : =0.0 :
: 2/2
:
WIPE XX :
CROP
:T=0.0
R=0.0
: 1/1
:
:
MONO COLOR
:S=0.0
H=0.0 En=OFF
: 1/3
:
WIPE XX :
SUB EFF :
CROP POSITION
B=0.0
L=0.0
WIPE XX :
DEFOCUS
SUB EFF :H=0.0
V=0.0
:
PAINT
:Y=0
C=0
WIPE
:FREEZE :STROBE : NEGA
SUB EFF : =OFF : =OFF : =OFF
: 2/3
:
:MOSAIC : 3/3
: =OFF :
See section 14 for details about the CG WIPE pages.
The WIPE menu for KEY 1 and KEY 2 does not have CG WIPE pages.
WIPE XX : INIT
INIT
: >OFF
:
:
: 1/1
:
73
9-6-3. No.140-147, 150-157, 161 and 162
The pattern number is displayed instead of "1XX" in the top page of the submenu.
"BG" (BKGD), "K1"(KEY1) or "K2"(KEY2) is displayed instead of "XX" on each page.
WIPE XX :>BORDER >TURN
No.1XX :>CG WIPE >INIT
>CROP
>SUB EFF
WIPE XX :
INSIDE
BORDER :X=0
Y=0
:
OUTSIDE
:X=0
Y=0
: 1/3
:
WIPE XX :
INSIDE
BDR SOFT:X=0
Y=0
:OUTSIDE:
: =0
:
: 2/3
:
WIPE XX :
BORDER COLOR
BDR COL :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
:RECALL : 3/3
: >BLUE :
WIPE XX :
LIGHTING
WARP
:W=0.0 En=OFF
: RAD
: =0
: DIR
: =0
: 1/2
:
WIPE XX :
LIGHT COLOR
:RECALL : 2/2
LIGHTCOL:S=0.0
L=100.0 H=0.0 : >WHITE:
WIPE XX :
CROP
:T=0.0
WIPE XX :
SUB EFF :
CROP POSITION
B=0.0
L=0.0
R=0.0
: 1/1
:
:
MONO COLOR
:S=0.0
H=0.0 En=OFF
: 1/3
:
WIPE XX :
DEFOCUS
SUB EFF :H=0.0
V=0.0
:
PAINT
:Y=0
C=0
WIPE XX :FREEZE :STROBE : NEGA
SUB EFF : =OFF : =OFF : =OFF
: 2/3
:
:MOSAIC : 3/3
: =OFF :
See section 14 for details about the CG WIPE pages.
The WIPE menu for KEY 1 and KEY 2 does not have CG WIPE pages.
WIPE XX : INIT
INIT
: >OFF
:
:
: 1/1
:
74
9-6-4. No.170-181
The pattern number is displayed instead of "1XX" in the top page of the submenu.
"BG1" (BKGD CH1) or "BG2"(BKGD CH2) is displayed instead of "BGx" on each page.
WIPE BG :>BORDER1 >CROP1 >SUB EFF1>CG WIPE
No.1XX :>BORDER2 >CROP2 >SUB EFF2>INIT
WIPE BGx:
INSIDE
BORDER :X=0
Y=0
:
OUTSIDE
:X=0
Y=0
: 1/3
:
WIPE BGx:
INSIDE
BDR SOFT:X=0
Y=0
:OUTSIDE:
: =0
:
: 2/3
:
WIPE BGx:
BORDER COLOR
BDR COL :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
:RECALL : 3/3
: >BLUE :
WIPE BGx:
CROP POSITION
CROP
:T=0.0
B=0.0
L=0.0
R=0.0
: 1/1
:
:
MONO COLOR
:S=0.0
H=0.0 En=OFF
: 1/3
:
WIPE BGx:
SUB EFF :
WIPE BGx:
DEFOCUS
SUB EFF :H=0.0
V=0.0
:
PAINT
:Y=0
C=0
WIPE BGx:FREEZE :STROBE : NEGA
SUB EFF : =OFF : =OFF : =OFF
: 2/3
:
:MOSAIC : 3/3
: =OFF :
See section 14 for details about the CG WIPE pages.
The WIPE menu for KEY 1 and KEY 2 does not have CG WIPE pages.
WIPE BGx: INIT
INIT
: >OFF
:
:
: 1/1
:
9-6-5. No.200-202
The pattern number is displayed instead of "2XX" in the top page of the submenu.
WIPE BG : >CG WIPE >INIT
No.20X :
See section 14 for details about the CG WIPE pages.
The INIT menu is the same as that of other patterns
75
10. KEY and DSK
The key feature enables you to superimpose titles and images onto background signals. With the
HVS-350 series, six keyer channels (two KEYs and four DSKs) are available. KEY and DSK can
use three keyer types: Luminance Key, Full Key and Bus Key. Key Invert, Mask and 2D DVE
effects can also be added to both DSK and KEY. Furthermore, the Chroma Key feature and Edge
effect are also provided to two KEYs.
Feature Comparison between KEY and DSK
KEY
Key invert, Mask
Available
2D DVE
Available
Luminance key, Full key, Bus key
Available
Chroma key
Available
Edge effect
Available
Pattern transition
M/E PGM image selection
Output bus
M/E
DSK
Available
Available
Available
Available (*1)
M/E, P/P or AUX1-8 (*2)
(*1) Except when M/E is selected for the output bus.
(*2) The default output bus is P/P. See section 10-9. "Where DSKs Appear."
The method for KEY and DSK settings are almost the same. The following section describes the
key setup and adjustment using KEY1 as an example.

Luminance KEY
Luminance Key, also called Self Key, uses the same image for Key Source and Key Insert. This
image is selected from Key Insert.
Luminance Key
Edge

Full key
Full Key displays the key insert signal full-screen.
Full Key
BOX(AND)
mask
76

Bus key
Bus Key, also called External Key, uses different images for Key Source and Key Insert. The
background signal is cut out using Key Source and Key Insert fills in the cut out part of the signal.
Bus key
INVERT
BOX(OR)
mask
10-1. Luminance Key
(1) Press the KEY1 button in BUS SELECT.
(2) Select a signal for Key Insert in the KEY/AUX bus.
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
2
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
AUX
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
(3) Quickly press KEY1 twice in BUS SELECT to display the [KEY1 SETUP] menu.
(4) Turn F1 to select INS/SRC, and press F1 or the page down button.
KEY1
SETUP
:>INS/SRC >EDGE
:>POS/SIZ >BORDER
>MASK
>CK
>SUB EFF >INIT
(5) The [KEY1- INS/SRC] menu is displayed. Turn F1 to set TYPE to LUM. The insert signal can
also be selected at INSERT.
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =LUM
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: >IN01 : =IN01 : =OFF :
See section 8-5. "KEY Transitions" and 8-9. "IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK" for
details on transitions. See section 10-4. "Adjusting Key Signal" for details on making fine
adjustments.
Edge (KEY only), Invert, Mask and 2D DVE effects can be applied to the luminance key.
77
10-2. Full Key
(1) Follow Step (1) to Step (4) in "Luminance Key" above.
(2) The [KEY1- INS/SRC] menu is displayed. Turn F1 to set TYPE to FULL. The insert signal
can also be selected at INSERT.
KEY1
: TYPE :INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
INS/SRC : =FULL : >IN01 : =IN01 : =OFF :
See section 8-5. "KEY Transitions" and 8-9. "IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK" for
details on transitions. See section 10-4. "Adjusting Key Signal" for details on making fine
adjustment.
Edge, Invert, Mask and 2D DVE effects can be applied to the luminance key.
10-3. Bus Key
Bus Key uses different signals for Key Insert and Key Source. To create a Bus Key, select a Key
Insert signal and a Key Source signal in the menus. Since selecting a signal in the menu takes
time, the HVS-350 series has a KEY LINK function, which enables you to select a key source
and insert using only a source button. See section 10-3-1. "Key Link" for details.
(1) Press the KEY1 button in BUS SELECT.
(2) Select a signal for Key Insert in the KEY/AUX bus.
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
2
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
AUX
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
(3) Quickly press KEY1 twice in BUS SELECT to display the [KEY1SETUP] menu.
(4) Turn F1 to select INS/SRC, and press F1 or the page down button.
KEY1
SETUP
:>INS/SRC >EDGE
:>POS/SIZ >BORDER
>MASK
>CK
>SUB EFF >INIT
(5) The [KEY1- INS/SRC] menu is displayed. Turn F1 to set TYPE to BUS.
(6) Turn F3 to select a signal for Key Source in SOURCE.
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =BUS
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: >IN01 : =IN02 : =OFF :
See section 8-5. "KEY Transitions" and 8-9. "IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK" for
details on transitions. See section 10-4. "Adjusting Key Signal" for details on making fine
adjustments.
Edge, Invert, Mask and 2D DVE effects can be applied to the luminance key.
78
10-3-1. Key Link
A Key Source signal is automatically selected when a Key Insert signal is selected when KEY
LINK is on. The INSERT/SOURCE signal pairs are automatically set once they are selected
for a key (KEY or DSK). To change signal assignment, select the INSERT/SOURCE signal
pair again for the key or another key. The same assignments are shared among all keys of
DSK1-4 and KEY1-2.
When Using the Key Link:
(1) Select a key among KEY1-2 and DSK1-4.
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
2
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
AUX
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
(2) Just selecting a signal for KEY INSERT in the KEY/AUX allows users to select a KEY
INSERT and KEY SOURCE signal pair.
NOTE
If the key links do not work correctly, set LINK to ON on PAGE 2 of the [SETUPFUNCTION - KEY/DSK] menu.
10-3-2. KEY INSERT MATT
In addition to the bus matt signal, the internally generate MATT can be used as key fill.
KEY INSERT MATT is a dedicated matte signal for DSK and KEY and it is not the same as
BUS MATT. The different colors can be set in KEY INSERT MATT for each key (KEY1-2
and DSK1-4).
(1) Set up a Bus Key, then press F2 in the [KEY1- INS/SRC] menu to set INSERT to InMAT
(Insert Matt).
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =BUS
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: >InMAT: =IN02 : =OFF :
(2) Press the page down button to go to PAGE3.
(3) Press F4 and select a color among eight standard colors, then press F4.
To use a different color, turn F1, F2, and F3 to adjust the color.
KEY1
:
MATT COLOR
:RECALL : 3/3
INS MATT:S=67.3 L=15.8 H=257.5: >RED :
Key Links cannot be applied to KEY MATT.
79
10-4. KEY INSERT AUX
The KEY INSERT AUX allow users to replace key fill images using the AUX7 or AUX8 bus,
changing only inside images while maintaining key shapes.
KEY
ON
Change KEY INSERT
to AUX7.
Change the AUX7
image.
(1) Set up a bus referring to Section "10-3. Bus Key". Then press F2 in the [KEY1 - INS/SRC]
menu to select InMAT (insert matt) under INSERT.
(2) Turn F2 to select AUX7 (or AUX8).
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =BUS
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: >AUX7 : =IN02 : =OFF :
(3) Press AUX7 (or AUX8) in the BUS SELECT section.
(4) Select a video signal for the key fill on the KEY/AUX bus.
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
2
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
AUX
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Note that if an internally generated signal such as program, preview clean or multi-view
(stills and matts are available) is selected for AUX7 or 8, key images will appear black. KEY
LINK is not available when using AUX7 or 8.
The KEY INSERT AUX function can be applied to bus-, full- and chroma-keys.
10-5. Adjusting the Key Signal
Clip and Gain allows users to adjust the key signal and its composition over the background.
The transparency of the KEY can also be adjusted.
(1) Quickly press KEY1 twice in BUS SELECT, and display the [KEY1 SETUP] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select INS/SRC, and press F1 or the page down button.
KEY1
SETUP
:>INS/SRC >EDGE
:>POS/SIZ >BORDER
>MASK
>CK
>SUB EFF >INIT
(3) The [KEY1- INS/SRC] menu is displayed. Press the page down button to go to PAGE2.
KEY1
: GAIN
PROC AMP: =1.0
: CLIP
: =6.2
:TRANSP :FAM
: =0.0 : =OFF
: 2/3
:
(4) Turn F1 to adjust GAIN
(5) Turn F2 to adjust CLIP for adjusting the key.
(6) Turn F3 to set the transparency of the key. Increasing the value makes the key more
transparent.
80
10-6. Chroma Key
Chroma key is a method for creating a key signal using a chroma component instead of a
luminance component. It is mostly used for compositing moving subjects such a person in the
virtual background. For example, to place a person onto a background graphic, first film the
person standing in front of a background such as a blue screen. The blue part of the filmed
image is detected and will be used to create the key signal.
Chromakey
10-6-1. Creating a Chroma Key
(1) Select a signal to be used as a background on the M/E PGM bus.
(2) Press the KEY1 button in BUS SELECT and select a Chroma key signal in the KEY/AUX
bus. (The signal can be selected in the INSERT item in the [KEY1 - INS/SRC] menu.)
(3) Quickly press KEY1 twice in BUS SELECT to display the [KEY1 SETUP] menu.
(4) Turn F1 to select INS/SRC, and press F1 or the page down button.
KEY1
SETUP
:>INS/SRC >EDGE
:>POS/SIZ >BORDER
>MASK
>CK
>SUB EFF >INIT
(5) The [KEY1 - INS/SRC] menu is displayed. Turn F1 to set TYPE to CHR.
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =CHR
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: >IN01 : =IN01 : =OFF :
(6) Press KEY1 ON AIR to display KEY1 on the M/E program screen.
(7) Press the page up button to return to the [KEY1 SETUP] menu.
(8) Turn F1 to select CK and press F1 to display the [KEY1 - AUTO CK] menu.
(9) Turn F3 to change SELECT to ON to activate the Auto Chroma key.
KEY1
:
POSITION
AUTO CK :X=0
Y=0
:SELECT :PGM OUT: 1/5
: =ON
: =OFF :
(10) KEY1 is displayed on the topmost layer of the M/E preview image and a cross hair cursor
appears. The current position of the cursor is displayed at POS X and POS Y in the [KEY1
- AUTO CK] menu.
If you need to have a crosshair cursor also appear on the M/E PGM screen, set the PGM
OUT item to ON in the [KEY1 - AUTO CK] menu.
81
(11) Press the MENU control button in the Joystick block. Move the joystick up, down left and
right to move the crosshair cursor onto the desired color. Pressing the FINE button will
help you fine tune the adjustment. To precisely adjust the position, press F1 or F2, enter
the values directly into POSITION X and Y using the numeric keypad and then press
ENTER. Selecting a darker color makes adjustment easier.
(12) Twist the joystick counter-clockwise to generate the Chroma key. This can also be done
by turning F3 to set the SELECT item to OFF in the [KEY1 - AUTO CK] menu.
KEY1
:
POSITION
AUTO CK :X=100
Y=600
:SELECT :PGM OUT: 1/5
: =ON
: =OFF :
Move the crosshair with the
joystick along the X-Y axes and
twist the joystick CCW to create
a Chroma key.
BKGD
KEY1 WIPE
CHANNEL
KEY2
KEYER/P IN P
Preview image
WIPE POS
MENU
(2D DVE)
POS
ROT
FINE
DEF
JOYSTICK
10-6-2. Chroma Key adjustments
If the desired result is not achieved using the automatic chroma key generation procedure,
fine adjustments can be made as follows:
Use CK EDGE to smooth
chroma key edges.
Adjust HUE, ANGLE and
ANGLE OFFSET to make
the background clear.
Use COLOR CANCEL
and SUPPRESSION to
eliminate or reduce
color noise on the bird.

Adjusting Edges
Used to adjust the edge of the Keyed area when it appears unnatural.
Press the page down button to go to PAGE2 of the chroma key menu. Adjust the left edge in
the L (LEFT) item and the right edge in the R (RIGHT) item.
KEY1
:
CK EDGE
CK ADJT :L=0
R=0
:CK MODE:CK MASK: 2/5
: =NORML: =NORML:

Gain and Clip
These are used to adjust the key signal and its composition over the background image.
Press the page down button to go to PAGE3 of the chroma key menu. Turn F1 and F2 to
adjust the gain and clip.
KEY1
: GAIN
CK ADJT : =1.0
: CLIP
: =0.0
: HUE
: =0.0
:COL CAN: 3/5
: =ON
:
For chroma key, INVERT, GAIN, CLIP, and TRANSP in the [KEY - INS/SRC] menu cannot
be set.
82

Chroma Key Mix Mode 1 (CK MODE)
Set a mix mode 1 for chroma keys suitable to the background image under CK MODE in
PAGE 2.
KEY1
:
CK EDGE
CK ADJT :L=0
R=0
CK MODE setting
NORMAL
BLACK
:CK MODE:CK MASK: 2/5
: =NORML: =NORML:
Description
Used for ordinary background images.
Used for lower luminance background images. This reduces the
luminance level of chroma key edges to appear smoother.

Chromakey Mix Mode 2 (CK MASK)
Set a mix mode 2 for chroma keys suitable to composite method under CK MASK in PAGE 2.
To the background image under CK MODE in PAGE2.
KEY1
:
CK EDGE
CK ADJT :L=0
R=0
CK MASK setting
NORML
(NORMAL)
CHROM
(CHROMA)
:CK MODE:CK MASK: 2/5
: =NORML: =NORML:
Description
Used for the standard chroma key composite. (Used to mask areas
characterized by both luminance and chrominance components with the
key cut signal.)
Used to mask areas characterized by the chrominance component with
the key cut signal. (See section 10-6-4.)

Adjusting Chroma key Colors
Use to fine-tune specific chroma key colors, press the page down button to go to PAGE3 of
the KEY menu. Turn F3 to make HUE adjustments.
KEY1
: GAIN
CK ADJT : =1.0
: CLIP
: =0.0
: HUE
: =0.0
:COL CAN: 3/5
: =ON
:

Chroma Angle
The ANGLE parameter determines the width of the color hue. Press the page down button to
go to PAGE5 of the KEY menu. If the reference color (blue back panel or other background)
is not uniform and has some variation, widen the ANGLE to make the HUE range wider. You
can finely adjust the range by using the Y, C and K parameters of ANGLE OFFSET.
KEY1
ANGLE
: ANGLE :
ANGLE OFFSET
: 5/5
: =45.00:Y=0.00 C=0.00 K=0.00 :

Color Cancellation and Suppression
Turning on Color Cancel (default) reduces the reflection in the foreground and background
images. If you still notice some tint or spill of color (blue) on the foreground subject, use the Y,
C1, and C2 parameters in SUPPRESSION respectively to eliminate or reduce the color
noises.
KEY1
:
SUPPRESSION
SUPPRES :Y=1.00 C1=1.00 C2=0.0
83
:
:
: 4/5
:
10-6-3. Advanced Example 1 (Using KEY INSERT AUX)
This example replaces Chromakey images while maintaining the key shape by selecting
InMAT (insert matt) or AUX7 or 8 for KEY INSERT. (See section 10-4. "KEY INSERT AUX.")
Replace the chroma key image to a
matt or other image.
(1) Set up a Chroma key referring to Section "10-6-1. Creating a Chroma Key". Then press
F2 in the [KEY1 - INS/SRC] menu to select InMAT (insert matt) under INSERT.
To change the matt color, see section 10-3-2. "KEY INSERT MATT".
To change the key to another image, go to Step (2).
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =CHR
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: >InMAT: =IN02 : =OFF :
(2) Turn F2 to select AUX7 (or AUX8).
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =CHR
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: >AUX7 : =IN02 : =OFF :
(3) Press AUX7 (or AUX8) in the BUS SELECT section.
(4) Select a video signal for the key fill on the KEY/AUX bus
10-6-4. Advanced Example 2 (Images with a Specified Color Left)
Setting INVERT to ON and CK MASK to CHROM allows you to create chroma key images
as shown below in which the specified color areas remain with the original color and other
areas are changed to black-and-white.
Only green color remains.
Green is specified.
Changed to B/W
except Green
Chroma key composite image
IN01
Only red color remains.
Red Flag is specified.
Changed to B/W
except Flag
Chroma key composite image
IN01
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =CHR
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: >IN01 : --: =ON
:
KEY1
:
CK EDGE
CK ADJT :L=0
R=0
:CK MODE:CK MASK: 2/5
: =NORML: =CHROM:
84
10-7. Mask and Invert
Mask and Invert can be used for keys and DSKs. KEY1 is used as an example in this section.
Bus key
INVERT
BOX(OR)
mask
10-7-1. Inverting Key and Background
Setting Invert to ON inverts the key image and the background image. Set INVERT in the
[KEY1- INS/SRC] menu to ON. The key signal is then inverted.
10-7-2. Key Masks

BOX Mask
Box-shaped masks can be applied to keys. They can also be inverted so that the keyed area
inside the box becomes invisible.
(1) Create a KEY1.
(2) Quickly press KEY1 twice to display the [KEY1 SETUP] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select MASK, and press F1 or the page down button to open the [KEY1 MASK] menu.
(4) Turn F2 to select BOX on PAGE 1 in the [KEY1-MASK] menu. Set TYPE to AND or OR. If
set to AND, the area where Key Source and Box Mask overlap is used as the key signal. If
set to OR, both Key Source and Box Mask are used as the key signal.
KEY1
MASK
: TYPE
: =AND
:MASK
: =BOX
:INVERT :
: =OFF :
: 1/2
:
(5) Set the horizontal and vertical mask width on PAGE 2 in the MASK menu.
KEY1
:
MASK POS:T=0
BOX MASK POSITION
B=0
L=0
R=0
: 2/2
:
(6) Setting the INVERT item on PAGE 1 in the MASK menu to ON inverts the Box Mask.
KEY1
MASK
: TYPE
: =AND
:MASK
: =BOX
:INVERT :
: =ON
:
85
: 1/2
:

Signal Mask
The following signals available in the switcher can be used for mask signals instead of Box.
Input signal
Input signal (option)
Internally generated signal
Other
IN01-08
INA1-4, INB1-4, INC1-4, IND1-4
BLK (BLACK), STL1-STL4, MAT1-MAT2, CLBR(Color bar)
AUX1-8
(1) Setup KEY1.
(2) Quickly press KEY1 twice in the BUS SELECT block to display the [KEY1 SETUP] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select MASK, and press F1 or the page down button to open the [KEY1 –
MASK] menu.
(4) Turn F2 to select a signal used for the mask on PAGE 1 in the [KEY1 - MASK] menu. Set
TYPE to AND or OR. If set to AND, the area where Key Source and Signal Mask are
overlapped is used as the key signal. If set to OR, both Key Source and Signal Mask keys
are used as the key signal.
KEY1
MASK
: TYPE
: =AND
:MASK
:INVERT :
: =AUX7 : =OFF :
: 1/2
:
(5) Setting the INVERT item on PAGE 1 in the [KEY1 - MASK] menu to ON inverts the Signal
Mask.
KEY1
MASK
: TYPE
: =AND
:MASK
:INVERT :
: =AUX7 : =ON :
: 1/2
:
10-8. Key Edge
The EDGE function allows users to add border type edges on KEY and DSK. Two types of
edges are available: Normal and Outline. The width, transparency, and color can be set for the
edges. Shadow effects can also be added by changing the position of the edges. To do this,
please follow the procedures below.
No edge, no shadow
Normal edge
Outline edge
(1) Go to the [KEY1 - EDGE] menu. Turn F1 to select NORMAL or O_LINE for TYPE. Selecting
NORMAL allows users to add edges. O_LINE allows users to display outlines without key fill
images.
(2) The item SOFT is for setting softness, TRANSP is for transparency, and WIDTH is for edge
width.
KEY1
EDGE
: TYPE : SOFT
: =O_LIN: =0
:TRANSP : WIDTH : 1/3
: =0
: =1
:
(3) Press the page down button to go to PAGE2. Change the X and Y values to set the edge
position.
KEY1
:
POSITION
EDGE POS:X=0
Y=0
:
:
: 2/3
:
86
(4) Press the page down button to go to PAGE3. The edge color can be set on this page. Turn
F4 to select a color among eight standard colors. If you wish to use a color other than those
eight, adjust the color by turning F1, F2 and/or F3.
KEY1
:
EDGE COLOR
EDGE COL:S=0.0 L=0.0
H=0.0
:RECALL : 3/3
: >BLACK:
10-9. Where DSKs Appear
The DSK images appear on the P/P program screen as a factory default setting. Users can
change the destination of DSKs to M/E or AUX1-8. To do this, follow the procedure below.
(1) Press the MENU control button and then the SETUP button on the SELECT/KEYPAD block
to display the [SETUP] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select FUNCTION, and press F1 or the page down button to open the [SETUP –
FUNCTION] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select KEY/DSK, and press F1 or the page down button to open the [SETUP
–FUNCTION-KEY/DSK] menu.
SETUP
:>KEY/DSK >VIRTUAL >AUX LINK>3D
FUNCTION:
4) To display the DSK1 image on the M/E program video, turn F1 to select M/E and then press
F1. Select the destination for DSK2 to DSK4 in the same way.
FUNCTION: DSK1
DSK ASGN: =M/E
: DSK2
: =P/P
: DSK3
: =P/P
87
: DSK4
: =P/P
: 1/2
:
11. DVE Effects on Keys
Dedicated 2D-DVE(2.5D) effects are available for each (both KEY and DSK) in the standard
configuration. The 2D-DVE is available just by setting the 2D DVE item to ON in each key menu. As
an example, this section explains how to add a 2D-DVE effect on the DSK1.
11-1. How to Enable 2D DVEs
(1) Press the MENU control button and then the DSK1 button to display the [DSK1 SETUP]
menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select POS/SIZ, then press F1 or the page down button to display the [DSK1POS/SIZE] menu
DSK1
SETUP
:>INS/SRC
:>POS/SIZ >BORDER
>MASK
>SUB EFF >INIT
(3) Turn F4 to set 2D DVE in the menu to ON.
DSK1
:
POSITION
POS/SIZE:X=0
Y=0
: SIZE :2D DVE : 1/5
: =1000 : =ON
:
The 2D DVE function is enabled for DSK1, and therefore the POS/SIZE, BORDER, and SUB
EFFECT menus in the DSK1 menu become available.
11-2. Changing Position
The position or the size of the DSK1 image can be changed as follows:
(1) Go to the [DSK1 - POS/SIZE], menu PAGE1.
DSK1
:
POSITION
POS/SIZE:X=0
Y=0
: SIZE
: =500
:2D DVE : 1/5
: =ON
:
(2) Turn F1 or F2 to set the position of the DSK image.
Background
DSK1 image
POSITION(0,0)
POSITION(200,200)
POSITION(-200,-200)
The base original POSITION of a key is at the center of the output screen. You can set the
position of the key images (KEY and DSK) by specifying X and Y coordinates, with the
origin of the axes located at the center of the screen.
88
11-3. Changing Sizes or Aspect Ratios
Changing Sizes
(1) Go to PAGE1 of the [DSK1 - POS/SIZE] menu.
DSK1
:
POSITION
POS/SIZE:X=0
Y=0
: SIZE :2D DVE : 1/3
: =500
: =ON
:
(2) Turn F3 to adjust the size of the DSK image.
(The figures below are examples of SIZE=500 and SIZE=750. The POSITION is set to (0, 0)
in both examples. )
SIZE(750)
SIZE(500)
Setting the size allows users to change the size of key images (KEY and DSK) while
retaining aspect ratios. If the value is 1000, the key will be of a full screen size.
To Change the Aspect Ratio
(1) Press the page down button to display PAGE2 of the [DSK1 - POS/SIZE] menu.
DSK1
ASPECT
:
ASPECT
:FADE LV:
:X=1000 Y=1000 : =0.0 :
: 2/5
:
(2) Turn F2 to change the ASPECT values for the DSK image.
(The figures below are examples. The POSITION is set to (0, 0) in the examples.)
(500, 500)
(500, 750)
(750, 750)
11-4. FADE
FADE allows users to add an effect to make backgrounds transparent.
(1) Go to the [DSK1 - POS/SIZE] menu PAGE2.
DSK1
ASPECT
:
ASPECT
:FADE LV:
:X=1000 Y=1000 : =0.0 :
: 2/5
:
(2) Turn F3 to set the FADE level for the DSK image. Increasing the value makes the backgound
transparent.
89
11-5. Rotation
In addition to the position and size changes, users can add a rotation effect to the key images.
Specifying the Rotation Angle (Number of Rotation)
(1) Go to PAGE 3 of the [DSK1 - POS/SIZE] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to F3 to rotate the DSK image around the X, Y and Z axes.
DSK1
:
LOCAL ROTATION
ROTATION:X=0
Y=0
Z=0
:
:
: 3/5
:
The LOCAL ROTATION values can rotate the DSK image around the base point up to
approximately eight times in the positive or negative direction.
X-Rotation: Rotates around the Y-axis.
Y-Rotation: Rotates around the X-axis.
Z-Rotation: Rotates around the origin.
X-Rotation
LOCAL ROTATION
(100,0,0)
Y-Rotation
LOCAL ROTATION
(0,100,0)
Z-Rotation
LOCAL ROTATION
(0,0,100)
In the factory default setting, the base point is set to the coordinates (0,0,0), which coincide with
the center point of the DSK image. The figure examples above show the rotations around the
base point (0,0,0). Changing the CENTER POSITION values in the menu can move the base
point
Moving the Center (Axes) of Rotation
(1) Go to PAGE 4 of the [DSK1 - POS/SIZE] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to F3 to move the center of rotation.
DSK1
:
CENTER POSITION
ROTATION:X=0
Y=0
Z=0
90
:
:
: 4/5
:
11-5-1. Setting Example
(1) Set the position and the size of DSK1 on PAGE 1 of the [DSK1 - POS/SIZE] menu. Note
that the position is two-dimensional and its origin is placed on (0,0), which coincides with
the center of the screen.
DSK1
:
POSITION
: SIZE
POS/SIZE:X=-200
Y=-200 : =500
:2D DVE : 1/3
: =ON
:
POSITION(-200,-200)
SIZE 500
Point of view
Screen surface
To enter a negative number, enter the number, press ± then press ENTER.
(2)Change the center of rotation on PAGE4 of the [DSK1 - POS/SIZE] menu. To rotate the DSK
image at the current POSITION, leave CENTER POSITION (0, 0, 0) un changed.
DSK1
:
CENTER POSITION
:
ROTATION:X=150
Y=-200 Z=-400 :
: 4/5
:
Center of rotation
POSITION(-200,-200)
SIZE 500
CENTER POSITION (150,-200,-400)
Point of view
Screen surface
(3) Set the rotation value on PAGE3 of the [DSK1 - POS/SIZE] menu.
DSK1
:
LOCAL ROTATION
ROTATION:X=100
Y=100
Z=100
:
:
: 3/5
:
[Example 1] Rotation around the X-axis
POSITION (-200,-200)
SIZE 500
CENTER POSITION (150,-200,-400)
ROTATION (100,0,0)
Center of
rotation
Point of view
Screen surface
91
[Example 2] Rotation around the Y-axis
POSITION (-200,-200)
SIZE 500
CENTER POSITION (150,-200,-400)
LOCAL ROTATION (0,0,100)
Center of
rotation
Point of view
Screen surface
[Example 3] Rotation around the Z-axis
POSITION (-200,-200)
SIZE 500
CENTER POSITION (150,-200,-400)
ROTATION (0,0,100)
Center of
rotation
Point of view
Screen surface
11-6. CROP
CROP allows users to trim the key image (KEY or DSK) from all four directions. The background
image then only remains visible in the cropped area.
(1) Go to PAGE5 of the [DSK1 - POS/SIZE] menu.
DSK1
CROP
:
:T=0
CROP POSITION
B=0
L=0
R=0
: 5/5
:
(2) Use F1, F2, F3 and/or F4 to crop the DSK1 image.
DSK image
Crops from top and bottom.
92
Crops from right and left.
11-7. SUB EFFECT
The SUB EFFECT menu allows users to add MONO COLOR, DEFOCUS, and PAINT COLOR
effects. Access the SUB EFFECT menu as shown below.
(1) Press the MENU control button and then the DSK1 button to display the [DSK1 SETUP]
menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select SUB EFF, then press F1 or the page down button to display the [DSK1 SUB EFF] menu.
DSK1
SETUP
:>INS/SRC
:>POS/SIZ >BORDER
>MASK
>SUB EFF >INIT
11-7-1. MONO COLOR
Monochrome effects can be configured via this menu.
(1) Go to PAGE1 of the [DSK1 - SUB EFF] menu.
(2) Turn F4 to set EN (ENABLE) to ON.
(3) Set the color by adjusting its S (SATURATION) and H (HUE) values.
DSK1
:
SUB EFF :
:
:S=0
MONO COLOR
H=0
En=ON
: 1/3
:
11-7-2. DEFOCUS
The DEFOCUS function allows users to add an effect that will blur the output image.
(1) Go to PAGE2 of the [DSK1 - SUB EFF] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to set the horizontal defocus level at item H (HORIZONTAL).
(3) Turn F2 to set the vertical defocus level at item V (VERTICAL).
DSK1
:
DEFOCUS
:
PAINT
DEFOCUS : H=40.0 V=50.0:Y=0
C=0
: 2/3
:
11-7-3. PAINT COLOR
The Paint color effect allows users to add an effect, which makes the image look like a
painting. Increasing the value decreases the degree of gradation, so the image becomes like
a painting.
(1) Go to PAGE2 of the [DSK1 - SUB EFF] menu.
(2) Turn F3 to set the luminance level at item Y (LUMINANCE).
(3) Turn F4 to set the chroma level at item C (CHROMA).
DSK1
:
DEFOCUS
DEFOCUS :H=0.0
V=0.0
:
PAINT
:Y=10
C=10
93
: 2/3
:
11-7-4. FREEZE, STROBE, NEGA, MOSAIC
Freeze, strobe, negative, and mosaic effects are also available.
(1) Go to the [DSK1 - SUB EFF] menu PAGE3.
DSK1
FREEZE
:FREEZE :STROBE : NEGA :MOSAIC : 3/3
:=OFF
: =OFF : =OFF : =OFF :
(2) When applying these effects, please refer to the table below.
Parameter
Description
Allows users to enable the freeze effect function.
Users can select either frame freeze or field freeze.
Allows users to enable strobe effects.
Increasing the value increases the intervals of flashing light.
Setting this function to ON makes an image negative by reversing all
luminance levels.
Allows users to use a mosaic effect.
Increasing the value enlarges the size of mosaic cells.
FREEZE
STROBE
NEGA
MOSAIC
Setting Example
DSK1
FREEZE
:FREEZE :STROBE : NEGA
: =FIELD: =1
: =ON
94
:MOSAIC : 3/3
: =OFF :
11-8. BORDERS
Borders can be added to DSK1 images. Inside border and outside borders can be adjusted
independently.
(1) Go to the [DSK1 - BORDER] menu.
(2) To use the inside border, set the width at the INSIDE X and Y. To use the outside border, set
the width at the OUTSIDE X and Y.
DSK1
BORDER
:
:X=0
INSIDE
Y=0
:
:X=0
OUTSIDE
Y=0
: 1/3
:
(3) Press the page down button to go to PAGE2. In this menu, border softness can be adjusted.
INSIDE X and Y allow users to set the softness for the inner half of the set border. The
softness of the outer half of the border is set at OUTSIDE.
WIPE
:
INSIDE
BDR SOFT:X=0
Y=0
:OUTSIDE:
: =0
:
: 2/3
:
(4) Press the page down button to go to PAGE3. Turn F4 to select a color for the border among
eight standard colors. If you wish to use a color other than those eight, adjust the color using
F1, F2 and/or F3. You can also use the joy stick to set the color.
DSK1
:
BORDER COLOR
BDR COL :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
Inside Border
DSK image
W/o border
Y
X
:RECALL : 3/3
: >BLUE :
SOFT-Y
DSK image
SOFT-X
EDGE SOFT
DSK image
W/ border
Inner half
softness
W/ border
W/ border
Outer half
softness
Outside Border
Y
DSK image
W/o border
X
DSK image
SOFT-Y
SOFT-X
DSK image
W/ border
W/ border
Inner half
softness
95
EDGE SOFT
DSK image
W/ border
Outer half
softness
12. Still Store
The switcher can capture and memorize up to 4 still pictures from the switcher output video.
Captured stills can then be used as key source and insertion signals, M/E, P/P or AUX outputs by
assigning the stills to bus buttons (See section 5-2. "How to Assign Sources to Bus buttons" for
assigning stills.). Although the stored stills are cleared when the switcher is powered down, they
can be backed up to the Still memory in the switcher. Up to six still images can be stored to and
loaded from the memory. In addition, stored stills can also be saved to USB flash memory.
12-1. How to Save Stills
(1) Setup the image for program, preview or AUX output to be captured to still memory.
(2) Press the MENU control button and then STILL in the SELECT/KEYPAD block to display the
[STILL STORE] menu
(3) Press the page down button to go to PAGE2.
(4) Turn F1 to select STILL under SOURCE1 ASSIGN. (If SOURCE2 ASSIGN is set to STILL,
change it to other than STILL.)
STILL
SIGNAL
:SOURCE1 ASSIGN :SOURCE2 ASSIGN : 2/6
: =STILL: =MEPGM: =CLDL : =AUX1 :
(5) Turn F2 to select an output signal to be captured at the SIGNAL item in the menu. Available
settings are MEPGM, MEPRV, MECLN, PGM, PREV, CLN, AUX1-AUX8. (See section 6.
"Video Outputs" for details about these signals.)
(6 Press the page up button to go back to PAGE1.
(7) Then press F1 to save the image to STILL1, or F2 to save image to STILL2, and so on. A
beep will sound and the image will be saved to the selected still memory.
STILL
STORE
:STILL1 :STILL2 :STILL3 :STILL4 : 1/6
: >FRAME:>ODD
: >EVEN : >FRAME:
Select a Loading Type When Displaying STILL
Loading type can be selected on PAGE 1. For example, to use an odd field image of STILL1 set
the menu as shown in the figure below. Selectable options are FRAME, ODD (odd field) and
EVEN (even field).
STILL
STORE
:STILL1 :STILL2 :STILL3 :STILL4 : 1/6
: =ODD : >FRAME: >FRAME: >FRAME:
96
12-2. Backing-up Stills
To Save Still Images:
(1) Press the MENU control button and then STILL in the SELECT/KEYPAD block to display the
[STILL] menu
(2) Press page down to go to PAGE 3 ([STILL RESUME] menu).
(3) Turn F1 to select a still to be backed up to the backup memory.
(4) Turn F2 to select SAVE>.
(5) Turn F3 to select a memory number from MEM1 to MEM6.
(6) Press F2 to save the still to the selected memory number. The backed up stills are preserved
after powering off the switcher.
STILL
BACKUP
:STILL : FUNC :MEMORY :RESUME : 3/6
: =STIL1: SAVE> : =MEM1 : =MEM1 :
To Load Saved Images to Still Memory Manually:
(1) Open PAGE3 of the [STILL] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select a still to be loaded from the backup memory.
(3) Turn F2 to select <LOAD.
(4) Turn F3 to select a memory number where the desired still image is to be stored.
(5) Press F2 to load the still from the memory.
STILL
BACKUP
:STILL : FUNC :MEMORY :RESUME : 3/6
: =STIL1: <LOAD : =MEM1 : =MEM1 :
To Load Saved Images to Still Memory Automatically:
(1) Open PAGE3 of the [STILL] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select the desired still.
(3) Turn F4 to select the memory number where the desired still image is to be stored. Then the
still images are automatically loaded at startup.
Turn RESUME to OFF if you do not wish to recall any data to stills at startup.
97
13. Clip Memory
Clip memory allows you to record and play output video. Video and key signals can also be
recorded at the same time. In addition, sequential image files can be transferred from HVS-35GUI
(optional) and saved in the memory as a video clip. The stored clip is played back using a still bus.
It can also be assigned to a bus button through a still bus and used for CG WIPE material.
Another application of this clip memory is a delay line, which continuously records output video and
outputs it from another bus with some delay.
IMPORTANT
The clip memory can store one clip of data with up to 60 frames (same size if video
and key). A clip can be played back on one still bus, but not on two or more stills at the
same time.
13-1. Recording
13-1-1. Recording Video
(1) Press the MENU control button in the SELECT/KEY PAD section, then press the STILL
button to display the [STILL] menu.
(2) Select CLIP under STILL1 (STILL2, STILL3 or STILL4).
(3) Press page down to go to PAGE 2.
(4) Turn F3 to select CL/DL under SOURCE2 ASSIGN.
(5)Turn F4 to select a video signal to record from MEPGM, MECLN, MEPREV, PGM CLN,
PREV, and AUX1 to AUX8. (See section 6. "Video Outputs.")
STILL
SIGNAL
:SOURCE1 ASSIGN :SOURCE2 ASSIGN : 2/6
: =STILL: =MEPGM: =CL/DL: =AUX1 :
(6) Go to PAGE4 in the [STILL] menu. Press F3 while holding down F2 to begin recording.
STILL
CLIP
:
(STOP 1/0 ): VAR
: >STOP : >REC : >PLAY : >1.0
: 4/6
: F=60
(7) Press F1[STOP] or F3[PAUSE] to stop recording. (Recording is automatically stopped
when the memory is full.)
Current frame No.
Clip status
STILL
CLIP
Recorded frames
:
(STOP 40/40): VAR
: >STOP : >REC : >PAUSE: >1.0
: 4/6
: F=60
IMPORTANT
When a new video clip is recorded, the current clip data is cleared and the new clip
data is overwritten into the memory.
98
13-1-2. Recording Video and Key
(1) Open PAGE2 in the [STILL] menu. Turn F3 to select KEY.
(2) Turn F4 to select a key signal to record.
(3) Turn F1 to select CL/DL.
(4) Turn F2 to select a video signal to record.
STILL
SIGNAL
:SOURCE1 ASSIGN :SOURCE2 ASSIGN : 2/6
: =CL/DL: =AUX1 : =KEY : =AUX2 :
If you need to record an input signal such as IN01, assign the signal to an AUX bus before
recording.
(5) Open PAGE 4 in the [STILL] menu.
(6)Press F3 while holding down F2 to begin recording.
(7) Press F1[STOP] or F3[PAUSE] to stop recording.
13-1-3. Recording Modes
Loop Recording
Loop recording automatically loops back to the memory start point when it reaches the 60th
frame and continues recording overwriting frames, until STOP is pressed. If LOOP is set to
ON, both playback and recording are changed to Loop mode.
LOOP can be set to ON on PAGE 6 of the [STILL] menu as shown below.
STILL
: LOOP
CLIP/DLY: =ON
:RECMODE:KEYOUT : DELAY : 6/6
: =STD : =STIL1: =OFF : F=60
Recording Mode
Three modes are available for recording.
Mode
Description
Standard mode.
STD (STANDARD)
In this mode, to start recording, press F3 [PLAY] while holding
down F2 [REC] on PAGE 4.
Direct mode.
DRCT (DIRECT)
In this mode, to begin recording, just press F2 [REC] on PAGE
4.
Stop Motion mode
In this mode, each time F2 {REC] is pressed, a frame is saved to
STP MT (STOP MOTION) memory.
To record another video, clear the memory data before
recording. (See section 13-4 "Clearing Clip Memory".)
The recording mode can be set under RECMODE on PAGE 6 of the [STILL] menu.
STILL
: LOOP
CLIP/DLY: =ON
:RECMODE:KEYOUT : DELAY : 6/6
: =STD : =STIL1: =OFF : F=60
99
13-2. Playing Clips
13-2-1. Ex. 1: Playback on PGM Bus
This example shows how to play recorded video clip on the PGM bus using STILL1. Assume
that STILL 1 is assigned to the bus button 1 .
(1) Open PAGE 1 in the [STILL] menu.
(2) Select CLIP for STILL1.
STILL
STORE
:STILL1 :STILL2 :STILL3 :STILL4 : 1/6
: =CLIP : >ODD : >EVEN : >FRAME:
(3) Press bus button 1 on the PGM bus. (The current frame of the clip will be displayed on
the monitor.)
(4) Go to PAGE 4 in the [STILL] menu.
(5) Press F3 (PLAY) to begin playing. The video clip is played from the current frame.
(Playback will be stopped at the last frame and the screen will be frozen on the last frame
image.)
STILL
CLIP
:
(STOP 1/40 ): VAR
: >STOP : >REC : >PLAY : >1.0
: 4/6
: F=60
13-2-2. Ex. 2: Playback on KEY1
This example shows how to play an animation logo (V+K) as shown at
right on KEY1 using STILL2. It is assumed that logo image files are sent
from HVS-35GUI and stored in STILL2. (See the HVS-35GUI operation
manual for details on how to save still images by transferring them from
HVS-35GUI.)
(1) Open PAGE 1 in the [STILL] menu.
(2) Select CLIP for STILL1.
STILL
STORE
:STILL1 :STILL2 :STILL3 :STILL4 : 1/6
: >FRAME: =CLIP : >EVEN : >FRAME:
(3) Quickly press KEY1 twice in the BUS SELECT section to display the [KEY1 SETUP]
menu. Go to the [KEY1 – INS/SRC] menu.
(4) Turn F1 to set TYPE to BUS.
(5) Turn F2 to select STL2 (FILL) under INSERT.
(6) Turn F3 to select STKY (KEY) under SOURCE.
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =BUS
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: =STIL2: =STKY : =OFF :
To play clips with video and key signals such as V+K-recorded ones or image files with an
alpha channel, another STILL KEY channel is required.
(7) Display KEY1 on the PGM image by pressing KEY1 at the right end of the transition (All
On/Off effects for KEY 1 are available.)
(8) Go to PAGE 6 in the [STILL] menu.
(9) Turn F1 to set LOOP to ON. Turn F1 to select STIL2 under KEYOUT.
100
STILL
: LOOP
CLIP/DLY: =ON
:RECMODE:KEYOUT : DELAY : 6/6
: =STD : =STIL2: =OFF : F=60
(10) Go to PAGE 4 in the [STILL] menu.
(11) Press F3 (PLAY) to play the animation logo. Playback begins the current frame.
13-2-3. Setting Playback IN/OUT Points
IN and OUT points allow you to limit a range for playback as shown in the figure below.

Clip Memory
60 frames
Recorded frames
Range to be played back
IN-point
OUT-point
(1) Open to PAGE 4 in the [STILL] menu.
The image displayed on the monitor will be that of current frame.
Current image
Clip status
STILL
CLIP
Recorded frames
:
(STOP 1/40): VAR
: >STOP : >REC : >PLAY : >1.0
: 4/6
: F=60
(2) Go to PAGE 5 in the [STILL] menu.
Change the CURRENT value to display each image, if needed. Then specify Set IN and
OUT points.
STILL
CLIP
:CURRENT: IN
: =1
: =5
: OUT
: =35
: CLEAR : 5/6
: >OFF : F=60
(3) Go back to PAGE 4. Press F3 (PLAY) to start playing. The playback is played from the IN
point to the OUT point.
101
13-3. Delay Line
The clip memory can be used as a delay buffer. A delay line with the clip memory can delay an
output video up to 30 frames. Delay Line channels can be assigned to a bus button using a still
bus in the same way as clips and used as M/E, P/P and AUX output sources.
IMPORTANT
Clip recording/playback and delay lines cannot be used at the same time.
This example outputs PGM video with 5-frame delay from AUX1 using STILL2.
PGM
PGM video
AUX1 (STILL2)
DELAY
PGM video with 5-frame delay
(1) Quickly press AUX1 to display the [SETUP-OUTPUT-AUX XPT] menu.
(2) Select STL2 under XPT.
(3) Open PAGE1 in the [STILL] menu. Select DELAY for STILL2.
IMPORTANT
Note that CLIP and DELAY cannot be selected at the same time for STILL1 to 4.
(4) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2 in the [STILL] menu.
(5) Set SOURCE2 ASSIGN to CL/DL.
(6) To select a video signal to be delayed, turn F4 to select PGM in this example.
STILL
SIGNAL
:SOURCE1 ASSIGN :SOURCE2 ASSIGN : 2/6
: =STILL: =AUX1 : =CL/DL: =PGM :
(7) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 6 in the [STILL] menu.
(8) To set the delay value, turn F4 to set to 5 and press F4 to confirm the setting.
STILL
: LOOP
CLIP/DLY: =OFF
:RECMODE:KEYOUT : DELAY : 6/6
: =STD : =STIL1: =5
: F=60
IMPORTANT
Note that the delayed image will be distorted if still store or still image transport from
the HVS-35GUI is performed while using the delay line.
If DELAY is set to one or more, the number of recordable frames is reduced even
when a delay line is not used.
102
13-4. Clearing Clip Memory
When recording a new video, the previously stored video data is automatically cleared and a
new recording is started from the top of the memory space. However, when recording in Stop
Motion mode, the previously stored data is still held in the memory and a new recording is
started from the end of the recorded data. Therefore, when recording the same video again or
another video in Stop Motion mode, it is recommended that the memory data be cleared before
recording following the below procedure.
(1) Go to PAGE 5 in the [STILL] menu.
(2) Turn F4 to set to ON.
(3) Press F4 to clear memory data.
STILL
CLIP
:CURRENT: IN
: =1
: =1
: OUT
: =1
: CLEAR : 5/6
: >ON
: F=60
(4) A confirmation message will appear. Press ENTER.
13-5. Video Clip Operation Quick Reference
PAGEs 4 to 6 in the [STILL] menu provide the following functionality.
4/6
Menu item
STOP
F2+F3
Press
F2
Press
F3
Press
F4
Press
F4
Turn
CURRENT
F1
F1
Turn
Press
IN
F2
Turn
OUT
F3
Turn
CLEAR
F4
LOOP
RECMODE
F1
F2
Turn and
Press
Turn
Turn
KEYOUT
F3
Turn
DELAY
F4
Turn and
Press
REC
PLAY/
PAUSE
VAR
5/6
6/6
F1-F4 operation
F1
Press
Description
Stops recording/playback and resets to the IN point.
Pressing F3 while holding down F2 starts recording
in Standard REC mode.
Begins recording in Direct or Stop Motion mode.
Pressing PLAY begins to play the recorded video.
Pressing PAUSE pauses playback/recording, stays
on the current frame and does not go back to
IN-point.
Plays video clip in variable mode.
Sets the playback speed and direction.
Available variable rates are from -2.0 (x 2, backward)
to 2.0 (x 2, forward).
Moves the current frame (displayed image).
Performs the same function as PAUSE.
Specifies the IN point.
The IN point is where the current frame is set back to
when pressing STOP and the start point of loop
playback and CG WIPE.
Specifies the OUT point.
The OUT point is where playback is stopped.
Clears Clip Memory data by selecting ON and then
pressing F4.
Sets looping playback/recording ON or OFF.
Selects REC mode.
Used to select a still bus to output STILL KEY from
STILL1 to 4.
Sets delay line value.
103
14. CG WIPE
CG WIPE allows you to create a sequence in which a CG video, which is displayed using a KEY,
moves in accordance with the motion of a WIPE pattern. Normally patterns used for CG WIPE are
modified suitable to sequences.

Fig. 1: CG WIPE Sequence Diagram with CG, Key and Background
CG start point (IN point)
CG playback time
CG end point (OUT point)
CG
Delay time
KEY
ON
OFF
Transition rate
Delay time
BKGD
Transition start point

Fig. 2: Example of CG WIPE Video
CG (KEY) playback time
BKGD transition
Delay
CG WIPE
104
Transition end point
14-1. CG WIPE Operation Example 1
Ex. 1: CG WIPE using STILL1 and KEY1
In this example, save a CG (V + K) to the clip memory, set STILL1 and STILL KEY to KEY1
signals, display KEY1 on the screen and play the CG through KEY1. Then set CG WIPE to ON,
and perform a background transition. Change IN/OUT points, transition rate and delay values to
adjust the CG WIPE sequence, if needed.
<Setting up KEY>
(1) Press MENU above the keypad, then press STILL to display the [STILL] (1/6) menu. Set
STILL1 to CLIP.
(2) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 6 in the [STILL] menu. Turn F3 to set
KEYOUT to STIL1 (STILL1).
(3) Quickly press KEY1 twice in the BUS SELECT section to display the [KEY1 SETUP]
menu.
(4) Turn F1 to select INS/SRC, then press F1 or the page down button to display the [KEY1INS/SRC] menu.
(5) Set TYPE to BUS, INSERT to STL1 (FILL) and SOURCE to STKY (KEY).
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =BUS
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: =STL1 : =STKY : =OFF :
<Setting up BKGD>
(1) Press BKGD in the M/E transition section.
(2) Press WIPE to set the BKGD transition type to WIPE.
(3) Press PATTERN in the M/E transition section to display the [WIPE PATTERN] menu,
then press F1 to enter a desired pattern number on the keypad. Then press ENTER to
confirm the selection. (Note that MIX, FAM and NAM can also be used for CG WIPE.)
(4) Modify the selected pattern suitable for your CG WIPE sequence.
<Setting up CG WIPE>
(1) Display the [WIPE MODIFY] menu by pressing MENU then WIPE.
(2) Turn F1 to select CG WIPE. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [WIPE
BG-CG WIPE] menu.
(3) Set ENABLE to ON on PAGE 1.
Select STILL under CG. (See A in Fig. 1, p. 104)
Set the CG playback time in frames under DUR. (See C in Fig. 1)
WIPE BG :ENABLE : CG
:
CG WIPE : =ON
: =STILL:
: DUR
:=30
:
:
1/4
(4) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 3 and select KEY1 under SELECT. (See D in
Fig. 1)
(5) Set delay time in frames under DELAY, which indicates the duration from the start of CG
playback (IN point) to the time when KEY1 is displayed on the screen. (See E in Fig. 1)
WIPE BG :SELECT : DELAY :
CG WIPE : =KEY1 : =0
:
:
:
3/4
(6) Go to PAGE 4. Set the delay time in frames under DELAY, which indicates the duration
from the start of CG playback to the transition start time. (See F in Fig. 1)
Set the background transition time under RATE. (See G in Fig. 1)
WIPE BG : DELAY : RATE
CG WIPE : =0
: =30
:FDRLINK:
: =ON
:
105
:
:
4/4
<Performing CG WIPE>
(1) Verify that the background transition type is set to WIPE and the modified WIPE pattern is
properly selected. Use the fader lever or the AUTO button to perform a CG WIPE
sequence.
(2) Adjust time or position using the related menu items, as needed.
14-2. CG WIPE Operation Example 2
Ex. 2: CG WIPE using VDCP1 and KEY1
In this example, CGs (video and key) are stored in a VDCP device. Connect the VDCP device to
the switcher and control the device from the switcher via VDCP. CG clip signals (video and key)
are input to the switcher and used for KEY1 INSERT and SOURCE. Display KEY1 on the screen
and play the CG. Then set CG WIPE to ON, and perform a background transition. Change
IN/OUT points, transition rate and delay values to adjust the CG WIPE sequence, if needed.
<Connection>
Connect the switcher to a VTR in which CG is stored as shown below.
VDCP device
RS-422
HVS-350HS
SDI
2
SDI
1
AC 10 0V - 24 0V 50 /60 Hz IN
AC10 0 - 240 V 50 /60Hz IN
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A CE
B D F
1
2
4
3
I/O
5
6
SDI IN PUT
7
8
PG M
PGM
M/E
P/P
1
3
2
4
5
ED ITOR
LA N
GPI I N
G PI/ TALLY OU T
1
TO O U
HVS-35OU
2
RS-422
REF IN
CPU/GE NLOCK
6
AU X
RE F OUT
GENLOCK
3
4
RS-422
Control VTR using the
VTR/VDCP menu.
75Ω termination
MEMORY
WIPE
MENU
ALARM
3
4
EVENT
SEQUENCE
COPY/SWAP
SEQEDIT
INC
7
COPY
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
DEC
4
5
9
6
INS
POWER1
1
2
USER BUTTON
2D DVE
USER BUTTON
CONTROL
USB MEMORY
PAGE
KEY1
POWER2
F1
F2
1
2
F4
F3
3
4
5
AUX
6
7
8
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
+/-
1
2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
CLEAR
0
RECALL
STOP
COPY
PASTE
DSK4
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
See section 24-1. "Assigning a VTR or VDCP Channel to an RS-422 Port" to assign VDCP1 to
the RS-422 port to which the VTR is connected. Select the VDCP type, referring to section 24-3.
"Selecting the VDCP Type".
<Setting Up KEY>
(1) Quickly press KEY1 twice in the BUS SELECT section to display the [KEY1 SETUP]
menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select INS/SRC, then press F1 or the page down button to display the [KEY1INS/SRC] menu.
(3) Set TYPE to BUS. Select the CG input (FILL) for INSERT and the CG input (KEY) for
SOURCE.
KEY1
: TYPE
INS/SRC : =BUS
:INSERT :SOURCE :INVERT : 1/3
: =IN01 : =IN02 : =OFF :
106
<Setting Up BKGD>
(1) Press BKGD in the M/E transition section.
(2) Press WIPE to set the BKGD transition type to WIPE.
(3) Press PATTERN in the M/E transition section to display the [WIPE PATTERN] menu,
then press F1 to enter a desired pattern number on the keypad. Then press ENTER to
confirm the selection. (Note that MIX, FAM and NAM can also be used for CG WIPE.)
(4) Modify the selected pattern suitable for your CG WIPE sequence.
<Setting UP CG WIPE>
(1) Display the [WIPE MODIFY] menu by pressing MENU then WIPE.
(2) Turn F1 to select CG WIPE. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [WIPE
BG-CG WIPE] menu.
(3) Set ENABLE to ON on PAGE 1. Select VDCP1 under CG.
WIPE BG :ENABLE : CG
:
: DUR
CG WIPE : =ON
: =VDCP1:>CLIP ID:=30
:
:
1/4
:
:>CANCEL:
1/1
(4) Turn F1 to select a CLIP ID and press F1.
CG WIPE :CLIP0001
CLIP ID :CLIP0002
(5) Once the CLIP ID is selected, the menu is automatically returned to the previous page.
Verify that the selected CLIP ID is displayed in the upper line on the menu page.
Set the CG playback time in frames under DUR. (See C in Fig. 1, p. 104)
WIPE BG :ENABLE : CG
:CLIP0001: DUR
CG WIPE : =ON
: =VDCP1:>CLIP ID:=30
:
:
1/4
(6) Go to PAGE 2. Set the start point (IN point) of the CG playback time.
WIPE BG : IN TIME
(STOP/00:00:00:00):
CG WIPE : =00:00:00:00 :>CUE UP :>SETIN:
2/4
(7) Go to PAGE 3. In this example, select KEY1, which is used to display the CG image. (See
D in Fig. 1)
Set the delay time in frames under DELAY, which indicates the duration from the start of
CG playback (IN point) to the time when KEY1 is displayed on the screen. (See E in Fig.
1)
WIPE BG :SELECT : DELAY :
CG WIPE : =KEY1 : =0
:
:
:
3/4
(8) Go to PAGE 4. Set the delay time in frames under DELAY, which indicates the duration
from the start of CG playback to the transition start time. (See F in Fig. 1)
Set the background transition time under RATE. (See G in Fig. 1)
WIPE BG : DELAY : RATE
CG WIPE : =0
: =30
:FDRLINK:
: =OFF :
:
:
4/4
NOTE
See section 24-6 "VDCP Operation" for VTR control from the switcher using VDCP.
107
<Performing CG WIPE>
(1) Verify that the background transition type is set to WIPE and the modified WIPE pattern is
properly selected. Press the AUTO button to perform a CG WIPE sequence.
(2) Adjust time or positioning using the related menu items, as needed.
14-3. Saving CG WIPE Settings
CG WIPE settings can be saved as WIPE pattern modification settings in the Direct Pattern and
in the event memory.
See section 8-8-2. "Direct Pattern Function" and section 17. "Event Memory" for details on how
to save and load settings.
14-4. CG WIPE Menu Quick Reference
(1) Display the [WIPE MODIFY] menu by pressing MENU then WIPE.
(2) Turn F1 to select CG WIPE. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [WIPE BG-CG
WIPE] menu.
WIPE BG :ENABLE : CG
:
CG WIPE : =ON
: =STILL:
: DUR
:=30
:
:
1/4
WIPE BG : IN TIME
(STOP/00:00:00:00):
CG WIPE : =00:00:00:00 :>CUE UP :>SETIN:
2/4
WIPE BG :SELECT : DELAY :
CG WIPE : =KEY1 : =0
:
:
:
3/4
WIPE BG : DELAY : RATE
CG WIPE : =0
: =30
:
:
4/4
:FDRLINK:
: =OFF :
CG WIPE menu settings vary depending on where CG video is played; a still bus, a VTR or
VDCP channel.
Table 1. If STILL is used for CG playback
Menu item
ENABLE
1/4
Default
OFF
Setting
OFF, ON
STILL
STILL
30
0 to 60
KEY1
KEY1 to 2
DELAY
0
0 to 60
DELAY
(*1)
RATE(*1)
0
0 to 60
30
CG
DUR
SELECT
3/4
4/4
FDRLINK
OFF
Description
Sets CG WIPE ON/OFF.
Selects a channel through which a CG is
played back.
Sets the CG playback time.
Selects a KEY through which a CG is
displayed.
Sets delay time from the start of CG playback
(IN point) until the CG is displayed on screen
(KEYER to ON)
Fig. 1
A
C
D
E
0 to 999
Sets delay time from the start of CG playback
(IN point) to the start of transition.
Sets the background transition rate.
G
ON, OFF
Sets if CG WIPE can be performed with the
fader lever.
-
F
(*1) If the sum of the transition delay time and transition rate are longer than the CG playback time, the transition
is forced to end immediately after the CG is finished playing and the image displayed on the monitor is
switched to the PST image.
108
Table 2. If VTR1-4 is used for CG playback
Menu item
ENABLE
1/4
CG
DUR
Setting
OFF, ON
-
VTR1 to 4
30
CUE UP
-
0 to 999
00:00:00:00
to
23:59:59:29
-
SET IN
-
-
KEY1
KEY1 to 2
DELAY
0
0 to 255
DELAY
(*1)
0
0 to 255
RATE(*1)
30
0 to 999
FDRLINK
OFF
OFF
IN TIME
2/4
Default
OFF
SELECT
00:00:00:00
Description
Sets CG WIPE ON/OFF.
Selects a channel through which a CG is
played back.
3/4
4/4
Fig. 1
Sets the CG playback time.
C
Sets the start time of CG playback (IN point).
B
Sets back to the IN point.
-
Sets the current time code to IN TIME.
Selects a KEY through which a CG is
displayed.
Sets delay time from the start of CG playback
(IN point) until a KEY is displayed on screen
(KEYER to ON)
D
E
Sets delay time from the start of CG playback
(IN point) to the start of transition.
F
Sets the background transition rate.
G
Fader link cannot be used.
-
Table 3. If VDCP1-4 is used for CG playback
Menu item
ENABLE
1/4
2/4
Default
OFF
Setting
OFF, ON
-
VDCP1 to 4
CLIP ID
DUR
30
IN TIME
00:00:00:00
CUE UP
-
0 to 999
00:00:00:00
to
99:59:59:29
-
SET IN
-
-
KEY1
KEY1 to 2
DELAY
0
0 to 255
DELAY
(*1)
0
0 to 255
RATE(*1)
30
0 to 999
FDRLINK
OFF
OFF
CG
SELECT
3/4
4/4
Description
Sets CG WIPE ON/OFF.
Selects a channel through which a CG is
played back.
Selects a CLIP ID.
Sets the CG playback time.
Fig. 1
A
C
Sets the start time of CG playback (IN
point).
B
Sets back to the IN point.
-
Sets the current time code to IN TIME.
Selects a KEY through which a CG is
displayed.
Sets delay time from the start of CG
playback (IN point) until a KEY is
displayed on screen (KEYER to ON)
Sets delay time from the start of CG
playback (IN point) to the start of
transition.
Sets the background transition rate.
-
G
Fader link cannot be used.
-
D
E
F
(*1) If the sum of the transition delay time and transition rate are longer than the CG playback time, the transition
is forced to end immediately after the CG is finished playing and the image displayed on the monitor is
switched to the PST image.
109
15. Picture-in-Picture
The PIP (picture-in-picture) feature allows any video (sub-screens) to be displayed on full screen
simultaneously. In the switcher, two sub-screens (PinP1 and PinP2) can be inserted on the M/E
program image. The setup for PIP pictures is the same. This section explains how to setup and
display PinP pictures as shown in the figure below (as an example).
Background
<PinP1>
Position changed.
Size changed.
Rotation effect
PinP1
<PinP2>
Position changed
Size changed
Cropped on the top and bottom
Blue border added
PinP2
M/E PGM image
15-1. Selecting Video for PinP
To Select Video on the Control Panel:
(1) Press the PinP1 (or PinP2) button in the BUS SELECT block.
(2) Press a desired source bus button in the KEY/AUX bus to select video for the PinP.
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
2
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
AUX
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
To Select Video in the Menu:
(1) Press twice quickly the PinP1 (or PinP2) button in the BUS SELECT to display the PinP1
(PinP2) menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select SIGNAL, then press F1 or the page down button to display the [PinP1SIGNAL] menu.
PinP1
SETUP
:>SIGNAL
:>POS/SIZE>BORDER
>SUB EFF >INIT
(3) Turn F1 to select a video for PinP.
PinP1
SIGNAL
:SIGNAL :XPT TRS:ASPECT :
: =IN10 : =0
: =16:9 :
: 1/1
:
When enabling the PinP Crossfade. (Setting XPT TRS to other than 0), just selecting the
next image in the KEY/AUX bus fades to switch the image of PinP. (See section 15-2-2.
"PinP Image Crossfade Transition.")
In HD mode, the aspect ratio of PinP can be selected between 16:9 and 4:3.
110
15-2. Inserting PinP Video
Press the PinP1 AUTO (or PinP2 AUTO) button or the ON-AIR button at the right end of in the
Transition block to insert the PinP on the M/E program image.
TRANSITION
RATE
PinP1
P IN P
1
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
FADER LIMIT
NEXT TRANSITION
M/E PGM image
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
15-2-1. IN/OUT Effects for PinP
The PinP1 and PinP2 can be inserted to the screen or removed from the screen by using the
eight DVE effects such as Slide In or Slide Out. To use DVE IN/OUT effects, change the ON
AIR button function in the menu.
TRANSITION
RATE
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
ON AIR button
OFF
CUT (default)
Scaler
Slide In/Out
Wipe In/Out
P IN P
1
P IN P
2
FADER LIMIT
AUTO button
OFF
MIX (default)
CUT (Briefly press)
MIX (Press and hold)
DVE
KEY 1
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
How to Select a Function for the PinP ON AIR and PinP AUTO buttons
The function settings for the ON AIR buttons and the AUTO buttons are made on PAGE 4 of
the [TRANS] menu. See section 8-9. "IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK" for details.
TRANS
:SELECT : USER TRANS
USER/ADV: =PinP1: =CUT
:ADV CTL: 4/6
: =AUTO :
Transition Rate Setting
The transition time for MIX and other transitions are set in frames under the RATE item on
PAGE2 of the [TRANS].
TRANS
: KEY1
RATE-M/E: =30
: KEY2
: =30
: PinP1 : PinP2 : 2/6
: =30
: =30
:
111
15-2-2. PinP Image Crossfade Transition
When a PinP is displayed on the M/E program screen, only an image can be switched just
selecting the next image in the KEY/AUX bus. The PinP image will fade out and new PinP
image will fade onto the screen. The following example shows how to setup and perform the
Crossfade Transition of PinP1.
Setting Rate (Time) for Crossfade Transition
(1) Quickly press the PinP 1 button in the BUS SELECT block to display the[PinP1] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select SIGNAL, then press F1 or the page down button to display the
[PinP1-SIGNAL] menu.
(3) Turn F2 to set the transition rate other than 0. Setting range is 0 to 999 in frames.
PinP1
SIGNAL
:SIGNAL :XPT TRS:ASPECT :
: =IN10 : =30
:16:9
:
: 1/1
:
Performing Crossfade Transition of PinP1
(1) Press PinP 1 in the BUS SELECT block.
(2) Press a desired bus button (video) on the KEY/AUX bus.
PinP1
PinP1
PinP1
The PinP1 image fades out and a new PinP1 image fades in within frames set at XPT TRS.
Note that the transition rate for the AUTO or other transitions using the PinP AUTO button
or the PinP ON AIR button (see the previous page) is different from that of PinP Image
Crossfade Transitions. These two transition rates can be individually set in the menu.
AUTO (MIX) Transitions for PinP1
PinP1
PinP1
The PinP1 fades out and removed from the screen within frames set in the [TRANS] menu.
PinP1
PinP1
The PinP1 fades in and displayed on the screen within frames set in the [TRANS] menu.
112
15-2-3. Changing Position and Size of PinP
(1) Press twice quickly PinP1 in the BUS SELECT to display the [PinP1-SEUP] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select POS/SIZE, then press F1 or the page down button to display the [PinP1POS/SIZE] menu.
PinP1
SETUP
:>SIGNAL
:>POS/SIZE>BORDER
>SUB EFF >INIT
(3) Turn F3 to make PinP1 a little bit larger.
(4) Use F1 and F2 to move PinP1 to the top left-hand side.
PinP1
:
POSITION
POS/SIZE:X=-200 Y=150
: SIZE
: =500
:
:
: 1/5
:
PinP1
PinP1
PinP1
Position changed
Size changed
The center of the screen is set as origin (0,0) in the coordinates. The position of PinP is
specified by the center of the PinP image. You can also change the aspect ratio for the
PinP image to 4:3 in the menu when in HD mode.
POSITION /SIZE Setting Using Joystick
To change position and size together for PinP using the joystick, open the [PinP1-POS/SIZE]
(1/5) menu, press MENU in the Joystick section and then use the joystick in the following
way.
POSITION X:
POSITION Y
SIZE:
Moves the joystick horizontally.
Moves the joystick vertically
Twist the joystick clockwise or counter-clockwise.)
See section 4-2-4. "Changing Settings or Values Using the Joystick" for how to use the
joystick.
15-2-4. Rotating PinP
In addition to changing the PinP position, a rotation effect can be added to the PinP. The
rotation effects for PinP are almost the same as those of KEY and DSK. See the section 11-5 .
"Rotation" for details.
(1) Open the [PinP1-POS/SIZE-ROT] (3/5) menu, referring to the previous section.
(2) Turn F1 clockwise a little to slightly rotate the PinP image clockwise.
PinP1
:
LOCAL ROTATION
ROTATION: X=100
Y=0
Z=0
113
:
:
: 3/5
:
PinP1
PinP1
Rotation Effect added
The center of rotation is placed on the center of the PinP image at the factory default
setting. (CENTER POSITION is set to (0, 0, 0))
The joystick is useful for rotation setting. See section 4-2-4. "Changing Settings or Values
Using the Joystick" for how to use the joystick.
15-2-5. Crop and Border
Using the procedure just used for PiP1, Insert PinP2 to the PGM image, move PinP2 to a
desired position and change PinP2 size. The example below shows how to crop PinP and
add a border.
(1) Open the [PinP2-POS/SIZE-CROP] (5/5) menu, referring to section 15-2-3.
(2) Use F1 and F2 to crop PinP2 on the top and bottom.
PinP2
CROP
: TOP
:BOTTOM : LEFT
: =30.0 : =20.0 : =0.0
: RIGHT : 5/5
: =0.0 :
(3) Press the page down button to return to the [PinP2 - SETUP] menu.
(4) Turn F1 to select BORDER, then press F1 or the page down button to display the [PinP2BORDER] menu.
(5) To use an inside border, set INSIDE X and Y to specify the border width.
To use an outside border, set OUTSIDE X and Y to specify the border width.
PinP2
BORDER
:
INSIDE
:X=0
Y=0
:
OUTSIDE
:X=0
Y=0
: 1/3
:
(6) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 3.
(7) Turn F4 to select BLUE for the border color, and then press F4 to confirm the setting.
PinP2
:
BORDER COLOR
BDR COL :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
PinP1
:RECALL : 3/3
: >BLUE :
PinP1
PinP2
Rotation effect added
PinP1
PinP2
Cropped on the top and bottom
114
PinP2
Border added
16. Multiviewer
The multiviewer allows users to monitor multiple images such as the video sources input to the
switcher and internally generated or combined images on the same screen. The HVS-350HS
provides two multiviewer outputs, each of them has three types of split displays: quad, 10 and 16
way. They can display different videos in a different pattern. The video titles and the on-air tally
information can also be displayed. Note that the multiviewer outputs are delayed by one frame
relative to the program output.
The setup procedure for the multiviewer is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assign a multiviewer video to an AUX output bus
Select a split-screen type.
Select video for each split area.
Add titles, on-air tally and frame borders.
16-1. Assigning the Multiviewer to an AUX Bus
The multiviewer function can be assigned to any AUX bus. There are two ways to select an AUX
bus: using the buttons in the BUS SELECT block or using the menus. In the following example
AUX2 is selected to be the Multiviewer1 output.
Using the Buttons in the BUS SELECT
(1) Press the AUX2 button in the BUS SELECT block.
(2) Press the MV1 button in the KEY/AUX block.
1
KEYER
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
2
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
AUX
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Using the Menu
(1) Press twice quickly the AUX2 button in the BUS SELECT block.
(2) The [SETUP-OUTPUT-AUX XPT] menu opens. Turn F2 to select MV1.
OUTPUT :SELECT : XPT
AUX XPT : =AUX2 : =MV1
: CTRL
: =ON
115
: ANCI : 1/2
: =OFF :
16-2. Selecting the Split-screen Type
The type of split-screen to be used can be selected in the [SETUP-OUTPUT-MV1] menu. There
are three different types.
(1) Quickly press twice the MV1 button in the KEY/AUX block to display the [SETUP- OUTPUTMV1] menu.
OUTPUT
MV1
: DIV
: =4
:SCREEN :SIGNAL : CHARA : 1/4
: =1
: =IN01 : = OFF :
(2) Turn F1 to select the type from 4,10 or 16-way. (See the split screen images with channel
numbers below.)
01
02
03
04
01
02
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
03
04
05
06
09
10
11
12
07
08
09
10
13
14
15
16
16-3. Selecting Video for Each Split Area
This section shows how to select a video source for each split area in the multiviewer screen.
This is done in the [SETUP-OUTPUT-MV1] menu.
(1) Quickly press twice the MV1 button in the KEY/AUX block to display the [SETUP- OUTPUTMV1] menu.
OUTPUT
MV1
: DIV
: =4
:SCREEN :SIGNAL : CHARA : 1/4
: =1
: =IN01 : = OFF :
(2) Turn F2 to select a channel number (split area) of the split screen under the SCREEN item.
(3) Turn F3 to select video displayed on the split area. The following video sources are
selectable.
Input images
Internal bus images
IN01 - IN24
BLK(BLACK), STL1 - STL4, MATT1, MATT2, CLBR(Color bar),
M/E PGM, M/E PREV, M/E CLN,
PGM, PREV, CLN, AUX1 - AUX8
(4) Repeat (2) and (3) to assign images to the multiviewer channels.
116
16-4. Adding Titles, On-air Tally and Frame Border
You can set a title to each image and display the on-air tally information. A color border can also
be applied to the split-screen to emphasize channel areas.
16-4-1. Titles
(1) Quickly press twice the MV1 button in the KEY/AUX block to display the [SETUPOUTPUT- MV1] menu.
(2) Turn F2 to select a channel number (split area) of the split screen under the SCREEN
item.
OUTPUT
MV1
: DIV
: =4
:SCREEN :SIGNAL : CHARA : 1/4
: =1
: =IN01 : =OFF :
(3) Turn F4 to select the type of title display under the CHARA item. (See the table below.)
The texts used for titles are the short name and the long name set in the [SETUP-INPUTRENAME] menu. (See section 5-1. "How to Give Name to Sources.")
CHARA setting
OFF
SHORT
LONG
Description
Displays no title.
Displays a title within 4 characters.
Displays a title within 8 characters.
(4) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2. The settings in this page are shared among
all split windows.
OUTPUT :TALLY : TITLE AREA/POSITION : 2/4
MV1 TITL: =FRAME: =WIDE :X=MID
Y=LOW :
(5) Turn F2 to select the width of the title background.
Item
Description
WIDE
Spreads the title background to the width of the screen.
NORMAL(default)
Adjusts the width of the title background to fit the title.
OFF
Title Backgrounds are not displayed.
(6) Turning F3 selects the horizontal title position and turning F4 selects the vertical title
position respectively from three options.
Item
Description
Selects the horizontal title position from LEFT, MID (middle) or RIGHT.
TITLE AREA X
POSITION
Y
Selects the vertical title position from HIGH, MID (middle) or LOW.
Setting Example
In this setting example the multiviewer is set as shown on the right hand side
with the multiviewer settings in the table below
(Names are default settings.)
Channel
number
1
2
3
4
SIGNAL
setting
IN01
IN02
PGM
PREV
CHARA
setting
OFF
SHORT
LONG
LONG
WIDE/NORMAL
selection
IN02
NORMAL
PREVIEW
117
PROGRAM
16-4-2. On-air Tally
The tally indicates which video is currently On-air (output from the program) and which video
is set to be the next output. The multiviewers have two types of tally indicators: Frame and
Marker. You can use either one or both at a time.
(1) Quickly press twice the MV1 button in the KEY/AUX block to display the [SETUPOUTPUT- MV1] menu.
(2) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2. Select a desired tally indication at the
TALLY item. (This is common setting for all split windows.)
OUTPUT :TALLY : TITLE AREA/POSITION : 2/4
MV1 TLLY: =BOTH : =WIDE :X=MID
Y=LOW :
Setting Example
TALLY setting
OFF
MARKER
FRAME
BOTH
Green:
Next indication
Display
None
Marker indicator
Frame indicator
Both marker and frame
indicators
Red:
On-air indication
IN02
PREVIEW
PROGRAM
Here, we assume that IN02 is displayed in the P/P PGM and .IN01 is selected on the P/P PST
bus. The tally frame and marker are displayed on the screen because TALLY is set to BOTH.
IMPORTANT
The on-air tally indication (RED and GREEN) is linked to the tally color (TLY COL)
setting. For example, the tally color for PGM is set to RED and the tally color for PST is
set to NONE, green tally (next indication) is not displayed on the screen. (See section
23-2-1. "Tally Color Setting."
16-4-3. Tally Link
Tallies displayed on the multiviewer outputs are derived from the HVS-350HS bus tally color
settings. The switcher can also display tallies derived from other signal tallies. This function is
called Tally Link. For example, an operation such as shown below is possible with this
function.
Ex.) Linking IN05 signal tallies to IN01 signal tallies
-Inputs a VTR video without timecode to IN01.
-Inputs the same VTR video but with timecode to IN01.
-Displays both IN01 and IN05 on MV1.
-Links IN05 tallies to IN01 tallies.
If the conditions described above are met,
RED (GREEN) tallies are indicated on IN05
when RED (GREEN) tallies are shown on
IN01.
Red:
Linked to IN01
Red:
On-air indication
VTR (w/ TC)
VTR (w/o TC)
IN05
IN01
VTR (w/o TC)
PGM
118
These conditions should be set in the menu as shown below.
(1) Go to the [SETUP-OUTPUT-MV1] menu PAGE4.
(2) Turn F1 to set the destination signal of tally link. Select IN05 in this example.
(3) Turn F2 to set the source signal of tally link. Select IN01 in this example.
The link source and destination settings are shared between MV1 and MV2.
(4) Turn F4 to select ON, then press F4.
The link mode ON/OFF can be set for MV1 and MV2 respectively.
OUTPUT : TALLY LINK(MV1=MV2)
MV1 TLLY:SEL=IN05 LINK=IN01
:LINK EN: 4/4
: >ON
:
16-4-4. Frame Border
A frame border can also be applied to the split-screen to emphasize channel areas.
(1) Quickly press twice the MV1 button in the KEY/AUX block to display the [SETUPOUTPUT- MV1] menu.
(2) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 3.
(3) Turn F4 to select a border color among eight standard colors. Press F4 to apply the
selected color. If you want to adjust the selected color or set the color by entering HSL
values, turn F1, F2 and F3 to adjust values or press F1, F2 and F3, enter a value in the
Keypad and then press ENTER in the Keypad.
OUTPUT :
BORDER COLOR
MV1 BDR :S=0.0
L=100.0 H=0.0
119
:RECALL : 3/4
: >WHITE:
17. Event Memory
The switcher can save control panel setup statuses as data for recall when needed. This function is
called Event Memory. This Event Memory function enables quick recall of the same setting statuses
that were previously saved. The event memory data can accurately reproduce statuses of KEY,
DSK and PinP and button assignments for P/P, M/E and KEY/AUX buses including a re-entry of
M/E PGM on the control panel, because the event memory data holds all panel information.
The keypad is used to save and recall events. The event memory data can be saved and recalled
from USB flash memories. For details, see section 19 "File Operations."
In addition to this, the RATE item in the EVENT menu allows users to perform transitions by loading
events.
17-1. Storing Events
The event memory can store the setting status of the control panel. Up to 100 events (10
memory pages, with10 events per page) can be stored in memory.
MEMORY
To Store an Event (basic):
(1) Press the EVENT memory button.
(2) Press STORE (ENTER) on the Keypad.
(3) Press a number button (0-9) on the Keypad
to store the event.
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
Storing Events (detailed):
(1) Press the EVENT memory button.
The [EVENT MEMORY] menu is displayed
and the Keypad switches to EVENT mode.
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
PLAY
CUT
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
CLEAR
0
RECALL
STOP
COPY
DEL
PASTE
9
6
INS
P IN P2
3
ADD
DSK4
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
(2) Turn F1 to select an event page in the [EVENT MEMORY] menu. PAGE 0 has Event 0-9
(event memories), PAGE 1 has Event 10-19, and so on. The last page, PAGE 9 has Event
90-99.
EVENT : PAGE
MEMORY : =0
:DIRECT :PAGECLR:RATE
: =OFF : =OFF : =OFF
: 1/3
: L=0
(3) Press STORE (ENTER) on the Keypad. The STORE button lights up green and the [EVENT
STORE] menu will then be displayed.
(4) The [EVENT STORE] and [EVENT MEMORY] menus allow users to select the data to be
saved in the event. (See the next page for details.)
(5) Press a number button (0-9) on the Keypad to store the event.
If an Event is Already Saved to a Button:
When STORE is pressed, the light of the buttons (0 to 9) are off if no events are saved. The
number buttons light up if events are saved. If you press a button where an event is already
saved, it flashes. Pressing the button again overwrites the event. If you press another button
that has no event already saved before overwriting, the event will be saved to that button.
If you cannot overwrite data, change OVER WR to ENABL (ENABLE) in the [EVENTRECALL] menu. (See section 17-3. "Overwrite Protection".)
Data not saved in the event memory
All SETUP menu settings
All FILE menu settings
STILL images
USER TRANS and ADV CTRL settings in the TRANS menu
120
Detailed Data Selection for Saving Events
Data saved to the event can be selected under the [EVENT-MEMORY] menu or [EVENTSTORE] menu as shown below.
EVENT : PAGE
MEMORY : =0
:DIRECT :PAGECLR:RATE
: =OFF : =OFF : =OFF
: 1/3
: L=0
EVENT :AUX BUS:DSK ASG:SEQ RCL:M/E BUS: 2/3
MEMORY : =OFF : =OFF : =OFF : =ALL : L=0
EVENT :CG WIPE:
MEMORY : =OFF :
: 3/3
: L=0
EVENT
STORE
:SELECT :XPT
: =ALL : =ON
EVENT
STORE
:AUX SEL:AUX RCL:DSK ASG:SEQ RCL: 2/3
: =AUX1 : =OFF : =OFF : =OFF :P.00
EVENT
STORE
:CG WIPE:
: =OFF :

[EVENT MEMORY] menu
Item
Setting
*RATE
0-999
AUX BUS ON, OFF
*DSK ASG ON, OFF
*SEQ RCL ON, OFF
*CG WIPE ON, OFF
:DATA
: =ON
:RATE
: =OFF
: 1/3
:P.00
: 3/3
:P.00
Description
See section 17-2-3. "Transitions Using Event Recall."
Setting to ON stores all AUX bus data. To set the AUX bus
data individually, set in the [EVENT STORE] menu.
Setting to ON stores the output bus where DSK images
appear. (See section 10-9. Where DSKs Appear".)
Setting to ON stores the current sequence data.
Setting to ON stores the current CG WIPE data.
* Indicates the same item in both menus.

[EVENT STORE] menu
Item
Setting
SELECT
ALL,
ME BG,
PP BG,
KEY1-KEY2,
PinP1-PinP2,
DSK1-DSK4
XPT
ON, OFF
DATA
ON, OFF
*RATE
0-999
AUX SEL
AUX1-AUX8
AUX RCL ON, OFF
*DSK ASG ON, OFF
*SEQ RCL ON, OFF
*CG WIPE ON, OFF
Description
Select ALL or a bus at SELECT.
Setting DATA to ON stores all data for the bus (including
signal selection, transition rate, transition type settings, etc.).
Setting only XPT to ON stores only the signal selection data.
Normally set to ALL for SELECT and ON for DATA, so that
information for all buses is saved to the event.
Set DATA to OFF if any data for the bus is not needed.
The data can be further selected when recalling events.
See section 17-2-3. "Transitions Using Event Recall."
Select an AUX bus at AUX SEL.
Setting AUX RCL to ON stores the information for the bus.
Setting to ON stores the output bus where DSK images
appear. (See section 10-9. Where DSKs Appear".)
Setting to ON stores the current sequence data.
Setting to ON stores the current CG WIPE data.
* Indicates the same item in both menus.
121
IMPORTANT
User Default Settings for the [EVENT STORE] menu
The same items (RATE, DSK ASG and DEQ RCL) in the [EVENT MEMORY] menu
and [EVENT STORE] menu link together. When one is changed in the [EVENT
MEMORY] menu, it is also changed in the [EVENT STORE] menu and becomes the
default setting in the [EVENT STORE] menu, but not vice versa.
17-2. Recalling Events
17-2-1. DIRECT Mode
Events can most quickly be recalled in Direct Operation mode. However, users cannot select
the loaded data at recalling events. To use Direct Operation mode, set DIRECT to ON in the
menu before recalling events.
(1) Press the EVENT memory button.
(2) Turn F1 to select an event page in the [EVENT MEMORY] menu.
EVENT : PAGE
MEMORY : =0
:DIRECT :PAGECLR:RATE
: =OFF : >CRNT : =OFF
: 1/3
: L=0
Last Recall No.
(3) Press the number button where the
needed data is to be stored. The selected
event will be applied to the panel.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
* Users can select the data to be recalled from
PAGE2 in the [EVENT MEMORY] menu.
See the previous page.
To Set DIRECT to ON:
When pressing the EVENT memory button,
the [EVENT MEMORY] menu is automatically
displayed.
Turn F2 to set DIRECT to ON.
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
9
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
6
INS
P IN P2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
CLEAR
STOP
COPY
PASTE
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
EVENT : PAGE
MEMORY : =0
:DIRECT :PAGECLR: RATE
: =ON
: >CRNT : =OFF
: 1/3
: L=0
The number of the currently opened event page is displayed at bottom right in the [EVENT
RECALL] menu.
122
17-2-2. Using the RECALL Button
To Recall Events (fastest method):
(1) Press the EVENT memory button.
(2) Press the number button where
the needed data is to be stored.
(3) Press the RECALL button.
The selected event will then be
applied to the panel.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
9
6
INS
P IN P2
To Recall Events (detailed):
+/1
2
3
(1) Press the EVENT memory button.
The [EVENT MEMORY] menu is
0
displayed and the Keypad changed
to Event mode.
SELECT / KEYPAD
(2) Turn F1 to select an event page in
the [EVENT MEMORY] menu.
(3) Press the number button where the needed data is to be stored. The [EVENT RECALL]
menu is displayed and the saved data in the event is set on the [EVENT RECALL] menu.
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
RECALL
CLEAR
STOP
COPY
PASTE
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
EVENT :SELECT :XPT
RECALL : =ALL : =ON
:DATA
: =ON
: RATE
: =OFF
: 1/3
:P.00
Page No.
(4) This time users can select to recall all saved data or specific data within the event by
setting SELECT, XPT and DATA items on PAGE 1. (PAGE 2 has the same items for data
selection as those on PAGE 2 of the [EVENT STORE] menu. See section 17-1. "Storing
Events" for details.)
For example, to recall stored event data except the P/P background information, one must
do the following:
EVENT :SELECT :XPT
RECALL : =PP BG: =OFF
:DATA
: =OFF
: RATE
: =OFF
: 1/3
:P.00
(5) Press the RECALL button. The [EVENT RECALL] menu is displayed.
The number of the last recalled event is displayed at bottom right in the [EVENT MEMORY]
menu. This is useful when checking which event was recalled last.
123
17-2-3. Transitions Using Event Recall
The RATE item in the EVENT menu allows users to set the duration time (transition rate) for
loading events. With this duration time, transition sequences of two steps (statuses before
and after recalling events) can be performed. The two images (keyframes) before and after
recalling events that appear on the M/E or P/P program screen are automatically interpolated
to create a smooth transition in the same way as the Sequence feature. The RATE setting is
made when events are stored. It can also be set and changed when events are recalled.
P/P PGM image
P/P PGM image
Duration time set at RATE
Loading starts
Loading is complete

Operation Example
The following operation example shows an event that is saved to EVENT No.10 with 150
frames for RATE and it is recalled while changing RATE to 30 frames.
Saving the Event
(1) Press the EVENT memory button to display the [EVENT MEMORY] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select PAGE1 (Events No.10-19).
EVENT : PAGE
MEMORY : =1
:DIRECT :PAGECLR:RATE
: =ON
: >CRNT : =OFF
: 1/3
: L=0
If setting RATE to 150 in the [EVENT MEMORY] menu, the initial value for RATE in the
[EVENT STORE] menu will always be 150 (the default value).
(3) Press STORE to display the [EVENT STORE] menu.
(4) Press F4, enter 150 in the Keypad then press ENTER.
EVENT
STORE
:SELECT :XPT
: =ALL : =ON
:DATA
: =ON
: RATE
: =150
: 1/3
:P.01
(5) Press 0 in the Keypad to save the current panel status to Event No.10.
Loading the Event
(1) Press the EVENT memory button to display the [EVENT MEMORY] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select PAGE1 (Event Nos.10-19).
(3) Press 0 in the Keypad to recall Event No.10. The [EVENT RECALL] menu will be
displayed.
(4) Turn F4 to change the RATE value from 150 to 30.
EVENT :SELECT :XPT
RECALL : =BKGD : =ON
:DATA
: =ON
: RATE
: =30
: 1/3
:P.01
(5) Press RECALL. The data saved in Event No.10 is recalled to the control panel, taking 30
frames.
124
17-3. Overwrite Protection
(1) Press the EVENT memory button.
(2) Press the number button where the needed data is stored. The button will start flashing when
pressed. The [EVENT RECALL] menu will be automatically displayed.
(3) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 3.
(4) Turn F2 to change OVER WR to DISBL(disable) to set the write protection on the memory
button.
EVENT :CG WIPE:OVER WR:DELETE :
RECALL : =OFF : =DISBL: >OFF :
: 3/3
:P.01
17-4. Deleting Events
To Delete Data for an Event:
(1) Press the EVENT memory button.
(2) Press the number button from which data is to be deleted. The button will begin flashing
when pressed.
(3) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 3.
(4) Turn F3 to set DELETE to ON, then press F3. The data saved in the event memory button
will then be cleared.
EVENT :CG WIPE:OVER WR:DELETE :
RECALL : =OFF : =ENABL: >ON
:
: 3/3
:P.01
To Delete Data for an Event Page:
(1) Press the EVENT memory button.The [EVENT MEMORY] menu is displayed.
(2) Turn F1 to select an event page to be deleted.
(3) Turn F3 to set PAGECLR to CRNT (current), then press F3. The data saved in the event
page will then be cleared.
EVENT : PAGE
MEMORY : =1
:DIRECT :PAGECLR:RATE
: =OFF : =CRNT : =0FF
: 1/3
:L=10
To Delete All Event Data :
(1) Press the EVENT memory button.The [EVENT MEMORY] menu is displayed.
(2) Set PAGECLR to ALL, and press F3. All event data is cleared.
EVENT : PAGE
MEMORY : =0
:DIRECT :PAGECLR:RATE
: =OFF : =ALL : =0FF
125
: 1/3
:L=10
17-5. Setting the User Default Menu when Storing an Event
The [EVENT STORE] menu appears as shown below in the factory default setting when storing
events.
EVENT
STORE
:SELECT :XPT
: =ALL : =ON
:DATA
: =ON
:RATE
: =OFF
: 1/3
:P.00
EVENT
STORE
:AUX SEL:AUX RCL:DSK ASG:SEQ RCL: 2/3
: =AUX1 : =OFF : =OFF : =OFF :P.00
EVENT
STORE
:CG WIPE:
: =OFF :
: 3/3
:P.00
Changing the default setting of the [EVENT STORE] menu is possible. To do this, proceed as
follows.
(1) Press the EVENT memory button.The [EVENT MEMORY] menu is displayed.
(2) Change the following menu items to the desired settings, which become the default settings
in the [EVENT MEMORY] menu. (Only highlighted items are changeable.)
EVENT : PAGE
MEMORY : =0
:DIRECT :PAGECLR:RATE
: =OFF : =OFF : =OFF
: 1/3
: L=0
EVENT :AUX BUS:DSK ASG:SEQ RCL:M/E BUS: 2/3
MEMORY : =OFF : =OFF : =OFF : =ALL : L=0
EVENT :CG WIPE:
MEMORY : =OFF :
: 3/3
: L=0
17-6. Loading an Event at Start-up
The settings made for the BKGD, KEY, DSK and PinP buses on the control panel are cleared
when powering off the switcher. You can, however, recall the desired panel setup whenever the
switcher starts by setting in the [SETUP-SYSTEM-INIT] menu as shown in the procedure below.
(1) Press the MENU control button.
(2) Press the SETUP button to display the SETUP menu's top page.
(3) Turn F1 to select SYSTEM and then press F1.
SETUP
MENU
:>SYSTEM >INPUT
>OUTPUT >PANEL
:>GPI/TLY >FUNCTION>EXT I/F >STATUS
(4) The [SETUP - SYSTEM] menu as shown below appears. Turn F1 to select INIT and then
press F1 to display the [SETUP-SYSTEM-INIT] menu.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
SYSTEM
INIT
: INIT
: >CURRENT
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
: LOAD :
: =LAST :
126
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
: 1/1
:
(5) Turn F3 to select the desired panel setup in the table below
LOAD setting
OFF
LAST
0-99
Description
The switcher starts with the factory default settings.
The switcher starts with the last loaded event.
Note that to enable the Last Load function, an event must be
loaded after setting to LAST.
The switcher starts with a selected event (0-99) loaded.
127
18. Sequence Operation
A sequence is a function for joining individual images into a sequential video and recalling it for
playback in a single operation. Each sequence is composed of video frames called steps. To make
sequences, create an initial step and save it to the sequence working memory, then create the next
step and to save to the working memory and so on. Although the sequence data saved in the
working memory is cleared and lost when the switcher is powered off, it can be kept and recalled by
storing it to sequence memory. Up to 10 sequences of 80 steps at most for each can be saved to
sequence memory.
Note that the sequence data is not a sequential video itself but a series of states on the control
panel as of when the images were saved as steps. Therefore, the images that are displayed on the
monitor during sequence playback may be different from those that appeared when the sequence
was stored, if the input videos were different. However, the switch timings, key, picture-in-picture
display, 3D and other effects will remain the same.
The flow diagram below shows the basic series of sequence operations.
Working Memory
Creating and Editing
a Sequence
Clearing Memory
Creating Steps
Adding Steps
Deleting Steps
Overwriting Steps
Store
Recall
Sequence Memory 0 (80 steps)
Sequence Memory 1 (80 steps)
Sequence Memory 2 (80 steps)
Sequence Memory 3 (80 steps)
Sequence Memory 4 (80 steps)
Sequence Memory 5 (80 steps)
Sequence Memory 6 (80 steps)
Sequence Memory 7 (80 steps)
Sequence Memory 8 (80 steps)
Sequence Memory 9 (80 steps)
Sequence Playback
Sequence Memory Operation
Overwrite Protection
Deleting Memory Data
Playback Setting
Playback
Functions and Information Available for Sequence Control
XPT information for each bus (except AUX)
Bus Matte color information
Transition type settings for each bus
Setting information for KEY, DSK and PinP
Transition direction settings
Pattern modify settings
PGM output bus information
Pattern number settings of bus assignments
NEXT TRANSITION settings
Functions and Information Not Available for Sequence Control
Event memory
Direct patterns
Still Store
SETUP menu settings
File operation
User Transitions of KEY, DSK and PinP
Output destination of DSK
128
18-1. Sequence Operation Examples
18-1-1. Creating New Sequences
The operation example in this section shows how to create a new sequence in three steps
and store it to "Sequence Memory 0."
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
Creating a Sequence with the Keypad
(1) Press SEQ EDIT to change the Keypad to SEQ EDIT
mode.
(2) Press 9 (NEW), and then press ENTER to clear the
working memory.
(3) Create "Video A." Press 3 (ADD) to save "VIDEO A"
(the current control panel status) to Step1.
(4) Create "Video B." Press 3 (ADD).
(5) Create "Video C." Press 3 (ADD).
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
9
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
6
INS
P IN P2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
CLEAR
STOP
COPY
PASTE
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
Pressing the SEQ EDIT button changes the Keypad to SEQ EDIT mode and enables the
following function buttons: NEW, INS, ADD, OVWR(OVERWRITE), DEL, PASTE, CUT,
COPY, INC, DEC, PLAY and STOP (See section 18-2-2. "SEQ EDIT Mode.")
Storing the Sequence
(1) Press the SEQUENCE memory button above the numeric keypad.
(2) Press STORE. The [SEQUENCE - STORE] menu appears and displays the sequence
information in the working memory.
SEQUENCE:TOTAL STEP->3
STORE
:TOTAL TIME->60
TOTAL STEP:
TOTAL TIME:
LOOP:
DIR:
:LOOP->OFF
:DIR ->NOR
Number of steps in the sequence
Total playback time of the sequence
(in frames)
Loop play On or Off
Playback direction of the sequence
(NOR: Normal, REV: Reverse)
(3) Press 0 . The sequence data in the working memory
is stored to "Sequence Memory 0."
: 1/1
:
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
9
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
6
INS
P IN P2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
CLEAR
STOP
COPY
PASTE
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
If a Sequence Memory has stored data:
When storing a sequence, the number buttons on the Keypad (0 to 9) are changed to the
memory buttons that turn off if they have no data and turn on if they have stored data. To
store the current setup sequence to the button that has sequence data, press the memory
button (flashing) and then press the button. If another memory button is pressed before
pressing the button a second time, the sequence is saved to the former button.
If sequence data cannot be saved to the stored memory button, the sequence memory is
overwrite-protected. In such case, clear the overwrite protection of the sequence memory.
(See section 18-3-1.)
129
18-1-2. Playing Back Sequences
The operation example in this section shows how to recall and play the sequence that was
created in the previous section and saved to "Sequence Memory 0."
MEMORY
Recalling the Sequence
(1) Press SEQUENCE to change the Keypad to SEQUENCE
mode.
(2) Press 0 to select "Sequence Memory 0."
(3) Press RECALL to recall the data that was stored in
"Sequence Memory 0" to the working memory.
:LOOP->OFF
:DIR ->NOR
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
8
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
Pressing the SEQUENCE memory button changes the
Keypad to SEQUENCE memory mode and enables the
following memory and function buttons: memory buttons
0-9 and STORE, RECALL, INC, DEC, PLAY and STOP.
SEQUENCE:TOTAL STEP->3
RECALL :TOTAL TIME->60
WIPE
CONTROL
1
2
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
COPY
PASTE
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
: 1/2
:
Looping Playback
The looping playback is possible in the following way.
(1) Press SEQ EDIT to display the [SEQ EDIT] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to set LOOP to ON.
(3) Pressing STOP(CLEAR) during playback stops playback
and the sequence returns to Step1.
Pressing +/- (PLAY) during playback pauses the playback
and pressing the button again restarts playback from the point
at which it paused.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
8
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
PLAY
CUT
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
CLEAR
0
RECALL
STOP
COPY
DEL
PASTE
9
6
INS
P IN P2
3
ADD
DSK4
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
INC
7
8
CONTROL
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
6
INS
P IN P2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
STOP
COPY
WIPE
PASTE
SELECT / KEYPAD
:TOTAL-D: 1/3
: =60
:
9
COPY
CLEAR
130
3
PLAY
STOP
DIRECT mode allows quick playback of sequences (See
the next section.)
: DIR
: LINK
: =NORML: =OFF
6
INS
P IN P2
DSK1
CLEAR
Play, Stop and Pause of Sequence
Press +/- (PLAY) to play back the sequence.
The sequence will stop playing when it comes to the end.
Pressing STOP(CLEAR) during playback stops playback
and the sequence returns to Step1.
Pressing +/- (PLAY) during playback pauses the playback and
pressing the button again restarts playback from the point
at which it paused.
SEQ EDIT: LOOP
PLAY
: =ON
9
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
18-1-3. Quick Recall (Direct Mode)
The operation example in this section shows how to recall the sequence that was saved to
"Sequence Memory 0" using Direct mode.
(1) Press SEQUENCE to change the Keypad to SEQUENCE
mode.
(2) Press 0 to select "Sequence Memory 0." A "beep" sound
will be heard and the data that was saved in "Sequence Memory 0"
is recalled.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
Before recalling sequences, Direct mode should be
enabled in the following way.
Setting Direct Operation Mode to ON
(1) Press SEQUENCE to display the [SEQUENCE MEMORY]
menu.
(2) Turn F1 to set DIRECT to ON.
SEQUENCE:DIRECT : STEP->--/-- LOOP->--- : 1/2
MEMORY : =ON
: TIME->----/---:
131
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
9
6
INS
P IN P2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
CLEAR
STOP
COPY
WIPE
PASTE
SELECT / KEYPAD
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
18-1-4. Playing Back Sequences Using Advanced Settings
Playing Sequences by Changing Bus Signal Selections
Sequence data includes that on bus signal selection states and are basically recalled on the
control panel exactly the same that they were stored. For example, if Bus Button 1 was
selected in the M/E PGM bus and Bus Button 2 in the M/E PST bus in the sequence, these
buttons should be selected in the same way when recalling the sequence.
However, users can select 5 in the PGM and 6 in the PST when recalling the sequence.
To do this, follow the procedure below.
(1) Press SEQUENCE to display the [SEQUENCE MEMORY] menu.
(2) Press 0 to select "Sequence Memory 0."
(3) Press RECALL to recall the data that was stored in "Sequence Memory 0" to the working
memory.
(4) Press SEQ EDIT to display the [SEQ EDIT] menu.
(5) Press the page down button twice to go to PAGE3.
(6) Turn F1 to select ALL (all buses) or M/E BG.
(7) Turn F2 to set XPT to OFF.
SEQ EDIT:SELECT : XPT
CTRL ENA: =ALL : =OFF
: TRANS :INTERP : 3/3
: =AUTO : =LINE :
(8) Press 5 in the M/E PGM row and press 6 in the M/E PST row.
(9) Press +/- (PLAY) to play back the sequence.
Playing Sequences without Specific Bus(es) or Using Manual Transitions
The sequences can be played back without DSK1 and by using manual transitions for DSK2.
To do this, follow the procedure below.
(1) Open PAGE3 in the [SEQ EDIT] menu.
(2) Set SELECT to DSK1 and TRANS to OFF.
SEQ EDIT:SELECT : XPT
CTRL ENA: =DSK1 : =OFF
: TRANS :INTERP : 3/3
: =OFF : =LINE :
(3) Set SELECT to DSK2 and TRANS to MANU.
SEQ EDIT:SELECT : XPT
CTRL ENA: =DSK2 : =OFF
OFF
AUTO (default setting)
MANU (manual)
: TRANS :INTERP : 3/3
: =MANU : =LINE :
The selected bus is not played back.
The selected bus is automatically played back.
The transition for the selected bus should be performed manually by
using the fader lever or the AUTO button.
Note that even if AUTO or MANU is set for a bus at TRANS, it cannot be performed if the
Fader Link of the bus is set to ON.
132
Playing Sequences Using the Fader Lever
The playback of sequences can be played back using the fader lever. To do this, follow the
procedure below.
(1) Open PAGE1 in the [SEQ EDIT] menu.
(2) Set LINK to ON.
SEQ EDIT: LOOP
PLAY
: =ON
: DIR
: =NOR
: LINK
: =ON
:TOTAL-D: 1/3
: =100 :
(3) Move the fader lever from end to end to play the sequence one time with the desired play
time.
Note that if AUTO or MANU is set for a bus at TRANS, it cannot be performed if the Fader
Link of the bus is set to M/E or P/P. Even if LOOP is set to ON, the looping playback cannot
be performed if the Fader Link of the bus is set to M/E or P/P.
Playing Sequences with the Fader Lever or the PLAY Button Using the Break Function
The Break function can automatically pause sequence playback at a desired step. The
setting example below shows how to set the Break function at Step2 and how to play back
the sequence with the AUTO button using the Break function.
(1) Open PAGE2 in the [SEQ EDIT] menu.
(2) Select 2 at STEP.
(3) Set BREAK to ON.
(4) Set BRK CTL to EACH.
SEQ EDIT: STEP : DUR
STEP
: = 2/ 3: =30
BRK CTL setting
OFF
EACH
ALL
: BREAK :BRK CTL: 2/3
: =ON
: =EACH :
BREAK setting
--OFF
ON
---
Description
The Break function is disabled at all steps.
The Break function is disabled at this step
The Break function is enabled at this step.
The Break function is enabled at all steps.
(5) Open PAGE1 in the [SEQ EDIT] menu and set LINK to M/E or P/P.
SEQ EDIT: LOOP
PLAY
: =ON
: DIR
: LINK
: =NORML: =M/E
:TOTAL-D: 1/3
: =60
:
(6) Press +/- (PLAY) to start the sequence playback. The sequence will stop at Step2. Press
+/- (PLAY) again to restart the sequence. The sequence will be played back from Step2 to
the end. The sequence playback with break points is also performed with the fader lever in
the same way.
First playback
Second
playback
133
18-1-5. Editing Sequences: Adding or Inserting Steps
The operation example in this section shows how to recall "Sequence Memory 0" that was
stored in section 18-1-1, edit the sequence by adding and overwriting steps to create a new
sequence with four steps, and store it to "Sequence Memory1."
Sequence Memory 0
For storing to Sequence Memory1
Recalling the Sequence
(1) Press SEQUENCE to display the [SEQUENCE MEMORY] menu.
(2) Press 0 to select "Sequence Memory 0."
SEQUENCE:TOTAL STEP->3
RECALL :TOTAL TIME->60
:LOOP->OFF
:DIR ->NOR
: 1/2
:
(3) Press RECALL to recall the sequence data to the working memory.
Pressing the SEQUENCE button changes the Keypad to SEQUENCE mode and enables
the following memory and function buttons: memory button 0-9 and STORE, RECALL,
INC, DEC, PLAY and STOP (See section 18-2-2. "SEQ EDIT Mode.")
Adding a New Step
(1) Press SEQ EDIT to go to the edit point (Step 1).
(2) Create "Video a."
(3) Press SEQ EDIT to display the [SEQ EDIT] menu.
(4) Press 3 (ADD)."Video a" is inserted after Step1.
Press ADD
here.
The state of the control panel (output images) has not changed when recalling a
sequence because the current step (edit point) is placed at Step 0 (standby). To begin
editing the sequence, press INC or DEC to move the edit point.
Pressing ADD inserts a new step after the edit point and one second is added to the total
duration. Pressing INS inserts a new step at the midpoint between the edit point and the
next step and the total duration remains the same.
Add
Insert
TOTAL DURATION
TOTAL DURATION
134
Overwriting Step3
(1) Press SEQ EDIT to change the Keypad to SEQ EDIT mode
and display the [SEQ EDIT] menu.
(2) Press the page down button to go to PAGE2. Verify the current
step.
(3) Turn F1 to select 3 at STEP in the menu or press INC in the
Keypad to go to Step3.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
INC
7
8
CONTROL
9
COPY
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
6
INS
P IN P2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
CLEAR
STOP
COPY
PASTE
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
SEQ EDIT: STEP : DUR
STEP
: = 3/ 4: =30
: BREAK :BRK CTL: 2/3
: =ON
: =OFF :
Pressing INC and DEC in the Keypad moves between steps.
(4) Create "Video b" for saving Step3.
(5) Press OVERWRITE(ENTER) in the Keypad to replace Step3.
Press ENTER
here.
Playing Back the Sequence
Press +/- (PLAY) to play back and check the sequence contents.
Storing the Sequence
(1) Press SEQUENCE to display the [SEQUENCE MEMORY] menu.
(2) Press STORE. The [SEQUENCE - STORE] menu appears, the current sequence
information is displayed and the Keypad is set to Sequence Store mode.
SEQUENCE:TOTAL STEP->4
:LOOP->ON
STORE
:TOTAL TIME->120 :DIR ->NOR
: 1/1
:
(3) Press 1 .to store the current data in the working memory to "Sequence Memory 1."
135
18-1-6. Editing Sequences: Copying and Deleting Steps
This section explains how to copy, paste and delete steps. The operational example below
shows how to create a sequence having 5 steps with the first and last steps the same.
Creating a New Sequence
(1) Press SEQ EDIT to change the Keypad to Sequence Edit mode.
(2) Press 9 (NEW), then ENTER to clear the working memory.
(3) Create "Video A". Press 3 (ADD) to save the current status to
Step1.
(4) Create "Video B" then press 3 (ADD).
(5) Create "Video C" then press 3 (ADD).
(6) Create "Video D" then press 3 (ADD).
(7) Press 3 (ADD) again to make the sequence that has 5 steps.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
9
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
6
INS
P IN P2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
CLEAR
STOP
COPY
PASTE
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
Copying and Pasting Step1
(1) Press DEC in the Keypad four times to go to Step1.
(2) Press COPY to copy the data in Step1.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
INC
7
8
CONTROL
Press COPY here.
(3) Press INC four times to go back to Step5.
(4) Press PASTE. The copied step is inserted before Step5.
Press PASTE
here.
9
COPY
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
PLAY
CUT
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
CLEAR
0
RECALL
STOP
COPY
DEL
PASTE
6
INS
P IN P2
3
ADD
DSK4
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
Deleting Step6
(1) Display PAGE2 in the [SEQ EDIT] menu. Change STEP (edit point) to 6 (i.e., move to
Step6).
(2) Press 2(DEL), then ENTER to delete Step6.
Deleting a step using DELETE automatically closes the intervals in front and back of the
step.
Deleting a step using CUT keeps the intervals in front and back of the step.
136
18-1-7. Editing Sequences: Setting Interpolation and Duration
This section explains how to set the interpolation mode and the playback time using KEY1 as
an example.
Smoothing Movements for KEY1 (Interpolation Mode)
At factory default settings, the movements between steps in the background, KEY, DSK and
PinP are linearly interpolated.
LINE(linear)
SMOOTH(curve)
CUT
(1) Open PAGE3 in the [SEQ EDIT] menu.
(2) Select KEY1 at SELECT.
(3) Select SMOOTH at INTERP (interpolation).
SEQ EDIT:SELECT : XPT
CTRL ENA: =KEY1 : =OFF
: TRANS :INTERP : 3/3
: =AUTO : =SMOOT:
Note that the transitions between the last step and the first step are performed by CUT
during loop play. Therefore, the transitions between them look smoother when using the
same data for the first and last steps.
Changing Playback Time
At factory default setting, the time intervals between steps are automatically set to 30 frames
(for 60Hz signals) or 25 frames (for 50Hz signals).
(1) Display the [SEQ EDIT] menu. In the menu examples below the TOTAL-D (total duration)
value is 120 on PAGE 1 and the DUR (duration) for Step1 is 30 on PAGE 2.
SEQ EDIT: LOOP
PLAY
: =ON
: DIR
: LINK
: =NORML: =OFF
SEQ EDIT: STEP
STEP
: =1
: DUR
: =30
:TOTAL-D: 1/3
: =120 :
: BREAK :BRK CTL: 2/3
: =ON
: =OFF :
(2) For example, change the duration for Step4 to 60 (frames). The total duration of the
sequence must be 150 (the sum of each step's duration).
TOTAL DURATION:150
DUR:30
DUR:30
DUR:30
DUR:60
When changing TOTAL-D to 200, the duration time of each step automatically increases
while keeping the ratios the same. The values for DUR in the menu, however, are not
changed. In this case, they represent not the real values but the relative values (ratios).
137
18-2. Sequence Menu and Keypad Mode
In Sequence Operations the Keypad automatically changed its mode according to the displayed
menu. The Keypad is in Sequence mode when the [SEQUENCE MEMORY], [SEQUENCE
STORE] or [SEQUENCE RECALL] menu is displayed. The Keypad is in SEQ EDIT mode when
the [SEQUENCE EDIT] menu is displayed.
18-2-1. SEQUENCE Mode
SEQUENCE mode is used for saving, recalling and deleting sequences and setting overwrite
protection for each sequence memory.
MEMORY
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
CONTROL
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
9
INC
INC
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
SETUP
DEC
4
5
6
DEC
DEC
44
55
66
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
KEY1
8
SWAP
88
99
MATT
FILE
NEW
INS
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
3
+/STOP
PLAY
CUT
11
22
33
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
0
0
RECALL
CLEAR
STOP
1
COPY
PASTE
STORE
CLEAR
PLAY
ENTER
OVWR
STOP
WIPE
Button
INC (INCREMENT)
DEC (DECREMENT)
PLAY
COPY
DEL
ADD
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
PASTE
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
STOP
0 to 9
7
7
DSK1
+/-
2
INS
COPY
STILL
SELECT / KEYPAD
Function
Refer to
18-1-5
18-1-6
18-1-2
Moves between steps.
Plays back a sequence.
Pressing the button during playback pauses the playback.
Stops sequence play.
18-1-2
Accesses Sequence Memory0 to 9.
18-3
The SEQUENCE MEMORY menu
Pressing the SEQUENCE memory button opens the [SEQUENCE MEMORY] menu. This
menu displays information of on the sequence working memory. Direct Operation mode can
be set On/Off in this menu.
SEQUENCE:DIRECT : STEP->5/5
LOOP->OFF
MEMORY : =OFF : TIME->0/200
Item
DIRECT
STEP
LOOP
TIME
: 1/1
:
Description
Refer to
Sets Direct Operation mode to On or Off. If the mode is On,
18-1-3
sequences can be quickly recalled.
Displays information on the current data in the sequence working
memory (the number of steps, the Loop play mode and the total
duration)
138
The SEQUENCE RECALL menu
In SEQUENCE mode, pressing a memory button that has data on the Keypad opens the
[SEQUENCE RECALL] menu. This menu is used to recall a sequence to the sequence
working memory. The overwrite protection for the sequence memories can also be set in this
menu.
SEQUENCE:TOTAL STEP->10 :LOOP->OFF
RECALL :TOTAL TIME->120 :DIR ->NOR
: 1/2
:
SEQUENCE:OVER WR:DELETE :
RECALL : =DISBL: >OFF :
: 2/2
:
Item
TOTAL STEP
LOOP
TOTAL TIME
DIR
OVER WR
DELETE
:
:
Description
Displays the number of steps in the sequence.
Displays the Loop mode setting (On or Off) for the sequence.
Displays the play time of the sequence in frames.
Displays the direction of the sequence play (normal or reverse).
Sets the overwrite protection for the sequence On or Off.
Deletes the sequence data in the sequence memory.
Refer to
18-1-2
18-3-1
18-3-2
The SEQUENCE STORE menu
Pressing STORE in SEQUENCE mode opens the [SEQUENCE STORE] menu. This menu
is used to check the sequence data when storing current data in the working memory to
sequence memory.
SEQUENCE:TOTAL STEP->10 :LOOP->OFF
STORE
:TOTAL TIME->120 :DIR ->NOR
Item
TOTAL STEP
LOOP
TOTAL TIME
DIR
: 1/1
:
Description
Displays the number of steps in the sequence.
Displays the Loop mode setting (On or Off) for the sequence.
Displays the play time of the sequence in frames.
Displays the direction of sequence play (normal or reverse).
18-2-2. SEQ EDIT Mode
The [SEQ EDIT] menu is used to edit the sequence in the working memory with the Keypad
in SEQ EDIT mode
MEMORY
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
CONTROL
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
INC
7
COPY
8
SWAP
9
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
6
INS
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
CLEAR
0
RECALL
STORE
COPY
PASTE
SETUP
P IN P2
DSK1
STOP
INC
INC
OVWR
SWAP
8
9
NEW
MATT
FILE
4
5
6
INS
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
+/PLAY
1
CUT
2
DEL
3
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
CLEAR
STOP
0
COPY
PASTE
CUT
COPY
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
DEL
RECALL
PASTE
SELECT / KEYPAD
139
NEW
KEY1
STOP
WIPE
7
DEC
DEC
PLAY
ENTER
COPY
STILL
INS
ADD
STORE
OVWR
ENTER
OVWR
Item
INC (INCREMENT)
DEC (DECREMENT)
PLAY
STOP
NEW
INS
ADD
OVWR
(OVERWRITE)
CUT
DEL
COPY
PASTE
Description
Moves between steps.
Plays back a sequence.
Pressing the button during playback pauses the playback.
Stops sequence play.
Creates a new sequence by clearing the working memory
data.
Adds a step to the sequence. The step is inserted at the mid
point between the edit point (current position) and the next
step.
Adds a step to the sequence. The step is added after the
edit point (current position) and the total duration is
increased.
Overwrites the current step (where the edit point is placed)
with the data in the working memory.
Deletes a step while keeping the intervals in front and back
of the step.
Deletes a step by closing the intervals in front and back of
the step.
Used to copy and paste step data.
To copy and paste steps, press COPY at the step to be
copied, move to the step in front of which the copied step is
to be inserted, then press PASTE.
Refer to
18-1-5
18-1-6
18-1-2
18-1-2
18-1-1
18-1-5
18-1-5
18-1-1
18-1-5
18-1-5
18-1-6
18-1-6
18-1-6
The SEQUENCE EDIT menu
SEQ EDIT: LOOP
PLAY
: =OFF
: DIR
: LINK
: =NORML: =OFF
:TOTAL-D: 1/3
: =100 :
SEQ EDIT: STEP : DUR
STEP
: = 1/ 5: =30
: BREAK :BRK CTL: 2/3
: =OFF : =OFF :
SEQ EDIT:SELECT : XPT
CTRL ENA: =ALL : =ON
: TRANS :INTERP : 3/3
: =AUTO : =LINE :
Item
LOOP
DIR
LINK
TOTAL-D
STEP
DUR
BREAK
BRK CTL
SELECT
XPT
TRANS
INTERP
Description
Sets Loop play ON or OFF.
Selects the direction of playback between Normal and Reverse.
Sets whether sequences are played back with the fader lever or
not. If set to M/E or P/P, sequence playback can be performed
with the fader lever.
Sets total duration of the sequence.
Specifies the current position (step) in the sequence.
Users can also move between steps by pressing INC and DEC
in the Keypad.
Sets the duration of the current step.
Enables or disables the Break point on each step.
Enables or disables the Break function.
It can set the break point on all steps.
Sets the signal selection and the interpolation mode for each
bus or all buses (M/E BG, P/P BKGD, KEY1-2, DSK1-4 and
PinP1-2).
140
Refer to
18-1-2
18-1-4
18-1-7
18-1-4
18-1-4
18-1-7
18-3. Sequence Memory Operation Examples
18-3-1. Setting Overwrite Protection on Sequence Memory 2
(1) Press SEQUENCE to display the [SEQUENCE MEMORY]
menu.
(2) Press 2 to select "Sequence Memory 2." The button light
turns on and the [SEQUENCE RECALL] menu appears.
(3) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2 of the menu.
(4) Press F1 to change OVER WR (overwrite) to DISBL (disable)
to set "Sequence Memory 2" to be protected from data change.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
INC
COPY
7
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
9
DEC
4
5
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
+/-
1
2
6
INS
P IN P2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
CLEAR
STOP
COPY
PASTE
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
SEQUENCE:OVER WR:DELETE :
RECALL : =DISBL: >OFF :
: 2/2
:
18-3-2. Deleting "Sequence Memory 2"
(1) Press SEQUENCE to display the [SEQUENCE MEMORY] menu.
(2) Press 2 to select "Sequence Memory 2." The button light turns on and the [SEQUENCE
RECALL] menu appears.
(3) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2 of the menu.
(4) Press F2 to set DELETE to ON and press F2. The data in "Sequence Memory 2" is
cleared.
SEQUENCE:OVER WR:DELETE :
RECALL : =ENABL: >ON
:
: 2/2
:
18-4. Backing Up Sequence Data
The following procedure shows how to save the sequence data to USB memory stick.
(1) Insert a USB flash memory into the USB port.
(2) Press the MENU control button, then press the FILE button to open the [FILE] top menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select SAVE, and then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[FILE-SAVE] menu.
(4) Turn F1 to select ALL (or SEQ) to the EXT (File Extension) item.
(5) Turn F3 to select data (or "SEQDAT02.seq" for example). Press F3 to save the data to USB
memory.
FILE
SAVE
: EXT
: =ALL
: CTRL : <DIR>..
: =SAVE :
1/1
data 101MB
(6) When the data is sent to the flash memory, the message "SAVE?" will appear. Press F3
again to store the data to the flash memory. A "beep" sound will be heard when the data is
saved.
141
19. File Operations
The switcher is capable of storing operational data to USB flash memory and of recalling and
downloading previously saved data for application to production operations. Operational data
including system settings, wipe settings, stills, bus settings and events can be all saved to and
downloaded from the USB flash memory.
19-1. USB Flash Memory
For available USB flash memory devices, see "Available File List" in the Appendix. Inserting
and removing of USB memory devices should be performed slowly and firmly.
The access lamp on the USB flash memory blinks while saving or reading data. Check
access to the USB flash memory before and while performing the operations. Do not remove
the USB flash memory while the access lamp is flashing. This could corrupt the stored data or
damage the USB flash memory device.
The remaining storage space on the USB memory device is displayed at the bottom
right-hand side in the FILE menu.
MEMORY
USB port
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
MENU
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQEDIT
BLACK
TRANS
CONTROL
USB MEMORY
ALARM
7
COPY
SWAP
NEW
STILL
MATT
FILE
PAGE
2
1
KEYER
2
1
2
P IN P
3
9
DEC
4
5
6
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
POWER2
F2
F4
F3
4
1
2
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
PLAY
CUT
DSK1
DSK2
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
CLEAR
KEY1
WIPE
CHANNEL
KEY2
KEYER/P IN P
M/E
DEL
WIPE POS
(2D DVE)
POS
ROT
FINE
DEF
3
ADD
DSK3
DSK4
0
RECALL
STORE
COPY
PASTE
MENU
HVS-350HS
JOYSTICK
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
AUX
DSK
2
1
+/F1
STOP
1
8
INS
POWER1
1
2
USER BUTTON
BKGD
INC
SETUP
SELECT / KEYPAD
TRANSITION
RATE
P IN P
1
P/P
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
DIRECTION
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
P IN P
2
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADER LIMIT
DVE
KEY 1
M/E
MIX
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
ON AIR
DVE
DSK 1
DVE
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
P/P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
M/E
DVE
AUTO
CUT
DSK 4
ON AIR
19-2. Available Files
The following file formats can be saved / loaded to / from USB flash memory.
File Extension
File Name (*1)
File Data Description
all
DATA.all
System data, all wipe data, all event memory
data and all sequence data.
sys
HVS350.sys
System data
mem
EVENT.mem
All event memory data
seq
SEQDAT**.seq
Each sequence memory data
jpg (*2)
*.jpg
JPEG format files (standard RGB)
STILL1.jpg to STILL4.jpg
Still 1 to Still 4 capture video in jpg format
tga (*2)
*.tga
TARGA format files (uncompressed RGB)
STILL1.tga to STILL4.tga
Still 1 to Still 4 capture video in targa format
bmp (*2)
*.bmp
Bitmap format files (uncompressed RGB)
STILL1.bmp to STILL4.bmp
Still 1 to Still 4 capture video in bitmap format
Note that file names are limited to max. 16 characters in length (ASCII code).
(*1) The files are automatically named to the correct name as shown in the table above when
saving to the USB flash memory.
(*2) When loading a jpeg. Targa or bitmap file from the USB flash memory, you can select a
centered or tiled format as well as a normal one. In this case, a centered or tiled format image
file is saved to STILL in jpg, tga or bmp format.
IMPORTANT
To use USB memory sticks with the switcher, format them in FAT or FAT32 file system.
142
19-3. Saving Data to USB Flash Memory
This section explains how to save panel settings to USB memory by using a "data.all" file as an
example.
(1) Insert a USB flash memory into the USB port.
(2) Press the MENU control button, then press the FILE button to open the FILE top menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select SAVE, and then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[FILE-SAVE] menu.
FILE
TOP
:>LOAD
:
>SAVE
>UPDATE
(4) Turn F1 to select ALL to the EXT (File Extension) item.
(5) Turn F3 to select data. (See section 19-5 "Moving between Directories in the USB Flash
Memory.") Press F3 to save the data to the USB memory.
FILE
SAVE
: EXT
: =ALL
: CTRL : DATA.ALL
: =SAVE :
:1/1
101MB
(6) When the data is sent to the flash memory, the message "SAVE?" will appear. Press F3
again to store the data to the flash memory. A "beep" sound will be heard when the data is
saved.
If the same file exists in the USB flash memory:
A pop up window appears and asks if you would like to overwrite the existing file. Turn F3 to
select CANCEL, OVERWR(overwrite) or RENAME.
To Rename the File:
If you wish to rename the file to save it, turn F3 to select RENAME and refer to section 19-7.
"Renaming Files in the USB Flash Memory" to give a new name to the file.
IMPORTANT
When pressing a control push-button, press it down lightly and release it within 1 sec.
Note that if you press and hold a control button down for more than 1 sec., the related
operation will be cancelled. Do not remove the USB flash memory while the access
lamp is flashing. This could corrupt the stored data or damage the USB flash memory.
143
19-4. Loading Data from USB Flash Memory
19-4-1. To Load Setting Data
This section explains how to load setting data to the USB memory by using a "data.all" file as
an example.
(1) Insert a USB flash memory into the USB port.
(2) Press the MENU control button, then press the FILE button to open the FILE top menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select LOAD, and then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[FILE-LOAD] menu.
FILE
TOP
:>LOAD
:
>SAVE
>UPDATE
(4) Turn F1 to select ALL to the EXT (File Extension) item.
(5) Turn F3 to select data. (See section 19-5 "Moving between Directories in the USB Flash
Memory.")
FILE
LOAD
: EXT
: =ALL
: LOAD
:
: <DIR>..
:
1/2
DATA 101MB
(6) Press F3 (or F2) to load the setting data to the control panel.
IMPORTANT
Once the saved system data (files with "all" or "sys" extension) finishes loading, you
will have to restart the switcher. (The unit should be powered off then powered ON.)
The system data is applied only after the switcher is restarted.
Be careful when loading system data (setting files with "all" or "sys" file extension),
because the switcher and control panel cannot be connected each other if different
connection settings are loaded.
19-4-2. To Download Image Files
When loading a jpeg, targa or bitmap file from the USB flash memory, you can select a
centered or tiled format as well as a normal one. This section explains how to download the
"sample.jpg" file to STILL1 as an example.
(1) Insert a USB flash memory into the USB port.
(2) Press the MENU control button, then press the FILE button to open the FILE top menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select LOAD, and then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[FILE-LOAD] menu.
(4) Turn F1 to select JPG to the EXT (File Extension) item.
(5) Turn F2 to select STL1 to the LOAD item as a destination.
If selecting STL1C to LOAD, the image file is saved to STILL1as a centered format.
If selecting STL1T to LOAD, the image file is saved to STILL1as a tiled format.
(6) Turn F3 to select sample. . (See section 19-5 "Moving between Directories in the USB
Flash Memory.") Press F3 to confirm the file selection.
FILE
LOAD
: EXT
: =JPG
: LOAD : <DIR>..
1/2
:=STIL1 :
sample 101MB
(7) Press F3 (or F2) to load the image file to STILL1 memory.
144
19-5. Moving between USB Flash Memory Directories
The directories in USB flash memory are displayed after "<DIR>", e.g. <DIR>JPEG, toward the
upper right of the FILE menu as shown below.
Directory name
FILE
LOAD
: EXT
: =JPG
: LOAD : <DIR>JPEG
1/2
: =STIL1:
sample 101MB
File name
In all FILE menus you can move to other directories in the USB flash memory in the following
way.
(1) In the [FILE - SAVE] menu, turn F2 to select PATH in the FILE menu, and then press F2. The
menu display changes to the directory menu.
(2) If you want to go to a subdirectory of the current directory, turn F3 to select the directory
name and press F3. If you want to go to a higher directory, select <DIR>...
NOTE
New directories cannot be prepared in the switcher. If you need a new directory,
prepare it in the computer previously.
19-6. Deleting Files in USB Flash Memory
The user can delete files in USB flash memory using the FILE menu operation.
(1) Open the [FILE - LOAD] menu. If you are in the [FILE-SAVE] menu, press the page up button
to go to the FILE top menu and move to the [FILE-LOAD] menu.
(2) Press the page down buttonto go to the [FILE-LOAD-DATA] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select the extension of the file you wish to delete from the flash memory.
(4) Turn F3 to select the file to be deleted.
(5) Turn F2 to select DELETE under the CTRL item and press F2.
(6) Turn F3 to select ON, then press F3. A "beep" sound will be heard when the data is deleted.
FILE
DATA
: EXT
: =JPG
: CTRL : <DIR>JPEG
2/2
: =DELET:
STILL1 101MB
145
19-7. Renaming Files in USB Flash Memory
The user can input an identifying name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters for any file stored to
USB flash memory. Existing files can also be named / renamed using the following procedure.
(1) Open the [FILE - LOAD] menu. If you are in the [FILE-SAVE] menu, press the page up button
to go to the FILE top menu and move to the [FILE-LOAD] menu.
(2) Press the page down buttonto go to the [FILE-LOAD-DATA] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select the extension of the file you wish to rename in the displayed file list.
(4) Turn F2 to select RENAME.
(5) Turn F3 to select which file you wish to rename in the displayed file list.
(6) Press F2 to start renaming
(7) Press F3 to select the character to be changed in the selected file. Turn F4 to change the
currently chosen character.
FILE
DATA
: EXT
: =JPG
: CTRL
STILL1 2/2
: =RENAM: SELECT: CHARA: 101MB
(8) Repeat steps (7) to change each character in the name of the selected file.
(9) When all needed characters are input, press F2. A "beep" sound will be heard when the
changed name is saved as the new file name.
146
20. System Setup Settings
20-1. Selecting System Signal Format
(1) Press the MENU control button, then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP top
menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select SYSTEM, then press F1 or the page down button to open the [SETUPSYSTEM] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select FORMAT, then press F1 or the page down button to open the [SETUP SYSTEM - FORMAT] menu.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
(4) Turn F1 to select the TV format to be used in the switcher. Turn F3 to select the aspect ratio.
SYSTEM
FORMAT
:
FORMAT
: =1080/59.94i
:ASPECT :SW TMNG: 1/1
: =16:9 : =ANY :
(5) Press the page up button to go back to the [SETUP - SYSTEM] menu.
(6) Turn F1 to select REBOOT and then press F1. Press the ENTER button in the
SELECT/KEYPAD block to reboot the system.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
(7) The selected system format is applied to the switcher after rebooting.
20-2. Crosspoint Switch Timing
The switcher can be set when and where crosspoints are switched.
(1) Open the [SETUP - SYSTEM - FORMAT] menu. (See the procedure above.)
(2) Turn F4 to set the switcher timing at the SW TMNG item.
SYSTEM
FORMAT
:
FORMAT
: =1080/59.94i
Signal Format
Setting
ODD
EVEN
1080i/59.94, 60, 50
525/60
625/50
ANY
720p/59.94, 60, 50
No1
No2
ANY
1080PsF/29.97, 30,
25, 24, 23.98
---
:ASPECT :SW TMNG: 1/1
: =16:9 : =ANY :
Description
Switches crosspoints in odd fields.
Switches crosspoints in even fields.
Switches crosspoints at any time when the commands are
issued.
Switches crosspoints in odd frames.
Switches crosspoints in even frames.
Switches crosspoints at any time when the commands are
issued.
Switches crosspoints at the same time regardless of
setting.
147
20-3. Selecting Reference Signal
The switcher provides reference input, its loop-through and output connectors in the GENLOCK
section on the rear panel.
20-3-1. To Set Reference Input
(1) Press the MENU control button, then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP top
menu. Turn F1 to select SYSTEM, then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[SETUP- SYSTEM] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select REF I/O, then press F1 or the page down button to open the [SETUP SYSTEM - REF IN] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select a reference signal to be input to the switcher between Black Burst and
Tri-level Sync.
(4) Adjust the horizontal phase under H PHS.
SYSTEM
REF IN
: TYPE
: =B_B
: H PHS :
: =0
:
: 1/2
:
20-3-2. To Set Reference Output
(1) Press the page down button in the [SETUP-SYSTEM-REF IN] menu to go to the [SETUPSYSTEM-REF OUT] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select a reference signal to be output from the switcher between Black Burst
and Tri-level Sync.
(3) You can adjust the horizontal phase of the reference signal under H PHS and the vertical
phase under V PHS.
SYSTEM : TYPE
REF OUT : =B_B
: H PHS : V PHS :
: =0
: =0
:
148
: 2/2
:
20-4. Adjusting Video Signal Levels
20-4-1. Proc Amp
The switcher provides the following Proc Amp features.
(1) Press the MENU control button, then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP top
menu. Turn F1 to select INPUT, then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[SETUP- INPUT] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select PROC AMP, then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[SETUP-INPUT-PROC AMP] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select the input to be adjusted.
(4) Turn F4 to set ENABLE to ON to enable the PROC AMP feature.
(5) You can adjust the luminance level under Y-Lv and the black level under BLK-Lv.
INPUT
:SELECT : Y-Lv :BLK-Lv :ENABLE : 1/3
PROC AMP: =IN04 : =1.00 : =0
: =ON
:
(6) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2.
(7) You can adjust the chrominance level under Pb-Lv and Pr-Lv.
INPUT
:SELECT : Pb-Lv : Pr-Lv :ENABLE : 2/3
PROC AMP: =IN04 : =1.00 : =1.00 : =ON
:
20-4-2. Video Level Clip
To maintain the desired signal level after adjusting the video levels with the Proc Amp, use
the Video Level Clip function to adjust the upper and lower limits of YPbPr color space. Note
that Video Level Clip can be applied only when the Proc Amp is enabled.
(1) Open the [SETUP-INPUT-PROC AMP] menu. (See section 20-4-1. "Proc Amp.")
(2) Turn F1 to select an input signal to be corrected.
INPUT
:SELECT : Y-Lv :BLK-Lv :ENABLE : 1/3
PROC AMP: =IN04 : =1.00 : =0
: =ON
:
(3) Press the page down button twice to go to PAGE 3.
(4) You can adjust the luminance level under WHT-Lv, the black level under BLK-Lv and the
chrominance level under Pb-Lv and Pr-Lv.
INPUT
CLIP
:WHT-Lv :BLK-Lv : Pb-Lv : Pr-Lv : 3/3
: =1019 : =4
: =500 : =500 :
149
20-5. Safety Area Markers
Various markers indicating the safety area, the center of the screen, and the aspect ratio can be
displayed on the desired output.
(1) Press the MENU control button, then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP top
menu. Turn F1 to select OUTPUT, then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[SETUP- OUTPUT] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select MARKER, then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[SETUP-OUTPUT-MARKER] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select a video output.
AUX1 to AUX6
E-Ch1, E-Ch2
F-Ch1, F-Ch2
(AUX1 to AUX6 Out)
(Ch1 Out and Ch2 Out on the option slot E)
(Ch1 Out and Ch2 Out on the option slot F)
(4) Turn F2 to set to ON then press F2 to enable the Marker function.
OUTPUT
MARKER
:SELECT :ENABLE :MARKER :SIDECUT: 1/2
: =AUX1 : =ON
: =BOX : =OFF :
Safety Area Marker
To display the safety area marker in the selected output, first select the type of marker under the
MARKER item in the [SETUP-OUTPUT-MARKER] menu from BOX and HOOK. (See the
figures in the bottom of the page.) Then go to PAGE 2, select an aspect ratio and set the marker
size.
OUTPUT
MARKER
:SELECT :ENABLE :MARKER :SIDECUT: 1/2
: =AUX1 : =ON
: =BOX : =OFF :
OUTPUT
MARKER
:ASPECT : SIZE :CENTER :
: =16:9 : =85% : =ON
:
: 2/2
:
Center Marker
To display the center marker in the selected output, set the CENTER item to ON on PAGE 2 of
the [SETUP-OUTPUT-MARKER] menu. (See the figures in the bottom of the page.)
OUTPUT
MARKER
:ASPECT : SIZE
: =16:9 : =85%
:CENTER :
: =ON
:
: 2/2
:
Side Cut Display
To display the Side Cut image converting the aspect ratio from 16:9 to 4:3, select the display
type under the SIDECUT item. Available types are LINE, BLACK ands HALF. (See the figure in
the bottom of the page.)
OUTPUT
MARKER
:SELECT :ENABLE :MARKER :SIDECUT: 1/2
: =AUX1 : =ON
: =OFF : =BLACK:
MARKER: BOX
ASPECT: 16:9
SIZE:
85%
MARKER: HOOK
ASPECT: 16:9
SIZE:
85%
CENTER: ON
150
MARKER: OFF
SIDECUT: BLACK
CENTER: ON
20-6. Ancillary Data
The switcher allows users to pass, substitute or blank the ancillary data in the Program (Clean)
and Preview video. The current ancillary data in the video stream is once cleared and then,
same or different data inserted. The switcher can also be set to pass or blank the ancillary data
in the AUX outputs. The ancillary data operation is set in the [SETUP-OUTPUT- ANCI] menu.
The ancillary data is not passed through all outputs as a factory default setting.
Ancillary data in input video cannot be passed through if FS (input frame synchronizer) is
set to ON or RESIZE is enabled. To pass ancillary data, input the video synchronized with
the genlock signal and set FS to OFF. Be sure to that ancillary data in SD inputs cannot be
used when the switcher operates in HD mode.
20-6-1. M/E Bus
The ancillary data for M/E outputs are set on PAGE 1 in the [SETUP-OUTPUT-ANCI] menu.
M/E Program (Clean) Output
Setting PGM SWAP to OFF as shown below blanks the ancillary data (Default setting)
OUTPUT
ANCI
: M/E PGM SWAP :PREV SW:
: =OFF
Lv=50: =OFF :
: 1/3
:
Setting PGM SWAP to EACH as shown below passes through the ancillary data. The Lv
(level) item selects the point where the new data is inserted from 0-100. If set to 50, the new
ancillary data is inserted at the halfway point of the transition.
OUTPUT
ANCI
: M/E PGM SWAP :PREV SW:
: =EACH
Lv=50: =OFF :
: 1/3
:
Setting PGM SWAP to an AUX output (AUX1.to AUX8) inserts the ancillary data in the
selected AUX bus to the program output.
OUTPUT
ANCI
: M/E PGM SWAP :PREV SW:
: =AUX1
Lv=50: =OFF :
: 1/3
:
20-6-2. P/P Bus
The ancillary data for P/P outputs are set in the same way as for M/E outputs on PAGE 2 in
the [SETUP-OUTPUT-ANCI] menu.
OUTPUT
ANCI
: P/P PGM SWAP :PREV SW:
: =EACH
Lv=50: =OFF :
: 2/3
:
20-6-3. AUX and Optional Outputs
The ancillary data for AUX outputs is set on PAGE 3 of the [SETUP – OUTPUT – ANCI] menu.
Choose an output for setting at SELECT. Then select ON (pass) or OFF (blank).
OUTPUT
ANCI
:SELECT :ENABLE :
: =AUX1 : =ON
:
: 3/3
:
151
20-7. Setting Date and Time
(1) Press the MENU control button, then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP top
menu. Turn F1 to select SYSTEM, then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[SETUP- SYSTEM] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select TIME, then press F1 or the page down button to open the [SETUP SYSTEM - TIME] menu.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
(3) If you need to change the date, turn F1 to select Month, Day or Year, then turn F1 to change
the setting.
(4) If you need to change the time, turn F3 to select Hour, Minute or Second, then turn F3 to
change the setting.
SYSTEM
TIME
: DATE(mm/dd/yy):TIME[10:20:10] : 1/1
: =Jul/14/10
: =10:20:20
:
20-8. Buzzer, Brightness and Screen Saver
The brightness of the display, buttons on the control panel, and the buzzer volume can be
adjusted in the menu. You can also set the start time of the screen saver shown on the menu
display.
(1) Press the MENU control button, then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP top
menu. Turn F1 to select PANEL, then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[SETUP- PANEL] menu.
SETUP
PANEL
:>UTILITY >TRS CTRL
:
SETUP
PANEL
:>UTILITY >TRS CTRL>KEY CTRL>USER BTN
:
(2) Turn F1 to select UTILITY, then press F1 or the page down button to open the [SETUPPANEL-UTILITY] menu.
PANEL
:BUZZER :BRIGHT :S-SAVER:LOGO
UTILITY : =OFF : =8
: =1
: =OFF
Buzzer:
Brightness:
Screen saver:
Logo
: 1/1
:
The BUZZER item sets the buzzer volume.
The BRIGHT item sets the brightness of the display and buttons on the
control panel.
The S-SAVER item sets the start time of the screen saver in minutes. Set
to OFF if you do not want to use the screen saver.
The LOGO item sets the Hanabi logo mark to turn on or off.
152
21. USER Button
User buttons can be assigned to specific menu pages and used as shortcuts or specific
functions buttons. Follow the procedure below to assign the desired menu page or function to
buttons.
21-1. USER Button Operation
The following 18 user buttons are available in the switcher.
How to Use USER BUTTON 1 and USER BUTTON 2 (below the menu display)
Pressing a button lets you open the desired menu page or perform the desired function. In the
factory default setting, the button can be set to enable or disable GPI IN triggers.
How to Use 16 User buttons on the SELECT/KEYPAD block (in USER BUTTON mode)
(1) Press USER BUTTON above the numeric keypad to change the Keyapd to User Button
mode.
(2) Press a user button on the Keypad to open a desired menu page or perform a desired
function.
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
EVENT
SEQUENCE
USER BUTTON
COPY/SWAP
SEQ EDIT
CONTROL
USB MEMORY
MENU
ALARM
7
COPY
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
PAGE
4
5
6
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
POWER2
+/F1
F2
F4
F3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
PLAY
CUT
DSK1
DSK2
STOP
4
9
DEC
CLEAR
3
8
INS
POWER1
1
2
USER BUTTON
INC
8
AUX
2
DEL
DSK3
0
RECALL
COPY
PASTE
3
ADD
DSK4
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
NOTE
As the factory default setting, no menu page or functions are assigned to user buttons
on the Keypad. Assign a desired menu page or a function following the procedure
below.
21-2. USER Button Settings
USER Button Default Assignments
Button
USER BUTTON1 (OU-1)
USER BUTTON2 (OU-2)
USER BUTTON3-18
Default Setting
GPI IN ENABLE
EDITOR ENABLE
NONE
(1) Press the USER BUTTON above the Keypad to display the [USER BTN] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select a USER button for use. The selected USER button blinks.
(3) Select MENU or the function type under TYPE.
PANEL
:SELECT : TYPE : FUNC (F3)
USER BTN: = 1
: =NONE : = (NOT ASSIGN)
153
: 1/2

If Menu Shortcut is Set:
Turn F2 to select TYPE to MENU and press F2. Then turn F3 to select a menu page and press
F3. Once the menu shortcut is assigned to a User button, pressing the button opens the
assigned menu page.
Assignable Menu Page
Menu
FILE
SET UP
SET UP
SET UP
SETUP
SET UP
KEY
KEY
KEY / DSK
KEY / DSK
KEY / DSK / PinP
KEY / DSK / PinP
KEY / DSK / PinP
KEY / DSK / PinP
PinP
STILL
MATT
EXT I/F
FADER LIMIT
Setting (Accessed menu page)
FILE-TOP, FILE-LOAD, FILE SAVE
SYSTEM-FORMAT MENU
EDITOR MENU
MV1 MENU, MV2 MENU
VTR/VDCP
STATUS MENU
KEY1-2 EDGE
KEY1-2 AUTO CK
KEY1-2 MATT / DSK1-4 MATT
KEY1-2 GAIN/CLIP / DSK1-4 GAIN/CLIP
KEY1-2 POS/SIZE / DSK1-4 POS/SIZE PinP1-2 POS/SIZE
KEY1-2 CROP / DSK1-4 CROP / PinP1-2 CROP
KEY1-2 BORDER / DSK1-4 BORDER / PinP1-2 BORDER
KEY1-2 SUB EFF / DSK1-4 SUB EFF / PinP1-1 SUB EFF
PinP 1 SIGNAL, PinP 2 SIGNAL
STILL
MATT
VTR / VDCP
TRANS-FADER LIMIT
If Function Type is Set:
Turn F2 to select the type of function and press F2. Then turn F3 to select a function to be used
and press F3. Once the function is assigned to a User button, pressing the button switches the
assigned function On and Off. If a function is assigned, it can also be a menu shortcut
(accessible by pressing the button twice quickly).
Assignable Functions
When MARKR (Marker) is selected for TYPE:
Setting
Function
Button Indication
AUX1 -6 ENABLE
SLOT-E CH1, CH2 ENABLE
SLOT-F CH1, CH2 ENABLE
Pressing the button shows a safety area
marker for the output.
ON: Lit orange,
OFF: Unlit
When GPIO (GPI In/Out) was selected for TYPE:
Setting
Function
Button Indication
GPI IN ENABLE
Pressing the button enables GPI IN.
ON: Lit orange,
OFF: Unlit
Lit when pushed,
unless unlit.
GPI OUTPUT1-16
(PUSH)
GPI OUTPUT1-16
(TGLE)
The GPI OUTPUT function (1-16) represents the
ON/OFF setting for each GPI OUTPUT (1-16)
assigned to a GPI IN/TALLY OUT connector pin that
is set at the menu.
The function is enabled whenever the relevant
USER button is pressed.
The GPI OUTPUT function (1-16) represents the
ON/OFF setting for each GPI OUTPUT (1-16)
assigned to a GPI IN/TALLY OUT connector pin that
is set at the menu.
The function is enabled whenever the relevant
USER button is pressed.
154
ON: Lit orange,
OFF: Unlit
When USTRS (User Transition) is selected for TYPE:
Setting
Function
KEY1-2 SCALER
KEY1-2 MIX
KEY1-2 SLIDE LEFT
KEY1-2 SLIDE RIGHT
KEY1-2 SLIDE TOP
Performs the user transition for KEY.
KEY1-2 SLIDE BOTTOM
KEY1-2 WIPE LEFT
KEY1-2 WIPE RIGHT
Button Indication
On-Air: Lit orange,
Off-Air: Unlit
KEY1-2 WIPE TOP
KEY1-2 WIPE BOTTOM
DSK1-4 SCALER
DSK1-4 MIX
DSK1-4 SLIDE LEFT
DSK1-4 SLIDE RIGHT
DSK1-4 SLIDE TOP
DSK1-4 SLIDE BOTTOM
Performs the user transition for DSK.
On-Air: Lit orange,
Off-Air: Unlit
Performs the user transition for PinP1-2.
On-Air: Lit orange,
Off-Air: Unlit
DSK1-4 WIPE LEFT
DSK1-4 WIPE RIGHT
DSK1-4 WIPE TOP
DSK1-4 WIPE BOTTOM
PINP1-2 SCALER
PINP1-2 MIX
PINP1-2 SLIDE LEFT
PINP1-2 SLIDE RIGHT
PINP1-2 SLIDE TOP
PINP1-2 SLIDE BOTTOM
PINP1-2 WIPE LEFT
PINP1-2 WIPE RIGHT
PINP1-2 WIPE TOP
PINP1-2 WIPE BOTTOM
When KEYER is selected for TYPE:
Setting
Function
Button Indication
KEY 1-2 2D DVE ENABLE
KEY 1-2 BOX MASK AND ENABLE
KEY 1-2 BOX MASK OR ENABLE
KEY 1-2 EDGE NORMAL ENABLE
KEY 1-2 EDGE OUTLINE ENABLE
KEY 1-2 FIELD FREEZE ENABLE
KEY 1-2 FRAME FREEZE ENABLE
Sets 2D DVE On/Off.
Sets AND type BOX MASK On/Off.
Sets OR type BOX MASK On/Off.
Sets Normal Edge On/Off.
Sets Outline Edge On/Off.
Sets Field Freeze On/Off.
Sets Frame Freeze On/Off.
ON: Lit orange,
OFF: Unlit
When DSK is selected for TYPE:
Setting
DSK 1-4 2D DVE ENABLE
DSK 1-4 BOX MASK AND ENABLE
DSK 1-4 BOX MASK OR ENABLE
DSK 1-4 FIELD FREEZE ENABLE
DSK 1-4 FRAME FREEZE ENABLE
Function
Sets 2D DVE On/Off.
Sets AND type BOX MASK On/Off.
Sets OR type BOX MASK On/Off.
Sets Field Freeze On/Off.
Sets Frame Freeze On/Off.
155
Button Indication
ON: Lit orange,
OFF: Unlit
When VTR is selected for TYPE (planned for future support):
Setting
Function
VTR/VDCP REW
VTR/VDCP PLAY/PAUSE
VTR/VDCP FWD
VTR/VDCP STOP
VTR/VDCP REC
VTR/VDCP STEP REV
VTR/VDCP STEP FWD
VTR/VDCP CUE UP
VDCP MARK IN
VDCP MARK OUT
Operates the connected VTR or VDCP
channel.
Button Indication
During execution: Lit,
Other cases: Unlit
Always lit orange
During execution: Lit,
Other cases: Unlit
Always lit orange
VDCP TC DISPLAY
Displays time code information when
controlling VDCP devices.
Always lit orange
VTR1-4 SELECT
VDCP1-4 SELECT
Selects a VTR or VDCP channel for
control. Selecting the channel again
deselects it.
Channel selected:
Lit orange
Other cases: Unlit
VTR1-4 REW
VTR1-4 PLAY
VTR1-4 PAUSE
Rewinds video on VTR1-4.
Plays video on VTR1-4.
Pauses video on VTR1-4.
During execution: Lit,
Other cases: Unlit
VTR1-4 FWD
Fast-forwards video VTR1-4.
VTR1-4 STOP
Stops recoding/playback on VTR1-4.
VTR1-4 REC
Records video on VTR1-4.
VTR1-4 GOTO TOP
VDCP1-4 REW
VDCP1-4 PLAY
VDCP1-4 PAUSE
Cues to 00:00:00:00 on VTR1-4
Rewinds video on VDCP1-4.
Plays video on VDCP1-4.
Pauses video on VDCP1-4.
VDCP1-4 FWD
Fast-forwards video VDCP1-4.
VDCP1-4 STOP
Stops recoding/playback on VDCP1-4.
VDCP1-4 REC
Records video on VDCP1-4.
VDCP1-4 GOTO TOP
Cues to 00:00:00:00 on VDCP1-4
When SEQ is selected for TYPE:
Setting
MEMORY No.0-9 RECALL
SEQUENCE PLAY
Function
Recalls Sequence Memory 0 -9
Plays the sequence.
SEQUENCE PAUSE
SEQUENCE STOP
SEQ FADER LINK M/E
SEQ FADER LINK P/P
Pauses the sequence.
Stops the sequence.
Enables/disables the fader link.
Enables/disables the fader link.
156
Always unlit
During execution: Lit,
Other cases: Unlit
Always unlit
During execution: Lit,
Other cases: Unlit
Always unlit
During execution: Lit,
Other cases: Unlit
Always unlit
During execution: Lit,
Other cases: Unlit
Always unlit
During execution: Lit,
Other cases: Unlit
Always unlit
Button Indication
Always lit orange
When OTHER is selected for TYPE:
Setting
Function
Button Indication
EDITOR ENABLE
Sets editor control On/Off.
STILL1-4 STORE
WIPE MODIFY BKGD RESET
WIPE MODIFY KEY1 RESET
WIPE MODIFY KEY1 RESET
Captures Still1 to Still4.
Resets the [WIPE-BKGD] menu.
Resets the [WIPE-KEY1] menu.
Resets the [WIPE-KEY2] menu.
Resets the [WIPE MODIFY] menu for
all buses.
Begins to play the recorded clip or
pauses the playback/recording.
Stops clip playback and cues to IN
point.
Begins to play the recorded clip in
variable mode with a variable rate set
in the[STILL-CLIP](4/6) menu.
Begins to record video clip.
Moves Current Frame forward by one
frame in the clip memory.
Moves Current Frame backward by
one frame in the clip memory.
ON: Lit orange
OFF: Unlit
Always lit orange
WIPE MODIFY ALL RESET
CLIP MEM PLAY/PAUSE
CLIP MEM STOP
CLIP MEM VAR
CLIP MEM REC
CLIP MEM NEXT FRAME
CLIP MEM PREV FRAME
Always lit orange
ON: Lit orange
OFF: Unlit
ON: Lit orange
OFF: Unlit
Event stored: Lit
Event not stored: Unlit
CG WIPE ENABLE
Enables CG WIPE.
OSD CTRL ENABLE
Sets the OSD menu display On/Off.
EVENT NO0-9 RECALL
Loads an event.
PREVIEW OUT-KEY1-2
PREVIEW OUT-DSK1-4
PREVIEW OUT-PinP1-2
Sets display on Preview On/Off.
ON: Lit orange
OFF: Unlit
Sets AUX Crossfade transitions to On
or Off.
Enables Virtual Link.
Enables router control.
Enables AUX LINK.
Enables Stereoscopic 3D.
ON: Lit orange
OFF: Unlit
AUX1-8 TRANS ENABLE
VIRTUAL ENABLE
ROUTER ENABLE
AUX LINK ENABLE
3D ENABLE
157
ON: Lit orange
OFF: Unlit
21-3. Triggering User Buttons
User buttons can be triggered (activated) by state changes (ON/OFF) of tally or GPI function
items. Are available items. Three typical examples are shown below. This chapter shows how to
set up for these examples in the USER BUTTON menu.
Ex. 1: Performs a KEY1 SCALER transition when IN01 is displayed on the PGM screen.
Ex. 2: Performs a DSK2 MIX transition when IN01 is cleared from the PGM screen.
Ex. 3: Plays video on VTR1 when KEY1 is ON the PGM screen.
<Ex. 1>
Assign the KEY1 SCALER transition function to the USER 1 button, which is activated when
IN01 is displayed on the PGM screen.
(1) Open PAGE 1 of the [USER BUTTON] menu.
(2) Select OU-1 for SELECT, USTRS for TYPE and KEY1 SCALER in the next field.
USER
:SELECT : TYPE : FUNC(F3)
BUTTON : =OU-1 : =USTRS: =KEY1 SCALER
: 1/2
(3) Press the page down button to go to PAGE 2.
(4) Turn F3 to select Out:RED TALLY-IN01. Set TRG EDG to ON.
USER
:SELECT :TRG EDG: FUNCTION(F3) : 2/2
BUTTON : =OU-1 : =ON
: =Out:RED TALLY-IN01
<Ex. 2>
Assign the DSK2 MIX transition function to the USER 2 button, which is activated when IN01 is
cleared from the PGM screen.
(1) Set PAGE 1 of the [USER BUTTON] menu as shown below.
USER
:SELECT : TYPE : FUNC(F3)
BUTTON : =OU-2 : =USTRS: =DSK2 MIX
: 1/2
(2) Set PAGE 2 as shown below. (See the table in the next page for details on TRG EDG.)
USER
:SELECT :TRG EDG: FUNCTION(F3) : 2/2
BUTTON : =OU-2 : =OFF : =Out:RED TALLY-IN01
<Ex. 3>
Assign the VTR-1 PLAY function to the USER 3 button, which is activated when KEY1 is
displayed on the PGM screen.
(1) Set items on PAGE 1 of the [USER BUTTON] menu as shown below.
USER
:SELECT : TYPE
BUTTON : =OU-3 : =VTR
: FUNC(F3)
: =VTR1 PLAY
: 1/2
(2) Set items on PAGE 2 as shown below.
USER
:SELECT :TRG EDG: FUNCTION(F3) : 2/2
BUTTON : =OU-3 : =ON
: =Out:KEY1 ON TALLY
158
About TRG EDG (TRIGGER EDGE)
Setting
Description
ON (Default)
User button function is activated when the state of the specified item
changes to ON.
OFF
User button function is activated when the state of the specified item
changes to OFF.
DBL
User button function is activated when the state of the specified item
changes to ON or OFF.
About FUNCTION
The FUNCTION item specifies an item to be a trigger. Items available for tallies or GPI IN can
be set. See tables in section 23-1-2. "GPI OUT" and section 23-2. "Tally Output" for details.
NOTE
The following User Button functions cannot be activated by triggers.
-Record on VTR or VDCP (if DIRECT REC mode is off.)
-Record to Clip Memory (if REC MODE is STANDARD.)
The Trigger User Button function can be used only on an Operation Unit whose ID is 1
(The OU NO item in the ARCNET menu is set to OU1.) See section 3-3. "How to
Connect between MU and OU Units" and section 29-1 "Arcnet" for details on OU ID
settings.
159
22. Reboot and Initialize
22-1. Rebooting System
(1) Press the MENU control button, then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP top
menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select SYSTEM, then press F1 or the page down button to open the [SETUPSYSTEM] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select REBOOT, and then press F1. Press the ENTER button in the
SELECT/KEYPAD block to reboot the system.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
22-2. System Initialization
To initialize the system settings, follow the procedure below.
(1) Press the MENU control button, then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP top
menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select SYSTEM, then press F1 or the page down button to open the [SETUPSYSTEM] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select INIT, then press F1 or the page down button to display the
[SETUP-SYSTEM-INIT] menu.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
(4) Turn F1 to select SETUP(expSYS) , then press F1 to initialize the switcher setup data aside
from the system data.
SYSTEM
INIT
: INIT
: >CURRENT
CURRENT:
SETUP(expSYS):
CUR&SETUP:
FACTORY:
: LOAD :
: =LAST :
: 1/1
:
Resets settings for the background, KEY, PinP, DSK and MATT.
Resets the SETUP menu aside from the [SETUP-SYSTEM] menu.
Resets settings including CURRENT and SETUP(expSYS) above.
Resets settings including CURRENT and SETUP including the
[SETUP-SYSTEM] menu.
See section 4-4. "How to Return Settings to Default" for initializing menus.
See section 17-6. "Loading Event at Start-up" for how to load the desired settings at system
startup.
160
23. GPI IN/OUT and Tally Outputs
23-1. GPI Control
The switcher can control external devices or can be controlled by external devices via the GPI
interface. The GPI input and output functions are freely assignable to each pin of the GPI IN and
GPI/TALLY OUT connectors on the HVS-350HS rear and the GPI/TALLY OUT connector on the
HVS-35OU/35ROU rear. The pin assignments are made in the [SETUP- GPI/TLY] menu as
shown below.
Displaying the [SETUP-GPI/TLY] Menu
(1) Press the MENU control button, then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP top
menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select GPI/TLY, then press F1 or the page down button to open the [SETUPGPI/TLY] menu.
SETUP
MENU
:>SYSTEM >INPUT
>OUTPUT >PANEL
:>GPI/TLY >FUNCTION>EXT I/F >STATUS
SETUP
:>TLY COL >GPI IN
GPI/TLY :>TALLY1 >TALLY2
>GPI OUT >OU GPI/O
>TALLY3 >30TALR
23-1-1. GPI IN
The GPI IN connector on the HVS-350HS rear provides GPI inputs. See section 2-4-3. "GPI
IN Connector" and 2-4-4. "TALLY OUT Connector" and 2-4-5 "GPI/TALLY OUT connector" for
the default pin assignment.
(1) Turn F1 to select GPI IN and press the F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP
- GPI/TLY -GPI IN] menu.
(2) Turn F2 to select the pin number at P NO.
(3) Turn F3 to select the function to be assigned. (See the table "GPI IN function" in the
following page for available functions.)
(4) Set other pin assignments in the same way.
(5) Turn F1 to set ON to activate all GPI inputs in the connector.
GPI/TLY :ENABLE :P NO : FUNCTION
: 1/1
GPI IN : =ON
: =1 : =In:M/E BKGD AUTO TRANS
NOTE
The GPI IN ENABLE function can be assigned to a USER button. Once this function is
assigned, pressing the USER button repeatedly toggles between GPI IN ON (button
lit) and GPI IN OFF (button unlit). Pressing the USER button twice quickly opens the
GPI I/O menu. See section 21. "USER Button" for how to assign the function to the
USER button.
161
23-1-2. GPI OUT
The following [GPI OUT] menu is for the GPI/TALLY OUT connector on the HVS-350HS rear.
See section 2-4-4. "GPI/TALLY OUT Connector" for the default pin assignment.
(1) Turn F1 to select GPI OUT and press the F1 or the page down button to display the
[SETUP - GPI/TLY -GPI OUT] menu.
(2) Turn F2 to select the pin number at P NO.
(3) Turn F3 to select the function to be assigned. (See the table "GPI OUT function" below for
available functions.)
(4) Set other pin assignments in the same way.
GPI/TLY :
GPI OUT :
:P NO : FUNCTION
: 1/1
: =1 : =Out:GPI OUTPUT01
23-1-3. OU GPI/O
The following [OU GPI/O] menu is for the GPI/TALLY OUT connector on the HVS-35OU/
HVS-35ROU rear. See section 2-4-5. "GPI/TALLY OUT Connector" for the default pin
assignment.
(1) Turn F1 to select GPI OUT and press the F1 or the page down button to display the
[SETUP - GPI/TLY -GPI OUT] menu.
(2) Turn F2 to select the pin number at P NO.
(3) Turn F3 to select the function to be assigned. (See the tables "GPI IN function" and "GPI
OUT function" below for available functions.)
(4) Set other pin assignments in the same way.
(5) Turn F1 to set ON. This activates all GPI outputs set in this menu.
GPI/TLY :ENABLE :P NO : FUNCTION
: 1/1
OU GPI/O: =ON
: =In1: =In:BKGD AUTO TRANS

GPI IN function
FUNCTION setting
NOT USED
M/E BKGD AUTO TRANS
P/P BKGD AUTO TRANS
KEY1 AUTO TRANS
KEY2 AUTO TRANS
PinP1 AUTO TRANS
PinP2 AUTO TRANS
DSK1 AUTO TRANS
DSK2 AUTO TRANS
DSK3 AUTO TRANS
DSK4 AUTO TRANS
Description
No function is assigned.
Performs Background AUTO transitions.
Performs KEY1-2 AUTO transitions.
Performs PinP1-2 AUTO transitions.
Performs DSK1-4 AUTO transitions.
NEXT AUTO TRANS
Performs the NEXT AUTO TRANSITION set in the transition
section.(in M/E)
M/E BLACK AUTO TRANS
P/P BLACK AUTO TRANS
M/E BKGD CUT TRANS
P/P BKGD CUT TRANS
KEY1 CUT TRANS
KEY2 CUT TRANS
PinP1 CUT TRANS
PinP2 CUT TRANS
Performs BLACK transitions.
Performs Background CUT transitions.
Performs KEY CUT transitions.
Performs PinP CUT transitions.
162
DSK1 CUT TRANS
DSK2 CUT TRANS
DSK3 CUT TRANS
DSK4 CUT TRANS
KEY1 USER TRANS
KEY2 USER TRANS
PinP1 USER TRANS
PinP2 USER TRANS
DSK1 USER TRANS
DSK2 USER TRANS
DSK3 USER TRANS
DSK4 USER TRANS
TRANS-TYPE BK-WIPE
TRANS-TYPE BK-MIX
TRANS-TYPE BK-CUT
TRANS-TYPE KEY1-WIPE
TRANS-TYPE KEY2-WIPE
TRANS-TYPE KEY1-MIX
TRANS-TYPE KEY2-MIX
TRANS-TYPE KEY1-CUT
TRANS-TYPE KEY2-CUT
TRANS-TYPE DSK1-MIX
TRANS-TYPE DSK2-MIX
TRANS-TYPE DSK3-MIX
TRANS-TYPE DSK4-MIX
TRANS-TYPE DSK1-CUT
TRANS-TYPE DSK2-CUT
TRANS-TYPE DSK3-CUT
TRANS-TYPE DSK4-CUT
USER BUTTON1 to18
STILL STORE1 to 4
XPT M/E PGM BLACK
XPT M/E PGM IN01 to 24
XPT M/E PGM STILL1 to 4
XPT M/E PGM STILLK
XPT M/E PGM MATT1 to 2
XPT M/E PGM COLORBAR
XPT M/E PST BLACK
XPT M/E PST IN01 to 24
XPT M/E PST STILL1 to 4
XPT M/E PST STILLK
XPT M/E PST MATT1 to 2
XPT M/E PST COLORBAR
XPT P/P PGM BLACK
XPT P/P PGM IN01 to 24
XPT P/P PGM STILL1 to 4
XPT P/P PGM STILLK
XPT P/P PGM MATT1 to 2
XPT P/P PGM COLORBAR
XPT P/P PST BLACK
XPT P/P PST IN01 to 24
XPT P/P PST STILL1 to 4
XPT P/P PST STILLK
XPT P/P PST MATT1 to 2
XPT P/P PST COLORBAR
Performs DSK CUT transitions.
Performs KEY USER transitions.
Performs PinP USER transitions.
Performs DSK USER transitions.
Changes the M/E background transition type to WIPE.
Changes the M/E background transition type to MIX.
Changes the M/E background transition type to CUT.
Changes the KEY transition type to WIPE.
Changes the KEY transition type to MIX.
Changes the KEY transition type to CUT.
Changes the DSK transition type to MIX.
Changes the DSK transition type to CUT.
Performs the function assigned to USER button1-18.
Performs still store.
Selects BLACK for the M/E PGM bus.
Selects a primary input (IN01 to 24) for the M/E PGM bus.
Selects a still for the M/E PGM bus.
Selects STILL KEY for the M/E PGM bus.
Selects a matte for the M/E PGM bus.
Selects COLORBAR for the M/E PGM bus.
Selects BLACK for the M/E PST bus.
Selects a primary input (IN01 to 24) for the M/E PST bus.
Selects a still for the M/E PST bus.
Selects STILL KEY for the M/E PST bus.
Selects a matte for the M/E PST bus.
Selects COLORBAR for the M/E PST bus.
Selects BLACK for the P/P PGM bus.
Selects a primary input (IN01 to 24) for the P/P PGM bus.
Selects a still for the P/P PGM bus.
Selects STILL KEY for the P/P PGM bus.
Selects a matte for the P/P PGM bus.
Selects COLORBAR for the P/P PGM bus.
Selects BLACK for the P/P PST bus.
Selects a primary input (IN01 to 24) for the P/P PST bus.
Selects a still for the P/P PST bus.
Selects STILL KEY for the P/P PST bus.
Selects a matte for the P/P PST bus.
Selects COLORBAR for the P/P PST bus.
163
XPT AUX1 to 8 TRANS
ENABLE
XPT AUX1 to 8 BLACK
XPT AUX1 to 8 IN01-IN24
XPT AUX1 to 8 STILL1 to 4
XPT AUX1 to 8 STILLKEY
XPT AUX1 to 8 MATT1 to 2
XPT AUX1 to 8 COLORBAR
XPT AUX1 to 8 M/E PGM
XPT AUX1 to 8 M/E PREV
XPT AUX1 to 8 M/E CLEAN
XPT AUX1 to 8 M/E KEY
XPT AUX1 to 8 P/P PGM
XPT AUX1 to 8 P/P PREV
XPT AUX1 to 8 P/P CLEAN
XPT AUX1 to 8 P/P KEY
XPT AUX1 to 8 MV1 to 2
EVENT No.0 to 9 RECALL

GPI OUT function
FUNCTION setting
NOT USED
GPI OUTPUT01 to 16
M/E BKGD TRANS STS
P/P BKGD TRANS STS
Toggles AUX1 to 8 Crossfade transitions On and Off.
Selects BLACK for an AUX bus.
Selects a primary input (IN01 to 24) for an AUX bus.
Selects a still for an AUX bus.
Selects STILL KEY for an AUX bus
Selects a matte for an AUX bus.
Selects COLORBAR for an AUX bus.
Selects M/E PGM for an AUX bus.
Selects M/E PREV for an AUX bus.
Selects M/E CLEAN for an AUX bus.
Selects M/E KEY for an AUX bus.
Selects P/P PGM for an AUX bus.
Selects P/P PREV for an AUX bus.
Selects P/P CLEAN for an AUX bus.
Selects P/P KEY for an AUX bus.
Selects MV for an AUX bus.
Recalls an event.
Description
No function is assigned
These functions are used in conjunction with USER buttons
(GPI OUTPUT1 to 16 Push/Toggle).
Push: Continues to output GPI pulses while the button is
pressed.
Toggle: Toggles GPI pulse On/Off.
Outputs pulse while M/E background transitions are
processed.
Outputs pulse while P/P background transitions are
processed.
KEY1 TRANS STS
KEY2 TRANS STS
Outputs pulse while KEY transitions are processed.
M/E BKGD AUTO TRANS
Outputs pulse while M/E background AUTO transitions are
processed.
Outputs pulse while P/P background AUTO transitions are
processed.
P/P BKGD AUTO TRANS
KEY1 AUTO TRANS
KEY2 AUTO TRANS
PinP1 AUTO TRANS
PinP2 AUTO TRANS
DSK1 – DSK4 AUTO TRANS
TRSTYPE MEBK-CUT
TRSTYPE PPBK-CUT
TRSTYPE KEY1-CUT
TRSTYPE KEY2-CUT
TRSTYPE DSK1-CUT
TRSTYPE DSK2-CUT
TRSTYPE DSK3-CUT
TRSTYPE DSK4-CUT
TRSTYPE MEBK-MIX
TRSTYPE PPBK-MIX
TRSTYPE KEY1-MIX
TRSTYPE KEY2-MIX
Outputs pulse while KEY AUTO transitions are processed.
Outputs pulse while PinP AUTO transitions are processed.
Outputs pulse while DSK AUTO transitions are processed.
Outputs pulse while the BKGD transition type is set to CUT.
Outputs pulse while the KEY transition type is set to CUT.
Outputs pulse while the DSK transition type is set to CUT.
Outputs pulse while the BKGD transition type is set to MIX.
Outputs pulse while the KEY transition type is set to MIX.
164
TRSTYPE DSK1-MIX
TRSTYPE DSK2-MIX
TRSTYPE DSK3-MIX
TRSTYPE DSK4-MIX
TRSTYPE MEBK-WIPE
TRSTYPE KEY1-WIPE
TRSTYPE KEY2-WIPE
Outputs pulse while the DSK transition type is set to MIX.
Outputs pulse while the BKGD transition type is set to WIPE.
Outputs pulse while the KEY transition type is set to WIPE.
23-2. Tally Output
Tally information can be output from the GPI /TALLY OUT connectors on the HVS-350HS rear
and HVS-35OU/35ROU rear. See section 23-2-2. "Tally Output Settings (GPI /TALLY OUT)" for
details on settings.
Tally outputs can be expanded by installing HVS-30TALR cards (optional). See section 23-2-3.
"Tally Output Settings (HVS-30TALR)".
Tally information can also be output via the Tally Unit (the Hanabi series option), in which case
the RS-422 connector is used for connection to tally units. See section 23-2-4 "Sending Tally
Signals to Tally Units."
23-2-1. Tally Color Setting
(1) Display the [SETUP- GPI/TLY -TALLY COLOR] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select M/E PGM, then turn F2 to select the tally color for PGM. Set the tally
color for M/E PST, P/P PGM, P/P PST and AUX buses in the same way.
GPI/TLY :SELECT : COLOR :
TLY COL : =MEPGM: =RED :
: 1/1
:
The Tally Color settings made in this menu are shared with those for the GPI/TALLY OUT
connectors, TALLY OUT connector (HVS-30TALR) and Tally Units.
23-2-2. Tally Output Settings (GPI/TALLY OUT)
Pin assignments for the GPI/TALLY OUT Connectors are performed as shown below. See
sections 2-4-4 and 2-4-5 for the default pin assignments.
(1) Set tally colors for output buses in the [SETUP- EXT I/F-TALLY COLOR] menu. (See
section 23-2-1 "Tally Color Setting".)
(2) Select GPI OUT in the [SETUP-GPI/TLY] menu, and then press F1 or page down to
display the [SETUP - GPI/TLY - GPI OUT] menu.
(3) Turn F2 to select the pin number under P NO.
(4) Turn F3 to select a tally to be assigned under FUNCTION. (See the table "TALLY
function" below.)
(5) Set Enable to ON to enable all tally outputs of the GPI /TALLY OUT connector.
GPI/TLY :
GPI OUT :
:P NO : FUNCTION
: 1/1
: =1 : =Out:RED TALLY-IN01
165

TALLY function
FUNCTION setting
KEY1 ON TALLY
KEY2 ON TALLY
PinP1 ON TALLY
PinP2 ON TALLY
DSK1 ON TALLY
DSK2 ON TALLY
DSK3 ON TALLY
DSK4 ON TALLY
FAN ERROR ALARM
PS1 ERROR ALARM
PS2 ERROR ALARM
ALL ALARM
AUX1 to 8 TRANS ENABLE
RED TALLY-BLACK
RED TALLY-IN01 to 24
RED TALLY-STIL1 to 4
RED TALLY-STILK
RED TALLY-MATT1 to 2
RED TALLY-ME PGM
RED TALLY-ME PREV
RED TALLY-ME CLN
RED TALLY-PP PGM
RED TALLY-PP PREV
RED TALLY-PP CLN
GREEN TALLY-BLACK
GREEN TALLY-IN01 to 24
GREEN TALLY-STIL1 to 4
GREEN TALLY-STILK
GREEN TALLY-MATT1 to 2
GREEN TALLY-ME PGM
GREEN TALLY-ME PREV
GREEN TALLY-ME CLN
GREEN TALLY-PP PGM
GREEN TALLY-PP PREV
GREEN TALLY-PP CLN
Description
Outputs tally signal when KEY is on the background
video.
Outputs tally signal when PinP is on the background
video.
Outputs tally signal when DSK is on the background
video.
Outputs fan alarm.
Outputs power alarm
Outputs an alarm if any malfunction occurs.
Outputs during the AUX transition.
Outputs a red tally when the specified signal is sent to
the red (tally color) bus.
Outputs a green tally when the specified signal is sent to
the green (tally color) bus.
166
Tally Control Example
The setting example in the table below shows how to make tally settings in the following
conditions. Pins1-8 send on-air tallies and Pins 9-16send Next tallies.
Conditions
RED tally is used to indicate On-Air (M/E PGM bus).
GREEN tally is used to indicate a next background signal (M/E PST bus).
Pins1-8 output RED tallies for IN01-IN08 respectively.
Pins 9-16 output GREEN tallies for IN01-IN08 respectively.
Menu Setting
Menu
Items
SELECT
TALLY
COLOR
SELECT
Setting
M/E PGM
M/E PST
Item
COLOR
COLOR
P NO
1 to 8
FUNCTION
P NO
9 to 16
FUNCTION
GPI OUT
167
Setting
RED
GREEN
RED TALLY IN01 to RED TALLY IN08
(default setting)
GREEN TALLY IN01 to GREEN TALLY
IN08
23-2-3. Tally Output Settings (HVS-30TALR)
Up to two cards of HVS-30TALR (Tally Output Expansion Card) can be installed to the
HVS-350HS. Each card has 18 channels, therefore up to 36 channels (two cards) available
for tally output. See section 2-4-6 "TALLY OUT Connector (HVS-30TALR)" for the default pin
assignments of the connector.
Selecting Tally Color for an Output Bus
See section 23-2-1 "Tally Color Setting". The Tally Color settings made in this menu are
shared with those for the GPI/TALLY OUT connectors, TALLY OUT connector (HVS-30TALR)
and Tally Units.
Setting Pin Assignments for TALLY OUT connector
(1) Press the page up or down button to return to the [SETUP-GPI/TLY] menu.
(2) Open the [SETUP-GPI/TLY- 30TALR] menu.
SETUP
:>TLY COL >GPI IN >GPI OUT>OU GPI/O
GPI/TLY :>TALLY1 >TALLY2 >TALLY3 >30TALR
GPI/TLY :ENABLE :P NO : FUNCTION
: 1/1
30TALR : =ON
: =1-1: =Out:RED TALLY-IN01
(3) Turn F2 to select a channel under P NO.
Channels are specified as follows: [Card number]-[Channel number]. For example, "1-10"
represents the 10th channel of Card 1. See "Card Number of HVS-30TALR" below.
(4) Turn F3 to select a tally to be assigned under FUNCTION. See the table "TALLY
function." (p166)
(5) Set Enable to ON to enable all tally outputs of the TALLY OUT connector.
NOTE
The HVS-30TALR cards can send GPI outputs. To output GPI signals, select the
desired GPI function under FUNCTION. See section 23-1-2 "GPI OUT" for details.

Card Number of HVS-30TALR
The card number, Card1 or Card2, is chosen by the internal dip switch (DS1) on the
HVS-30TALR card.
If set to Card1:
DS1-1: ON
DS1-2: OFF
DS1
If set to Card2:
DS1-1: OFF
DS1-2: ON
HVS-30TALR card
* DS1-3 to DS1-8 are all set to OFF, do not change the settings.
168
23-2-4. Sending Tally Signals to Tally Units
Up to three tally units can be connected. This section explains how to set up TALLY1 (the tally
unit 1) as an example.
Selecting Tally Color for an Output Bus
See section 23-2-1 "Tally Color Setting". The Tally Color settings made in this menu are
shared with those for the GPI/TALLY OUT connectors, TALLY OUT connector (HVS-30TALR)
and the Tally Units.
Setting Pin Assignments for TALLY1
(1) Press the page up or down button to return to the [SETUP-GPI/TLY] menu.
(2) Open the [SETUP-GPI/TLY- TALLY1] menu.
SETUP
:>TLY COL >GPI IN >GPI OUT>OU GPI/O
GPI/TLY :>TALLY1 >TALLY2 >TALLY3 >30TALR
(3) Turn F2 to select the pin number under P NO.
(4) Turn F3 to select a tally to be assigned under FUNCTION. See the table "TALLY function"
(p166).
(5) Set other pin assignments in the same way.
(6) Turn F1 to set ON. This activates all tallies in TALLY1.
GPI/TLY :ENABLE: P NO : FUNCTION
: 1/1
TALLY1 : =ON : =1-01: =Out:RED TALLY-IN01
The setting procedure for other tally units is the same as for TALLY1. See the
HVS-TALOC/TALR 20/32 operation manual for details about tally connection and operation.
Connection Settings with Tally Units (RS-422 port setting)
Up to three tally units are connected in series to the switcher via RS-422 connector. The
connection settings with Tally Units are made in the menu as shown below.
(1) Open the [SETUP- SYSTEM -RS-422] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select PORT2.
(3) Turn F2 to select TALLY. Set the parity to EVEN. The baud rate is automatically set
according to the tally unit.
SYSTEM
RS-422
:SELECT :FUNC
:BAUDRAT:PARITY : 1/1
: =PORT2: =TALLY: =38400: =EVEN :
(4) Restart HVS-350HS. (See section 22-1. "Rebooting System.")
169
24. VTR / VDCP Control
The switcher can control video tape or video disk recorders via RS-422 using the VTR or VDCP
protocol. Up to 4 channels are available. Connect a device to a desired RS-422 port, configure the
port and select a channel for VTR or VDCP following the procedures in this chapter.

System Configuration Example
1) Connect HVS-350HS to a VTR using an RS-422 port and configure the port. (See section 24-1.)
2) Assign a VTR channel to the RS-422 port. (See section 24-2.)
3) Control the VTR using the VTR/VDCP menu (see section 24-4) or using USER buttons (see
section 24-5).
VTR
RS-422
HVS-350HS
2
1
AC 10 0V - 24 0V 50 /60 Hz IN
AC10 0 - 240 V 50 /60Hz IN
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A CE
B D F
1
2
4
3
I/O
5
6
7
8
SDI IN PUT
PG M
PGM
M/E
P/P
1
3
2
4
5
ED ITOR
LA N
GPI I N
G PI/ TALLY OU T
1
TO O U
HVS-350OU
2
RS-422
REF IN
CPU/GE NLOCK
6
AU X
RE F OUT
GENLOCK
3
4
RS-422
Controlling VTR using
the VTR/VDCP menu.
75Ωtermination
MEMORY
WIPE
MENU
ALARM
3
4
EVENT
SEQUENCE
COPY/SWAP
SEQEDIT
INC
7
COPY
SWAP
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
8
FILE
DEC
4
5
9
6
INS
POWER1
1
2
USER BUTTON
2D DVE
USER BUTTON
CONTROL
USB MEMORY
PAGE
KEY1
POWER2
F1
F2
1
2
F4
F3
3
4
5
6
7
AUX
8
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
+/-
1
2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
DSK3
CLEAR
0
RECALL
STOP
COPY
PASTE
DSK4
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT / KEYPAD
Controlling VTR using user buttons
24-1. Assigning a VTR or VDCP Channel to an RS-422 Port
At first assign a VTR or VDCP channel to an RS-422 port as shown below.
(1) Press the MENU control button above the KEYPAD, and then press SETUP to display the
[SETUP] top menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select SYSTEM. Press F1 or the page down button to go to the [SETUP SYSTEM] menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select RS-422. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP –
SYSTEM- RS-422] menu.
(4) Turn F1 to select a desired RS-422 port. Then turn F2 to select a VTR channel (VTR1-4) or
VDCP channel (VDCP1-4).
SYSTEM
RS-422
:SELECT :FUNC
:BAUD
:PARITY
: =PORT1 : =VTR1: =38400: =ODD
(5) Change BAUDRATE and PARITY using F3 or F4, if needed.
170
: 1/1
:
24-2. Selecting a VTR or VDCP Channel
(1) Open the [SETUP- EXT I/F –VTR/VDCP] menu.
SETUP
:>EDITOR
EXT I/F :
>TSL/TLY >VTR/VDCP >ROUTER
(2) Select a VTR (VTR1 to VTR4) or VDCP (VDCP1 to VDCP4) channel under SELECT.
EXT I/F :SELECT
VTR/VDCP:=VTR1
:
:
STOP:00:00:00:00 : 1/4
DRCT REC=ON
:
EXT I/F :SELECT
VTR/VDCP:=VDCP1
:
:
STOP:00:00:00:00 : 1/7
DRCT REC=ON
:
(3) When the connection to the device is established, the device status and the current time
code value will be displayed
24-3. Selecting the VDCP Type
Select a type when connecting to a VDCP device.
(1) Open the [SETUP- EXT I/F –VTR/VDCP] menu and go to PAGE 6.
EXT I/F :
MODEL
VTR/VDCP: =Mira
:
:
: 6/7
:
(2) Turn F1 to select the VDCP model type. (See the table below.)
MODEL setting
Mira
HVS-5ECD
Clip N Key
Description
Abekas Mira Servers
FOR-A HVS-5ECD
Crystal Vision's Clip N Key
Unavailable menu items and commands when working with Clip N Key:
STEP-R and STEP-F >> See 24-4.
CLIP ID setting. CLIP ID is automatically set when creating a new clip.
>> See 24-6-5.
REC DURATION setting. Stop recording manually. >> See 24-6-5.
171
24-4. Playback and Recording
Four pages of the [VTR/VDCP] menu contain the following control commands.
Item
1/4 SELECT
DRCT REC
(DIRECT REC)
2/4 STOP
F1 - F4 control
F1
Turn
Description
Selects a VTR or VDCP channel for control.
F3
Turn
Sets DIRECT REC mode to ON or OFF.
F1
F2+
F3
Press
Stops the device operation.
Starts recording by pressing F3 while holding down F2
Press
when DIRCT REC is Off.
REC
Starts recording by pressing F2 when DIRECT REC is
F2
Press
ON.
Starts playback.
PLAY/PAUSE
F3
Press
Pauses playback while playing back video.
Rewinds or fast-forwards tapes or other video storage
F4
Press
media.
REW/FF
F4
Turn
Switches between REW and FF.
3/4 CUE UP
Cues up to a location specified by time code value.
F1
Press
Set the time code value in the following way.
1) Press F3 to enable TC Input mode.
2)
Enter a value by turning F3 or using the keypad.
Press &
The time code for CUE UP should be set in hh/mm/ss/ff
turn
format.
TC Input
F3
3) Press F3 to set the time code.
Increases or decreases the time code value in a
per-frame basis by turning F3 without pressing F3
Turn
beforehand, if time code is already set.
4/4
F1
Press
Changes the device to shuttle mode.
SHTL
F2
Turn
Selects the shuttle mode speed.
F2
Press
Changes the device to variable mode.
VAR
F2
Turn
Selects the variable mode speed.
STEP-R
F3
Press
Reverses the current time code by one frame.
STEP-F
F4
Press
Advances the current time code by one frame.
* VTR control does not support CTL timecode. TC display, CUE UP, STEP-R, and STEP-F do
not work properly if the connected device uses CTL timecode.
24-5. Assigning Functions to User Buttons
The following VTR/VDCP functions can be assigned to user buttons.
VTR/VDCP menu shortcut
Channel Enable / Disable
VTR1 SELECT
VDCP1 SELECT
VTR2 SELECT
VDCP2 SELECT
VTR3 SELECT
VDCP3 SELECT
VTR4 SELECT
VDCP4 SELECT
VTR commands
REW, PLAY/PAUSE, FWD, STOP, REC, STEP FWD and STEP REW
VDCP commands
REW, PLAY/PAUSE, FWD, STOP, REC, STEP FWD, STEP REW
MARK IN and MARK OUT
See section 21. "USER Button" for details on assigning functions to user buttons.
172
24-6. VDCP Operation
In addition to the commands listed in section 24-4. "Playback and Recording", the switcher can
obtain video information (Clips) from the CLIP List stored in the connected VDCP device and
edit the data. Apart from Clips in the VDCP device, the switcher can store two Playlists, in which
the switcher's own information such as IN and OUT points are contained.
Each Playlist contains the following information.
CLIP ID (ID of the selected Clip stored in the connected device.)
IN point, OUT point and Duration values
The following operations are available:
Operation
Creating Playlists
Specifying an IN-point and OUT-point for trimming
Jumping to an IN-point
Jumping to an OUT-point
Jumping to a location specified by time code
Changing CLIP ID (CLIP ID in the connected device is also changed.)
Deleting Clips (They are also deleted from the connected device.)
Copying and clearing Playlists
Refer to
24-6-1
24-6-2
24-6-3
24-6-4
The switcher can create new Clips (see section 24-6-5).
Note that some VDCP devices may not support all commands available on the switcher.
In such a case, they cannot execute unsupported commands from the switcher.
24-6-1. Creating Playlists

Selecting a Playlist
(1) Display the [SETUP- EXT I/F –VTR/VDCP] menu.
(2) Press the page down button to go to Page 5.
(3) Select 1 (Playlist 1) or 2 (Playlist 2) under SELECT.
EXT I/F :SELECT :
:FUNC
: 5/7
VTR/VDCP:=1
:>ID SET:>TC SET: >COPY :

Selecting a CLIP ID for the Playlist
(1) Press F2 in Page 5 of the [SETUP- EXT I/F - VTR/VDCP] menu to display the [CLIP]
menu.
EXT I/F :SELECT :
:FUNC
: 5/7
VTR/VDCP:=1
:>ID SET:>TC SET: >COPY :
(2) The [CLIP] menu will display the Clip List stored in the connected device. Turn F1 to
select the CLIP ID of the desired Clip from the list and then press F1.
VTR/VDCP:CLIP0001
CLIP
:CLIP0002
:CLIP0003
:CLIP0004
:CLIP0005
:
|
:
: 1/1
:>RENAME :>CANCEL :
:
:
Select a CLIP ID from the
CLIP List. (Up to 30 entries
:
can be displayed.)
:
173
(3) Once a CLIP ID is selected, the display automatically returns to the previous menu. Check
that the selected CLIP ID is displayed in the upper row. To cancel the operation, press F4.
EXT I/F :SELECT :CLIP0001
:FUNC
: 5/7
VTR/VDCP:=1
:>ID SET:>TC SET: >COPY :

Setting IN and OUT points
IN / OUT points for the Clip can be set and stored in Playlists.
(1) Go to Page 5 of the [VTR/VDCP] menu. Turn F3 to select TC SET and then press F3 to
display the [TC SET] menu.
EXT I/F :SELECT :
:FUNC
: 5/7
VTR/VDCP:=1
:>ID SET:>TC SET: >COPY :
(2) Turn F1 to select IN or OUT.
VTR/VDCP:00:00:01:00 (STOP/00:05:00:00) : 1/2
TC SET :>IN
:>SET
:>CUE UP : >OK : L=1
VTR/VDCP:00:00:20:00 (STOP/00:05:00:00) : 1/2
TC SET :>OUT
:>SET
:>CUE UP : >OK : L=1
(3) Enter a time code- value for an IN or OUT point to the right in the upper row of the menu
display. There are 3 methods of input. (See the table below.) The current status and time
code are displayed to the right in the menu.
Input method
Copy and paste the
F1
current time code.
(MARK IN/MARK OUT)
Adjust time code on a
F2
per-frame basis
Enter time code using
F2
the keypad
Press
Turn
Press
Description
Press F1. The current time code is copied into the
time code field.
Turn F2 to increase or decrease the time code on
a per-frame basis.
Press F2. When the lights in the keypad turn on,
enter the value. Press ENTER to apply the
setting.
(4) After settings are complete, press F4 to return to the previous menu.
Pressing F3 (CUE UP) can jump to the specified time code position. This is convenient
for checking IN or OUT point images.

Checking the Playlist Data
Press the page down button to go to Page 2 of the [TC SET] menu.
This menu displays the Playlist data: IN point, OUT point, current time code, duration and
playlist number.
VTR/VDCP:IN /00:00:01:00 TC /00:00:05:00: 2/2
TC SET :OUT/00:00:20:00 DUR/00:00:10:00: L=1
174
24-6-2. Jumping to an IN or OUT point or a Specified Position

Selecting a Playlist
(1) Display Page 5 of the [SETUP- EXT I/F - VTR/VDCP] menu.
(2) Set 1 or 2 under SELECT to select Playlist 1 or 2.
EXT I/F :SELECT :
:FUNC
: 5/7
VTR/VDCP:=1
:>ID SET:>TC SET: >COPY :

Jumping to Specified Positions
(1) Turn F3 to select TC SET, then press F3 to display the [TC SET] menu.
(2) Set a time code value.
-Turn F1 to select IN (or OUT). The current setting is displayed in the menu upper row.
-Press F2 and then enter a time code value. See Step (3) in the previous page for details
on entering time codes.
(3) Press F3 (CUE UP) to jump to an IN or OUT point.
VTR/VDCP:00:00:01:00 (STOP/00:05:00:00) : 1/2
TC SET :>IN
:>SET
:>CUE UP : >OK : L=1
(4) Press F4 (OK) to return to the previous menu.
24-6-3. Changing CLIP ID and Deleting Clips

Changing CLIP ID
(1) Press F2 in Page 5 of the [SETUP- EXT I/F - VTR/VDCP] menu to display the CLIP menu.
EXT I/F :SELECT :
:FUNC
: 5/7
VTR/VDCP:=1
:>ID SET:>TC SET: >COPY :
(2) The CLIP menu displays the Clip List stored in the connected device.
Turn F1 to select a CLIP ID of the desired CLIP and then press F1.
VTR/VDCP:CLIP0001
CLIP
:CLIP0002
:
: 1/1
:>RENAME :>CANCEL :
(3) Turn F3 to select RENAME. Then press F3 to enter RENAME mode.
VTR/VDCP:CLIP0001
CLIP
:CLIP0002
:
: 1/1
:>RENAME :>CANCEL :
(4) Turn F1 to select a position in the name string, and then turn F2 to select a character to be
changed. In the same way, set a new name on a per-character basis. Press F3 to apply
the new name. Up to 8 alphanumeric characters can be used.

Deleting Clips
(1) Refer to above "Changing CLIP ID" to select a Clip.
(2) Turn F3 to select DELETE and then press F3.
VTR/VDCP:CLIP0001
CLIP
:CLIP0002
:
: 1/1
:>DELETE :>CANCEL :
(3) Turn F2 to select OK. Then press F2 to delete the Clip. The Clip in the connected device
is also deleted. To cancel the operation, select CNCL and press F3.
175
24-6-4. Copying and Clearing Playlists

Clearing Playlists
(1) Display Page 5 of the [SETUP- EXT I/F - VTR/VDCP] menu.
(2) Set 1 or 2 under SELECT to select Playlist 1 or 2.
(3) Turn F4 to select CLEAR, then press F4.
EXT I/F :SELECT :
:FUNC
: 5/7
VTR/VDCP:=1
:>ID SET:>TC SET: >CLEAR:
(4) Turn F3 to select YES. Then press F3 to clear the playlist data. To cancel the operation,
select NO and press F3.

Copying Data between two Playlists
(1) Display Page 5 of the [SETUP- EXT I/F - VTR/VDCP] menu.
(2) Set 1 or 2 under SELECT to select Playlist 1 or 2 for copying data.
(3) Turn F4 to select COPY, and then press F4.
EXT I/F :SELECT :
:FUNC
: 5/7
VTR/VDCP:=1
:>ID SET:>TC SET: >COPY :
(4) Turn F1 to select a destination (Playlist 1 or 2) for copying.
EXT I/F :SELECT :
:FUNC
: 5/7
VTR/VDCP:=2
:>ID SET:>TC SET: >PASTE:
(5) Turn F4 to select PASTE, and then press F4. The data is copied from one playlist to the
other.
24-6-5. Creating New Clips (Recording using VDCP)
Recording video and creating new Clips are possible. They are stored in the connected
device. To create a new clip, proceed as follows:
(1) Display Page 7 of the [SETUP- EXT I/F - VTR/VDCP] menu.
(2) Press F3 to change to ID input mode.
(3)To enter a new CLIP ID, set a character for each cell: Turn F3 to select the first cell and
then turn F4 to select a character for it. Repeat this process until the new ID is set. Press
F3 to apply the new ID.
EXT I/F :REC DURATION :ID:NEW0001
VTR/VDCP:=00:00:15:00 :>RENAME
:REC
: 7/7
:
(4) To set recording duration, turn F1 to enter values. The procedure for setting durations is
almost the same as that for setting time codes (See section 24-6-1. "Creating Playlists".).
EXT I/F :REC DURATION :ID:NEW0001
VTR/VDCP:=00:00:15:00 :>RENAME
:REC
: 7/7
:
(5) Press F4 to start recording, if DIRECT REC is set to ON.
Press F4 while holding down F1 to start recording, if DIRECT REC is set to OFF.
EXT I/F :REC DURATION :ID:NEW0001
VTR/VDCP:=00:00:15:00 :>RENAME
:REC
176
: 7/7
:

Setting DIRECT REC to ON or OFF
(1) Press the page up button to go to Page 1 of the [VTR/VDCP] menu.
(2) Turn F4 to set DIRECT REC to ON or OFF.
EXT I/F :SELECT
VTR/VDCP:=VDCP1
:
:
(STOP:00:00:00:00): 1/7
DRCT REC=ON
:
177
25. Connecting to FOR-A MFR Series Router
The switcher can connect and control a FOR-A MFR series routing switcher. Router crosspoint
switches can be performed on the switcher's control panel by assigning the router control to a user
button.
In addition to the router control, video titles on the router can be handed to the switcher. If the
switcher accepts video signals from the router and their title links (MFR link) are enabled, Video
names on the switcher control panel are changed in accordance with crosspoint switches on the
router. When an MFR series is connected to the switcher, router control commands and title data
can be transferred through a single RS-422 connection. Refer to the MFR series router manual for
details on router settings.
Manageable number of sources, destinations and levels are:
Level
16
Source
1,024
Destination
256
Connect an MFR series to an RS-422 port (from 1 to 4) on the HVS-350HS using an RS-422
straight-through cable. Then configure the RS-422 port for the router control. Crosspoint switches
can be performed by using a user button, AUX1-8 and KEY/AUX bus buttons.

System Example
Router
(MFR-5000)
Routing
Camera
Camera
Video
server
IN
01
02
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
16
OUT
01
02
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
16
HVS-350HS
IN
01
02
|
|
|
08
To other devices
PREV
PGM
To other devices
Multiviewer (UMD)
IN
01
02
|
|
16
Title
links
MFR
(Receive)
See 23-1
RS-422
M/E PREV
M/E PGM
RS-422 1
RS-422 3
Title
& Tally
links
OUT
01
02
RS-422
TSL (Send)
See 23-3-1.
Router control
See 23-2.
GPI/TALLY OUT
Arcnet
Tally Output
(See. 21-2)
178
HVS-350HS OU
25-1. Assigning Router Channel to RS-422 port
25-1-1. Assigning Router Control Function
(1) Open the [SETUP-SYSTEM-RS-422] menu.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
(2) Turn F1 to select an RS-422 port for router control.
(3) Select ROUTER under FUNC.
(4) Set BAUD (baudrate) to 57600 and PARITY to NONE.
SYSTEM
RS-422
:SELECT :FUNC
:BAUD
:PARITY
: =PORT1 :=ROUTER: =57600: =NONE
: 1/1
:
(5) After settings are complete, reboot the switcher. (See section 22-1. "Rebooting System".)
25-1-2. Setting MFR Link
When the title link display is set to ON, the switcher accepts video titles with video signals
from a router and displays them on the control panel in accordance with crosspoint switches
on the router.
(1) Open the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (6/6) menu.
EXT I/F : LINK
ROUTER : =MFR
: CHARA :SELECT :DISPLAY: 6/6
: =SHORT: =IN01 : =ON
:
(2) Turn F1 to select MFR and then press F1.
(3) Turn F2 to select a name link type from SHORT, LONG and BOTH. Both types of names
are stored in the HVS-350HS.
(4) Title link should be set respectively for each video. First, turn F3 to select a video, then
turn F4 to set the title link display to ON or OFF.
25-2. Router Control
25-2-1. Crosspoint Switches using the Menu
To execute the following commands:
Select a router level.
Connect Source channel 2 to Destination channel 1.
Connect Source channel 4 to Destination channel 2.
Proceed as follows:
(1) Display the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (2/6) menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select a level. Press F1 or press ENTER on the keypad to confirm the setting.
(3) Turn F2 to select 1 under DEST (destination). The currently connected source is
displayed under SRC (source).
(4)Turn F3 to select 2, and then press F3 to switch the source. The HVS-350HS sends the
crosspoint switch command to the router.
(5) The switcher displays 2 under SRC after having received a successful response from the
router.
179
EXT I/F : LEVEL : DEST
ROUTER : =1
: =1
: SRC
: =2
:
:
: 2/6
:
(6) In the same way, select 2 under DEST and 4 under SRC.
EXT I/F : LEVEL : DEST
ROUTER : =1
: =2
: SRC
: =4
:
:
: 2/6
:
25-2-2. Crosspoint Switches with Bus Buttons (Setup)
Crosspoint switches on the control panel are possible using a user button, AUX buttons (1-8)
in the BUS SELECT block and the KEY/AUX bus buttons. Before switching crosspoints,
these buttons should be set for controlling a router.

Assigning the Router Control ON/OFF function to a User button
(1) Press USER BUTTON on the keypad to display the [USER BUTTON] menu.
(2) Select a desired user button under SELECT. The selected button will blink.
(3) Select OTHER under TYPE. Press F2 or ENTER on the keypad to confirm the selection.
(4) Turn F3 to select ROUTER ENABLE, and then press F3. The user button allows you to
enable or disable the router control buttons (AUX1 to AUX8 in the BUS SELECT block
and the KEY/AUX bus buttons).
USER
BUTTON
:SELECT: TYPE : FUNC(F3)
: =OU-1: =OTHER: =ROUTER ENABLE

Assigning Destinations and Sources to Buttons
(1) Open the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (1/6) menu.
(2) Select a button under DST BTN from AUX1 to AUX8.
(3) Select a destination channel to be assigned to the button.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) to assign destinations to other buttons.
EXT I/F :DST BTN:DST CH :SRC BTN:SRC CH : 1/6
ROUTER : =1
: =1
: =1
: =1
:
(5) Select a button on the KEY/AUX bus under SRC BTN.
(6) Select a source channel to be assigned to the button.
(7) Repeat steps (5) and (6) to assign sources to other buttons.
EXT I/F :DST BTN:DST CH :SRC BTN:SRC CH : 1/6
ROUTER : =1
: =1
: =1
: =1
:

Selecting a Level
(1) Open the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (2/6) menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select a level under LEVEL.
EXT I/F : LEVEL : DEST
ROUTER : =1
: =1
: SRC
: =1
180
:
:
: 2/6
:
25-2-3. Crosspoint Switches using the Bus Buttons

Assume that router functions are assigned to the router control buttons as shown
in the table below.
Router control ON/OFF
USER 1 on the control panel
Destination channels 1 to 8
AUX 1 to AUX 8
Source channels 1 to 8
KEY/AUX bus buttons 1 to 8
To execute the following commands:
Connect Source channel 2 to Destination channel 1.
Connect Source channel 4 to Destination channel 2.
Proceed as follows:
(1) Press USER1 to enable the router control buttons.
(2) Press AUX1 to select Destination 1. The source channel button currently connected to
Destination 1 will light up orange.
(3) Press 2 on the KEY/AUX bus to change the source channel to 2. The HVS-350HS sends
the crosspoint switch command to the router. The bus button 2 on the KEY/AUX will turn
orange after having received a successful response from the router.
ALARM
POWER1
1
2
USER BUTTON
1
2
1
KEYER
2
1
2
P IN P
3
PAGE
POWER2
F1
4
F2
1
2
F4
F3
3
4
5
6
7
8
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
19
20
AUX
DSK
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
M/E
P/P
KEY/AUX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
(4) In the same way, press AUX2, and then press 4 on the KEY/AUX bus.
25-2-4. Displaying Destination / Source Settings
The switcher can obtain and display the current destination / source settings (crosspoints) on
the router as in the procedure below.
(1) Open the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (4/6) menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select a level.
EXT I/F : LEVEL : XPT
ROUTER : =1
: >
:PRESET :
: >
:
: 4/6
:
(3) Press F2. The current crosspoint pairs (Destination - Source) on the router are listed as
shown below: up to 6 pairs can be displayed per menu page. Use the page up or down
button to move among pages.
ROUTER
XPT
:
:
1-1
4-4
7-7
10-10
|
2-2
5-5
8-8
11-11
|
3-3 :
: 1/XX
6-6 : >BACK :
9-9
12-12
|
181
25-2-5. Saving and Loading Crosspoints
A set of all crosspoints (destination and source pairs) on the router can be saved to and
loaded from the switcher.

Saving Crosspoints
(1) Open the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (5/6) menu.
EXT I/F : LOAD
ROUTER : >
:SAVE
: >
:
:
: 5/6
:
(2) Press F2. The switcher will start to store the data and the message "DATA SAVING" is
displayed on the display.
EXT I/F : LOAD
ROUTER : >
:SAVE
:
DATA SAVING
: >
:
: 5/6
:
(3) After saving is complete, the message "COMPLETED" is displayed.

Loading Crosspoints
(1) Open the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (5/6) menu.
(2) Press F1 to load the crosspoints from the memory. The message "DATA LOADING" is
displayed during processing.
EXT I/F : LOAD
ROUTER : >
:SAVE
:
DATA LOADING
: >
:
: 5/6
:
(3) After loading is complete, the message "COMPLETED" is displayed.
182
25-2-6. Salvo Switching
Salvo switching allows the user to switch multiple crosspoints (destination/source pairs)
simultaneously using stored crosspoint data. The switcher can manage only one salvo.

Setting Crosspoints for a Salvo
(1) Open the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (3/6) menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select a level.
(3) Turn F2 to select a destination channel. If a source to be paired has been set, the source
channel number is displayed.
(4) Turn F3 to select a desired source and then press F3 to save the destination / source pair
to the salvo.
(5) The source setting under SRC is applied, after the salvo settings on the router have been
changed.
EXT I/F : LEVEL : DEST
ROUTER : =1
: =1
: SRC
: =2
: SALVO : 3/6
: >EXEC :
(6) Repeat steps (3) and (4) to set all destination / source pairs to be saved to the salvo.

Executing the Salvo
(1) In the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (3/6) menu, turn F4 to select EXEC.
(2) Press F4 to execute the salvo.
EXT I/F : LEVEL : DEST
ROUTER : =1
: =1
: SRC
: =2
: SALVO : 3/6
: >EXEC :

Displaying Crosspoints in the Salvo
(1) Open the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (4/6) menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select a level.
EXT I/F : LEVEL : XPT
ROUTER : =1
: >
:PRESET :
: >
:
: 4/6
:
(3) Turn F3. The crosspoints stored in the salvo are displayed. To move among menu pages,
use the page up and down buttons.
ROUTER
XPT
:
:
1-1
4-4
7-7
10-10
|
2-2
5-5
8-8
11-11
|
3-3 :
: 1/XX
6-6 : >BACK :
9-9
12-12
|

Clearing the Salvo
(1) In the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (3/6) menu, turn F4 to select CLEAR.
(2) Press F4 to clear the salvo settings.
183
25-3. Linking Titles by Sending TSL messages
25-3-1. TSL Tally
The switcher's TSL tally function uses the TSL protocol (developed by Television Systems
Ltd.) and allows users to send tally information to TSL devices as shown in the procedure
below. To set up external devices, see their manual pages.

Connecting to External Devices (RS-422 Setting)
Use an RS-422 cable to connect HVS-350HS and an external device. Connect the cable to
an RS-422 port (Port1 to 4) on HVS-350HS.
(1) Display the [SETUP-SYSTEM- RS-422] menu.
(2) Select TSL for the RS-422 port for use.
(3) Set PARITY to EVEN and BAUD (Baud rate) to 38400. (These settings vary depending
on external devices.)
SYSTEM
RS-422
:SELECT :FUNC
: =PORT3: =TSL
:BAUDRAT:PARITY : 1/1
: =38400: =EVEN :
(4) After all changes are complete, reboot the MU to apply the changes. (See section 22-1.
Rebooting System."

Connection Example using TSL's Tally
The following diagram shows how video titles of IN01-08 are handed over and their tally data
are transferred. To configure a system like this, follow the below procedure.
Router
IN
01
|
|
|
|
|
|
16
OUT
01
|
|
Video
|
titles
|
|
|
16
RS-422
IN
01
02
|
08
IN
01
|
|
|
|
|
I
16
HVS-350HS
Video
titles
RS-422 2
RS-422 3
PREV
PGM
Multiviewer
(UMD)
OUT
01
02
Video
titles
& Tallies
RS-422
To other devices
* The above example assumes that same signals are sent to both HVS-350HS (IN01-08)
and the Multiviewer (IN01-08).
To use the TSL tally information of IN01 and IN02 in the connection example above, set up
TSL tally as shown below.
(1) Display the [SETUP-EXT I/F-TSL TLY] menu.
(2) Select IN01 for DISP1 (DISPLAY1).
FUNCTION:DISP
TSL TLY : =1
:SIGNAL :TALLY
:=IN01 : =ON
:
:
: 1/1
:
(3) Select IN02 for DISP1 (DISPLAY1).
(4) Set for IN03 to IN08 in the same way.
(5) Turn F3 to set TSL tally to ON. Video titles on the multiviewer display are changed in
accordance with the Router's crosspoint switches and tally indications on the multiviewer
display are changed in accordance with the HVS-350HS transitions.
184
26. Connecting to Routers
The switcher can also connect to a router other than FOR-A MFR series routers.
The router control is based on the HARRIS Pass-Through protocol.
To connect a router other than an MFR series router, two RS-422 interfaces, one for
controlling the router and the other for receiving TSL protocol, are required.
26-1. Assigning a Router Channel to an RS-422 port
(1) Display the [SETUP-SYSTEM-RS-422] menu.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
(2) Turn F1 to select a port for connecting a router.
(3) Select ROUTER under FUNC.
(4) Set BAUD (baudrate) to 57600 and PARITY to NONE. (These settings may vary depeding
on routers. Refer to your router's User Manual.)
SYSTEM
RS-422
:SELECT :FUNC
:BAUD
:PARITY
: =PORT1 :=ROUTER: =57600: =NONE
: 1/1
:
(5) Reboot the switcher after settings are complete. (See section 22-1. "Rebooting System".)
26-2. Router Control
The router can be controlled in the same way as described for MFR series routers. See section
25-2. "Router Control."
26-3. Linking Titles and Tallies in the System via TSL Protocol
Router
TSLRx
(Receive)
See 26-3-1.
HVS-350HS
Multiviewer
(UMD)
Video titles
Video titles
& Tallies
RS-422
RS-422 2
RS-422 3
RS-422
RS-422 1
RS-422 4
RS-422
TSL
(Send)
See 25-3-1.
Router control
See 25-2.
185
26-3-1. Linking Titles in the System by Receiving TSL messages
The switcher can accept video titles with video signals from a router and display them on the
control panel in accordance with crosspoint switches on the router using TSL protocol. To do
this, in addition to the router control connection, another serial connection for TSL protocol is
needed.
To configure title links, connect a router to an RS-422 port (from 1 to 4) on the HVS-350HS
using an RS-422 cable. Then configure the RS-422 port as in the procedure below. Refer to
your router's User Manual for how to set up the router.

Assigning TSL to the RS-422 port
(1) Display the [SETUP-SYSTEM-RS-422] menu.
(2) Select TSLRx for the RS-422 port used for TSL connection to the router.
(3) To configure the port, set PARITY to EVEN, and BAUD (baudrate) to 38400. (The
settings may vary depending on routers.)
SYSTEM
RS-422
:SELECT : FUNC : BAUD :PARITY : 1/1
: =PORT2: =TSLRx: =38400: =EVEN :
(4) Reboot the switcher after settings are complete. (See section 22-1. "Rebooting System".)

Setting Title Links
(1) Display the [SETUP-EXT I/F-ROUTER] (6/6) menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select TSL, and then press F1.
(3) Turn F2 to select the type of names on the switcher linked to the video titles on the router:
SHORT, LONG or BOTH.
(4) To link video and display addresses, turn F3 to select a video and then turn F4 to select
an address from 1 to 127 or OFF (not linked). The links should be set for each video.
EXT I/F : LINK
ROUTER : =TSL
: CHARA :SELECT :DISPLAY: 6/6
: =SHORT: =IN01 : =1
:
26-3-2. TSL Tally by Sending TSL messages
A TSL tally connection in the system can be configured in the same way as described for the
MFR series. See section 25-3. "Linking Titles by Sending TSL messages". To set up external
devices, see their manual pages.
186
27. Audio Mixer Control
The switcher can connect and control an Audio Mixer remotely via RS-422 using ESAM II protocol.
The Audio Follow Video function is available, which allows users to set audio playback to follow
video images.
27-1. Connecting Audio Mixers
Connecting the HVS-350HS to an Audio Mixer
Use an RS-422 cable to connect HVS-350HS to an Audio Mixer. Connect the cable to an
RS-422 port (Port1 to 4) on HVS-350HS. Refer to the Audio Mixer user's manual to connect the
cable to the audio mixer.
Assigning a Audio Mixer Channel to an RS-422 port
(1) Display the [SETUP-SYSTEM-RS-422] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select an RS-422 port under SELECT.
(3) Turn F2 to set MIXER for FUNC. Press F2 to confirm the setting.
(4) Verify that PARITY is set to EVEN and BAUD to 38400. (If FUNC is set to MIXER, PARITY
and BAUD will be automatically set.)
SYSTEM
RS-422
:SELECT : FUNC : BAUD :PARITY : 1/1
: =PORT1: =MIXER: =38400: =EVEN :
(5) Restart the switcher.
27-2. Audio-Follow-Video Setting
(1) Display the [SETUP-EXT I/F] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select >AUD MXR, then press F1 to display the[AUD MXR (AUDIO MIXER)]
menu.
SETUP
:>EDITOR >TSL TLY >VTR/VDCP>ROUTER
EXT I/F :>AUD MXR
(3) Set ENABLE to ON to enable Audio-Follow-Video. (The Audio-Follow-Video ON/OFF can be
assinged to a user button.)
(4) Select a video bus between M/E and P/P under BUS.
(5) Select a video signal under SIGNAL.
(6) Select an audio (audio crosspoint) following the selected video under AUD XPT. Press F4 to
confirm the setting.
EXT I/F :ENABLE : BUS
AUD MXR : =ON
: =M/E
:SIGNAL :AUD XPT: 1/1
: =IN04 : =1
:
In the above setting example, the audio playback is set to No.1 on the Audio Mixer, when the
M/E bus signal is changed to IN04 on the switcher.
AUD XPT Setting
Setting
NONE
1-64
FLWME
Description
Audio selection is not changed, maintaining the last selection, whenever
any video signal is selected.
Audio Mixer changes audio to the specified bus, if the specified video
signal is selected.
Audio Mixer changes audio to the specified bus, if the specified video
signal is selected via Re-entry. (See the setting example in the next page.)
187
Setting Example when using Re-entry
In the following menu settings, if the M/E bus signal is changed to IN04 on the switcher, the
audio playback is changed to No.1 on the Audio Mixer.
In addition, when the P/P bus is set to FLWME for the M/E signal as shown below, the audio
playback is set to No.1 on the Audio Mixer if the M/E re-entry signal is selected on the P/P
bus and the M/E bus signal is changed to IN04,
EXT I/F :ENABLE : BUS
AUD MXR : =ON
: =M/E
:SIGNAL :AUD XPT: 1/1
: =IN04 : =1
:
EXT I/F :ENABLE : BUS
AUD MXR : =ON
: =P/P
:SIGNAL :AUD XPT: 1/1
: =M/E : =FLWME:
Default Video and Audio Assignments
Video
Audio bus
BLACK
NONE
IN01 to IN24
1 to 24
STILL1 to 4
NONE
STILLKEY
NONE
MATTE1
NONE
MATTE2
NONE
COLORBAR
NONE
M/E
NONE
188
28. Editor Control (Option)
The switcher can be controlled from an editor. See section 28-1."Editor Control Settings" for
controlling the editor and section 28-2 "Connection Settings with Editor (EDITOR port setting)" for
editor connection.
The HVS-35ED software option is required for editor control.
28-1. Editor Control Settings
(1) Open the [SETUP- EXT I/F-EDITOR] menu.
SETUP
:>EDITOR
EXT I/F :
>TSL TLY >VTR
>ROUTER
(2) Select a protocol at TYPE between DVS(SONY DVS/BVS series compatible) and GVG-K/Z.
(3) Set ENABLE to ON to enable the editor control. (The Editor Control On/Off function can be
assigned to a USER button. See section 21. "USER Button.")
FUNCTION: TYPE
EDITOR :=DVS
:ENABLE :SELECT : WIPE : 1/2
: =ON
: =ME
: =NORML:
(4) If DVS is used, the bus to be controlled from the editor must be specified. Refer to the table
below to set the bus under SELECT. If PREV, PREV ON or ALL is set, AUX1 will be the edit
preview bus and with crosspoint number is 35. Set your editor accordingly.
Setting
ME
PREV
ALL
ME ON
PREV ON
Description
Controls the M/E bus when ENABLE is ON.
Controls the preview bus when ENABLE is ON.
Controls both M/E bus and preview bus when ENABLE is ON.
Always controls the M/E bus regardless of ENABLE setting.
Controls both M/E bus and preview bus when ENABLE is ON.
Always controls the preview bus regardless of ENABLE setting.
Controls both M/E bus and preview bus when ENABLE is ON.
(5) If G-K/Z (GVG protocol) is used, select the pattern control mode between two below at WIPE.
Setting
NORMAL
LIST
Description
Same wipe pattern numbers (0-99) as in the switcher are used in the editor.
(default setting)
Ten wipe patterns saved to Direct Pattern memory are used in the editor as
Direct Pattern Nos.90-99. (GVG-Protocol only)
(6) Press the page down button to go to PAGE2.
FUNCTION:XPT CTL:WIP CTL:KEY CTL:
EDITOR : =INPUT: =ON
: =ON
:
189
: 2/2
:
(7) Select the crosspoint control mode between two below at XPT CTL.
INPUT
BUTTON
Specify a signal by using the input number from the editor. (Default setting)
Specify a signal by using the button number from the editor.
BUTTON(HVS-35OU)
Selected bus
Button number
1-40
1-40
INPUT
Input number
0
1-24
29-32
35
37-38
BUTTON(HVS-35ROU)
Selected bus
Button number
1-24
1-24
Source signal
BLACK
IN01-IN24
STILL1-4
COLOR BAR
MATT1-2
(8) Set to enable/disable the wipe pattern control under WIP CTL.
(9) Set to enable/disable the KEY control under KEY CTL. (Be careful that in this case KEY will
not turn automatically OFF when ALL STOP is received in the switcher.)
28-2. Connection Settings with Editor (EDITOR port setting)
The connection settings with an editor are made in the [SETUP - EXT-IF-RS-422] menu as
shown below.
(1) Open the [SETUP- SYSTEM -RS-422] menu.
SYSTEM
RS-422
(2) Turn
(3) Turn
(4) Turn
(5) Turn
F1
F2
F3
F4
:SELECT :FUNC
:BAUDRAT:PARITY : 1/1
: =EDITR: =EDIT : =38400: =ODD :
to select EDITR (EDITOR).
to select EDIT (EDITOR)
to select the baud rate. (It is normally not necessary to change this.)
to select the parity. (It is normally not necessary to change this.)
190
29. Network Settings
29-1. Arcnet
Connecting HVS-35OU/35ROU to the Main Unit (HVS-350HS)
For the main unit (hereafter called MU), HVS-35OU and HVS-35ROU (hereafter called OU
for both) to communicate, use the BNC cable to connect an Arcnet port on each unit. If you
want to connect other devices to the Arcnet, use the other Arcnet port of the switcher or the
control panel. If either or both of them are the last devices in the network, the other port has to
be 75 ohm-terminated. Refer to section 3-3. "How to Connect between MU and OU" for
details.
ARCNET Menu
The factory default settings for the ARCNET are shown in the table below. Change ARCNET
settings only when necessary. The settings can be made in the [SETUP-SYSTEM- ARCNET]
menu.
SYSTEM
ARCNET
: OU ID :OU NO :CTRL MU : MU ID : 1/2
: = 1
:=OU1 : =250
: =250 :
SYSTEM
ARCNET
: MU ID :
: = 250 :
Item
OU ID
CTRL MU
MU ID
: 2/2
:
Description
Sets Arcnet ID for the OU.
Selects Arcnet ID of the MU controlled by the OU.
Sets Arcnet ID for the MU.
Default setting
1
250
250
Setting range
1-255
1-255
1-255
If you are configuring one MU and OU each via ARCNET, connect them by using the BNC
connectors and leave them to their factory default-set ID numbers (250 and 1 respectively).
Turning F2 displays the accessible MU ID(s) under CTRL MU ID in the menu. Select an MU
to be controlled. If you want to disconnect the MU from the OU on the Arcnet, select --- under
CTRL MU ID.
Changing the MU ID
If you want to change the MU ID, connect the MU to the OU and disconnect other devices
from the network. Power on both MU and OU and change the MU ID. Turn the power of all
units off, re-connect the units in the system, and turn the system power back on to
re-configure the network. Note that the new ID will not be valid until the units are powered ON
again.
Notes on Network Configuration
75-ohm BNC cables (5C2V equivalent or higher) are required for ARCNET connection
ARCNET is configured as a simple Bus topology network. BNC terminators equipped with a
75-ohm resistor should be installed on both ends of a bus network segment.
Total network cable length should be less than 100 m. If more than 100 m is required, use
ARCNET hubs (up to 2).
Minimum distance between ARCNET devices is 1 m.
To connect 8 or more ARCNET devices in a network, use an ARNCET hub.
Please consult your FOR-A reseller for more information.
Adding ARCNET devices to the Arcnet LAN
If you want to connect other ARCNET devices to the MU and the OU, additional connection
cables are required and the network should be reconfigured again. Consult your FOR-A
resellers for more details.
191
Be careful not to use the same ARCNET ID for two different units. If an ARCNET ID conflict
has occurred and network communication fails, turn the unit power OFF at one of the
conflicting units and disconnect it from the network. Power on the conflicting unit and change
the ID to a valid network ID. Note that the new ID will not be valid until units are powered ON
again.
Before loading system data from an installed memory card, verify that the ARCNET ID
numbers that are currently assigned to the OU and MU for operation are the same as
those in the data being loaded. If a conflicting ARCNET ID (one assigned to another
OU or MU in the network) is applied by loading the system data, network operation will
fail after loading is complete.
29-2. Ethernet
The Ethernet connection is used for connecting HVS-35GUI, the control software connection or
transferring image data. (See section 29-3. "Image Data Transfer".)
Connecting to LAN
Use the twisted pair, Category 5 (UTP) cable (straight- through type) to connect the main unit
(MU) to LAN. If connecting the MU to a PC directly, use the cross-connect type cable.
IP Address, Net mask and Default Gateway Setting
Open the [SETUP-SYSTEM-ETHERNET] menu. The default settings for IP address, Net
mask and Default Gateway are as shown below.
SYSTEM :
IP ADDRESS
ETHERNET: =192.168.000.010
:
:
: 1/4
:
SYSTEM :
NET MASK
ETHERNET: =255.255.255.000
:
:
: 2/4
:
SYSTEM : DEFAULT GATEWAY
ETHERNET: =192.168.000.001
:
:
: 3/4
Changing IP Address, Net mask and Default Gateway
(1) Open the IP address page (or the net mask page).
(2) Press F1.
(3) The first octet (192 in the IP address example above) will be highlighted.
(4) Turn F1 to change the number.
(5) Press F1.
(6) The second octet (168 in the IP address example above) will be highlighted.
(7) Repeat (4) and (5) to change the IP address.
(8) Reboot the main unit. (See section 22-1. "Rebooting System.")
IMPORTANT
You should consult your network administrator before connecting the HVS-350 series
to a LAN network.
MAC Address
The MAC address of the network card is displayed on PAGE4.
SYSTEM :
MAC ADDRESS
:
ETHERNET: 00-00-00-00-00-00 :
192
: 4/4
:
29-3. Image Data Transfer
The HVS-350HS series can send and receive image data used for stills and video clip through
an Ethernet. The FTP protocol is used for transferring files between the switcher and the computer.
The main unit works as an FTP server.
29-3-1. Setup Before Connection
PC Requirements
An Ethernet port (100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) and FTP client function are required for the
personal computer. Any type of computer or OS can be used.
In this section a Windows XP or 7-installed PC is used as an example.
Available Image files
Image File Format: JPEG, TARGA and BITMAP (See the table below.)
Image Size:
Less than 1920x1080 [pixels]
File Name Format: (any file name).jpg, (any file name).tga and (any file name).bmp
Use the three-letter extension after the period. Any length of any
characters can be used for file names.
File Format
JPG
Description
JPEG Compression data
TGA
TARGA data
BMP
BITMAP data
Limitation (unavailable data)
Grey-scale image data
RLE compression data
Data with Alpha channel (*1)
RLE compression data
(*1) TGA with alpha channel files are available in CPU FPGA version 02-00 or later.
Still Directory Structure in the Main Unit
(Root)― +(still1)― still.jpg
Used for saving STILL1 images in JPEG, TGA and BMP
still.tga
format. To send an image file to the switcher, specify this
still.bmp
directory.
+(still2)―
still.jpg
still.tga
still.bmp
Used for saving STILL2 images in JPEG, TGA and BMP
format. To send an image file to the switcher, specify this
directory.
+(still3)―
still.jpg
still.tga
still.bmp
Used for saving STILL3 images in JPEG, TGA and BMP
format. To send an image file to the switcher, specify this
directory.
+(still4)―
still.jpg
still.tga
still.bmp
Used for saving STILL4 images in JPEG, TGA and BMP
format. To send an image file to the switcher, specify this
directory.
Network Setting
IP Address
192. 168.0.10 (default)
Subnet mask
255. 255. 255.0(default)
IP Address
Subnet mask
192. 168.0.1 to 192. 168.0.254
(Do not set the same IP as the main unit)
255. 255. 255.0
Main unit
Computer
Refer to the procedure below to open the setting dialog and change the computer network
settings, if necessary.
193
Setting the IP Address in Windows XP
Go to Start > My Network Places. Right-click My Network Places, and choose Properties.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and choose Properties. Select the Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) check box, and click Properties.
Setting the IP Address in Windows 7
Go to Start >> Control Panel >> Network and Internet >> Network and Sharing Center,
and then click Change adapter settings. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and
choose Properties. Click the Internet Protocol Version 4(TCP/IPv4) check box, and click
Properties.
NOTE
The setting example above is for connecting the computer and the main unit.
Although you can change the IP address of the main unit, normally change the IP of
the computer. See section 29-2. "Ethernet" for network setting in the main unit. If you
want to connect the computer and the switcher to the existing LAN, be sure to consult
the network administrator before connecting to the LAN and use suitable cables and
settings.
29-3-2. Sending / Receiving Still Images
(1) Connect between the Ethernet ports of PC and the Main Unit directly with a LAN
cross-over cable (UTP).
Main Unit
Computer
LAN cross-over cable (UTP)
IP address:
192.168.0.10 (default)
IP address: 192.168.0.100
(2) Click on the Start button and then click on the Control Panel option.
(3) Enable the passive mode as shown below.
(a) Click on Network and Internet (Windows 7) or Network and Internet Connection
(Windows XP), then Internet Options.
(b) Click at the Advanced tab.
(c) Click to select the Use Passive FTP (for firewall and DSL modem compatibility)
check box.
(d) Click OK.
(4) Click on the Start button and then select My Computer (XP) or Computer (7).
(5) Enter "ftp://192.168.0.10" in the address bar.
(6) A dialog appears and asks you to input username and password. Enter them as shown
below.
Username:
Password:
hvs350hs (Username cannot be changed.)
fora (Password cannot be changed.)
(7) Once you have accessed the FTP server, STILL1, STILL2, STILL3 and STILL4 folders
are displayed in the window.
NOTE
Use PING or other network commands for checking if any connection problem occurs.
194
Uploading Images to the Switcher
(1) Open the folder where your images are stored.
(2) Select the image to be uploaded and drag and drop it to STILL1 (or STILL2 to STILL4)
folder of the FTP server. It takes about 1 minute to complete receiving data. Then display
the STILL1 (or STILL2) image in the monitor by operating the switcher to check that the
still image is properly sent.
Downloading Still Images from the Switcher
Open the STILL1 (or STILL2 to STILL4) folder of the FTP server. Select an image file to be
downloaded. Drag and drop it to any folder of your computer.
29-3-3. Sending Images to Clip Memory
 Preparation
(1) Prepare sequential image files in the following name format.
File name: [STILLXXX.yyy]
XXX: Indicates Serial numbers. Available from 000 to 059
yyy: Indicates a file extension. bmp, jpg or tga
WARNING: "STILL" must be in upper case.
(2) Connect the PC to the Main Unit, referring to section 28-3-2 (1) to (6).
 Uploading Sequential Images to Clip Memory in the switcher
(1) Open the folder on the PC, in which sequential files are stored.
(2) Select all sequential files to be uploaded and drag and drop them to the root folder of the
FTP server. Data of 60 image files can be transferred in about 5 minutes.
195
30. Status Information
The STATUS menu indicates the current status of the cooling fan, power and genlock and the
versions of hardware and software.
30-1. Checking Alarm Status
(1) Open the [SETUP-STATUS] menu. Turn F1 to select ALARM, then press F1 or the page
down button to display the submenu.
SETUP
STATUS
:>ALARM
:
>VERSION >OPTION
(2) The STATUS submenus display the current status of the cooling fan, power and genlock as
shown below.
STATUS :FAN1:NOR
MU ALARM: PS1:NOR
3:NOR
: 1/3
:
STATUS : GENLOCK:External Lock
MU ALARM:
: 2/3
:
STATUS : PS1:NOR
OU ALARM:
: 3/3
:
Item
FAN1 - FAN3
Display
NOR
ERR
NOR
PS1, PS2
ERR
External
Lock
GENLOCK
Internal
Lock
2:NOR
2:NOR
2:NOR
Description
Indicates that FAN works properly.
Indicates that FAN has failed. Power off the switcher and
consult your FOR-A reseller.
Indicates that POWER works properly.
Indicates that POWER has failed. Power off the switcher
and consult your FOR-A reseller.
Indicates that a valid reference signal is present and video
signals are properly locked to the reference signal.
Indicates that the internal reference is being used.
In this case, a reference signal is not present, its level is too
low. Or a reference signal with a different format from the
switcher is present.
30-2. Verifying Versions
To verify the version of software and FPGA firmware installed in the HVS-350HS, open the
[SETUP-STATUS-VERSION] menu. Before upgrading the switcher, be sure to check the
relevant version in this menu.
STATUS :SOFT MU:v1.00.0
VERSION :
RU1:v1.00.0
OU:v1.00.0
RU2:v1.00.0
: 1/5
:
STATUS :FPGA CNFG:v01-00
VERSION :(MU) SDI1:v01-00
CPU :v01-00
SDI2:v01-00
: 2/5
:
196
STATUS :FPGA
VERSION :(MU)
IN :v01-00
ME :v01-00
OUT :v01-00
MV :v01-00
: 3/5
:
STATUS :FPGA DVE1:v01-00
VERSION :(MU) DSK :v01-00
DVE2:v01-00
: 4/5
:
STATUS :FPGA CPU1:v01-00
VERSION :(OU) CNFG:v01-00
CPU2:v01-00
: 5/5
:
Item
SOFT MU
SOFT OU
SOFT RU1-2
FPGA (MU) CNFG
FPGA (MU) CPU
FPGA (MU) SDI1-2
FPGA (MU) IN
FPGA (MU) OUT
FPGA (MU) ME
FPGA (MU) MV
FPGA (MU) DVE1-2
FPGA (MU) DSK
FPGA (OU) CPU1-2
FPGA (OU) CNFG
HVS-350HS
HVS-35OU/ROU
HVS-30RU
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-35OU/ROU
HVS-35OU/ROU
Description
Software version of HVS-350HS.
Software version of HVS-35OU/35ROU.
Software version of HVS-30RU.
CPLD firmware version of CPU card
FPGA firmware version of CPU card
FPGA firmware version of SDI1-2 cards
FPGA firmware version of IN card
FPGA firmware version of Out card
FPGA firmware version of ME card
FPGA firmware version of MV card
FPGA firmware version of DVE1-2 cards
FPGA firmware version of DSK card
FPGA1-2 firmware versions
CPLD firmware version
30-3. Installed Options
To check the options installed to the switcher, open the [SETUP-STATUS-OPTION] menu. The
menu shows the hardware and software option installed to the switcher as shown below.
STATUS
OPTION
:SLOT-A
:SLOT-B
>HVS-30HSDI
>HVS-30HSAI
:v01-00
:v01-00
: 1/5
:
STATUS
OPTION
:SLOT-C
:SLOT-D
>HVS-30PCIN :v01-00
>HVS-30HSDI-A:v01-00
: 2/5
:
STATUS
OPTION
:SLOT-E
:SLOT-F
>HVS-30HSDO
>HVS-30PCO
: 3/5
:
STATUS
OPTION
:HVS-35ED >INSTALLED
:HVS-35VR >INSTALLED
: 4/5
:
STATUS
OPTION
:HVS-35S3D>INSTALLED
:
: 5/5
197
:v01-00
:v01-00
31. Upgrading Operational Version
Consult your FOR-A supplier in order to upgrade your switcher.
Before upgrading, check the current version of the software and firmware in the [SETUPSTATUS-VERSION] menu.
You will need to use the FILE special menu function to download and apply the operational
software files in a USB flash memory. The files listed below contain the software upgrades for
your switcher.
Firmware for HVS-350HS
Software:
XXXXXXXX.MCB
Hardware:
XXXXXXXX.MFB
Firmware for HVS-35OU/ROU
Software:
XXXXXXXX.OCD
Hardware:
XXXXXXXX.OFB
31-1. How to Verify Version
Once the system is upgraded, the setting data will be lost and return to their factory default
settings. Important setting data should be backed up by saving it to USB flash memory.
To upgrade your switcher, follow the procedure below:
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Save current setting data to USB flash memory.
Upgrade the software
Reboot the switcher.
Initialize the switcher.
Load the setting data saved at step 1.
Reboot the switcher.
Turn power off then on at HVS-35OU/35ROU
Refer to
19-3
31-2
22-1
22-2
31-3
22-1
31-2. Upgrading HVS-350HS
(1) Insert the USB flash memory that contains the upgrade data into the USB port.
(2) Press the MENU control button, then press the 9/FILE button to open the FILE top menu.
(3) Turn F1 to select UPDATE, and then press F1 or the page down button to open the
[FILE-UPDATE] menu.
FILE
TOP
:>LOAD
:
FILE
UPDATE
: EXT
: =MCB
>SAVE
: LOAD
:
>UPDATE
: <DIR>
1/1
:
XXXXXXXX 101MB
(3) Turn F1 to select MCB to the EXT (File Extension) item.
(4) Turn F3 to select an MCB file.
(5) Press F3 to start upgrading.
198
IMPORTANT
DO NOT turn the power of your units OFF or try to remove the USB flash memory from
the port until file download is complete!
(6) In the [FILE-UPDATE] menu screen the pop-up status window appears showing the file
transfer progress.
(7) The lamp buttons on the panel will go dark after 30 seconds. (The data starts writing to the
switcher flash ROM.)
(8) After about 1 minute, panel indications will return to normal. (Download / ROM write
complete.)
(9) The software upgrade will be applied after rebooting the switcher. (The switcher power OFF
then power ON.)
IMPORTANT
Proceed to upgrade your switcher system with MFB, OCD and OFB files in the same
manner as that of the HVS-350HS software upgrading procedure The installation
times are:
Approximately 4 minutes for MCB and MFB files respectively
Approximately 10 seconds for OCD and OFB files respectively
31-3. Loading Setting Data
All menu settings previously made for the switcher can be set again by loading the "DATA.ALL"
file from the USB Disk.
(1) Insert the USB flash memory device in to which the data has been saved, into the USB port.
(2) Press the FILE button to display the top page of the FILE menu.
(3)Turn F1 to select LOAD, and then press F1 or the page down button to display the
[FILE-LOAD] menu.
(4) Turn F1 to select ALL to the EXT (File Extension) item.
(5) Turn F3 to select data. (The file name of the data must be "DATA.ALL", if it is not renamed.)
(6) Press F3 (or F2) to start loading the file.
(7) The data transfer will be complete within approx. 30 minutes.
(8) After loading the data, reboot the switcher.
IMPORTANT
Once the saved system data has loaded, you will have to restart the switcher. (Power
the unit OFF then ON.) The ARCNET ID is applied only after the switcher is restarted.
199
32. Connecting Control and Remote Panels
The HVS-350HS system can accommodate maximum of three control panels (HVS-35OU/35ROU/
30OU) and two remote panels (HVS-30RU). Two or three of the same or different models can be
connected. The HVS-350HS stores setting data (excluding several settings such as Arcnet ID) of
these OU and RU, which contain:
Signal assignments of bus buttons
Function assignments of user buttons
USER TRANS and ADV CTRL settings
System Connection Example
75Ω termination
HVS-35OU
RS-422 cable
(Supplied with RU)
2
RATING LABEL
HVS-35OU
OPTION SLOT
A CE
B D F
1
2
4
3
I/O
HVS-30OU
RU2 (HVS-30RU)
for P/P control
1
AC10 0V - 24 0V 50 /60 Hz IN
AC 10 0 - 240 V 50 /60Hz IN
5
6
SDI IN PUT
7
8
PG M
PGM
M/E
P/ P
1
3
2
4
5
ED ITOR
LA N
GPI I N
G PI/ TALLY O U T
1
TO OU
2
RS-422
AU X
R EF IN
CPU/GENLO CK
6
RU1 (HVS-30RU)
for M/E control
RE F OUT
GENLOCK
3
4
RS-422
75Ω termination
Arcnet (75ΩBNC cable)
32-1. Connecting Remote Panels (HVS-30RU)
Up to two units of HVS-30RU can be connected to the HVS-350HS via RS-422.
IMPORTANT
At a factory default setting, the RS-422 Port1 on the HVS-350HS is set for connecting
the RU1. Therefore, once an HVS-30RU is connected to Port1, it is recognized as
RU1 in the HVS-350HS system. To connect HVS-30RU units to Port2 to Port4, the
following settings on the HVS-35OU, HVS-35ROU or HVS-30OU are necessary.
(1) Open the [SETUP-SYSTEM-RS-422] menu on the HVS-35OU, HVS-35ROU or HVS-30OU.
SYSTEM : SELECT: FUNC : BAUD :PARITY : 1/1
RS-422 : =PORT1: =30RU1: =153K : =NONE :
(2) Turn F1 to select the connection port.
(3) Turn F2 to select between 30RU1 and 30RU2. (RU1 and RU2 must be unique. Two RU units
cannot be the same setting.)
(4) To select the Mix Effect Bus to be controlled, open PAGE4 of the [SETUP-INPUT-ASSIGN]
menu.
INPUT :SELECT : SHIFT : LINK
ASSIGN : =RU1 : =OFF : =OFF
:CONTROL: 4/4
: =M/E :
(5) Turn F1 to select RU1 or RU2.
(6) Turn F4 to select M/E or P/P.
RU1 and RU2 can select the same or different Mix Effect Bus.
200
32-2. Connecting Control Panels (HVS-30OU/35OU/35ROU)
Up to three units of the control panels can be connected to the HVS-350HS via Arcnet. The
HVS-350HS stores three sets of control panel settings, which can be the same or different.
IMPORTANT
To change the Arcnet ID of a control panel, connect the control panel and HVS-350HS
in one to one. The Arcnet ID numbers must be unique. Do not assign the same ID
number to two different devices. See section 3-3. "How to Connect between MU and
OU Units."
1 To Use All Control Panels in the Same Settings.
This is recommended in the case where all control panels use the same assignments for bus
buttons and user buttons. To set up the connection as shown in the figure below, proceed as
follows:
HVS-35OU (First)
OU ID=1 (default)
OU NO =OU1 (default)
75Ω termination
HVS-350HS
Arcnet ID=250 (default)
初期設定
2
HVS-35OU (Second)
OU ID=2
OU NO =OU1 (default)
HVS-30OU
OU ID=3
OU NO =OU1 (default)
GROUP=350HS
For M/E control (default)
1
AC 10 0V - 24 0V 50 /60 Hz IN
AC10 0 - 240 V 50 /60H z IN
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A CE
B D F
1
5
4
3
2
I/O
6
SDI IN PUT
7
8
PG M
PGM
M/E
P/ P
1
3
2
4
5
ED ITOR
LA N
G PI I N
GPI/TALLY OU T
1
TO OU
2
RS-422
REF IN
CPU/GENLO CK
6
AU X
RE F OUT
GENLOCK
3
4
RS-422
75Ω termination
Arcnet (75Ω, BNC cable)
(1) Leave the first HVS-35OU in the initial factory default setting.
(2) Connect the HVS-350HS and second HVS-35OU in one to one via Arcnet.
(3) Open the [SETUP-SYSTEM-ARCNET] (1/2) menu.
Change the Arcnet ID number to 2 under OU ID.
Leave OU1 unchanged under OU NO.
SYSTEM : OU ID : OU NO :CTRL MU:
ARCNET : = 2
: =OU1 : =250 :
: 1/2
:
The OU NO item identifies the number of data sets and determines which data set
stored in the HVS-350HS is used for control panels. For example, if all control panels
use OU1, they share the same data set.
(4) Connect the HVS-350HS and HVS-30OU in one to one.
(5) Open the [SETUP-SYSTEM-ARCNET] (1/2) menu.
Change the Arcnet ID number to 3 under OU ID.
Leave OU1 unchanged.
Set 350HS under GROUP.
SYSTEM : OU ID : OU NO :CTRL MU: GROUP : 1/2
ARCNET : = 3
: =OU1 : =250 : =350HS:
(6) Connect the HVS-350HS and all control panels. If a bus button assignment is changed on
a control panel, it is changed automatically on other two control panels.
201
2 To Use All Control Panels in the Different Settings.
This is recommended in the case where all control panels use different assignments for bus
buttons and user buttons, or two HVS-30OU units control the HVS-350HS differently, one for
M/E and the other for P/P. To set up the connection as shown in the figure below, proceed as
follows:
HVS-35OU
OU ID=1 (default)
OU NO =OU1 (default)
75Ω termination
HVS-350HS
Arcnet ID=250 (default)
初期設定
HVS-30OU (First)
OU ID=2
OU NO =OU2
GROUP=350HS
CONTROL=M/E
2
1
2
4
3
I/O
HVS-30OU (Second)
OU ID=3
OU NO =OU3 (default)
GROUP=350HS
CONTROL=P/P
1
AC10 0V - 24 0V 50 /60 Hz IN
AC 10 0 - 240 V 50 /60Hz IN
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A CE
B D F
5
6
7
SDI IN PUT
8
PG M
PGM
M/E
P/ P
1
3
2
4
5
ED ITOR
LA N
GPI I N
G PI/ TALLY O U T
1
TO OU
2
RS-422
R EF IN
CPU/GENLO CK
6
AU X
RE F OUT
GENLOCK
3
4
RS-422
75Ω termination
Arcnet (75Ω, BNC cable)
(1) Leave the HVS-35OU in the initial factory default setting.
(2) Connect the HVS-350HS and first HVS-30OU in one to one via Arcnet.
(3) Open the [SETUP-SYSTEM-ARCNET] (1/2) menu.
Change the Arcnet ID number to 2 under OU ID.
Change OU NO to OU2.
Set 350HS under GROUP.
SYSTEM : OU ID : OU NO :CTRL MU: GROUP : 1/2
ARCNET : = 2
: =OU2 : =250 : =350HS:
The OU NO item identifies the number of data sets and determines which data set
stored in the HVS-350HS is used for control panels. For example, if HVS-35OU uses
OU1, the first HVS-30OU uses OU2 and the second HVS-30OU uses OU3, all control
panels use a different set of settings.
(4) Connect the HVS-350HS and second HVS-30OU in one to one via Arcnet.
(5) Open the [SETUP-SYSTEM-ARCNET] (1/2) menu.
Change the Arcnet ID number to 3 under OU ID.
Change OU NO to OU3.
Set 350HS under GROUP.
SYSTEM : OU ID : OU NO :CTRL MU: GROUP : 1/2
ARCNET : = 3
: =OU3 : =250 : =350HS:
(6) Open PAGE4 of the [SETUP-INPUT-ASSIGN] menu.
Select OU under SELECT.
Change the CONTROL item from M/E to P/P to set the panel for P/P control. (If leaving
the setting unchanged here, both HVS-30OU units control the M/E bus.
INPUT :SELECT : SHIFT : LINK
ASSIGN : = OU : =OFF : =OFF
:CONTROL: 4/4
: =P/P :
(7) Connect the HVS-350HS and all control panels. Each control panel uses different set of
settings in the assignments of bus and user buttons and the USER TRANS and ADV
CTRL transition settings.
202
33. Setup Setting for HVS-30RU
The PGM/PST bus buttons and free functional (USER) buttons on the HVS-30RU can be set on the
HVS-35OU/35ROU by using menu. The setting procedures are almost the same as those of the
control panel buttons. Selecting which bus is to be controlled with the PGM/PST bus on the
HVS-30RU between M/E and P/P is also possible. If HVS-35OU/35ROU is used with HVS-30FP or
HVS-30RU, you can select the same or different signal assignments for the M/E and P/P between
HVS-35OU/35ROU and HVS-30FP/RU.
33-1. Assigning Sources to PGM/PST Bus buttons
To control M/E with Same Assignments between HVS-35OU/35ROU and HVS-30RU:
(1) Press the MENU control button and then press the SETUP button to display the SETUP
menu top page.
(2) Turn F1 to select INPUT. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP – INPUT]
menu.
SETUP
INPUT
:>SIGNAL
>PROC AMP>RENAME
>ASSIGN
(3) Turn F1 to select ASSIGN. Press F1 or the page down button to display the [SETUP –
INPUT - ASSIGN] menu. Press the page down button to go to PAGE4.
(4) Turn F2 to select RU1 or RU2 under SELECT.
(5) Select a group to be joined from OU1 to OU3 under LINK.
(6) Select M/E under CONTROL
INPUT
ASSIGN
: SELECT: SHIFT : LINK
: =RU1 : =NORML: =OU1
:CONTROL: 4/4
: =M/E :
To control P/P with Different Assignments between OU and HVS-30RU:
(1) In the [SETUP – INPUT - ASSIGN](4/4) menu, set LINK to OFF and select P/P under
CONTROL
INPUT
ASSIGN
: SELECT: SHIFT : LINK
: =RU1 : =NORML: =OFF
:CONTROL: 4/4
: =P/P :
(2) Press the page up button to go back to the [SETUP-INPUT-RU1 ASSIGN] (2/4) menu or the
[SETUP-INPUT-RU2 ASSIGN] (3/4) menu.
INPUT
:BUTTON : SIGNAL NAME
:INHIBIT: 2/4
RU1 ASGN: =01
: =IN04
=CAM4 : =ON
:
(3) Turn F1 to select a button under BUTTON.
(4) Turn F2 to select the signal to be assigned under SIGNAL. Users can also select a signal by
turning F3 under the NAME parameter. SIGNAL and NAME are linked to each other. (See
section 5-1. "How to Give Name to Source" for more details.)
(5) Users can inhibit specific buttons. If INHIBIT is set to ON for a button, the selected button is
inactive. This is useful in helping to reduce the risk of wrong input selection.
203
33-2. Setting USER Buttons on HVS-30FP and HVS-30RU
USER Button Default Assignments in HVS-30FP
Button
USER button 1 on RU1-1, RU2-1 and HVS-30RU1/2
USER button 2 on RU1-2, RU2-2 and HVS-30RU1/2
Default setting
AUX XPT SELECT
PinP XPT SELECT
Assigning Functions to USER Buttons
(1) Press the USER button above the Keyapd display on the [USER BUTTON] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select a USER button for use.
(3) Turn F2 to select OTHER to TYPE and press F2.
(4) Turn F3 to select a function to be used and press F3. See the HVS-30FP/RU operational
manual for assignable functions.
PANEL
:SELECT : TYPE : FUNC(F3)
: 1/1
USER BTN: =RU1-1: =OTHER: =AUX XPT SELECT
33-3. OSD Operation
Pressing the first two menu control buttons (F1 and F2) on the HVS-30RU control panel
simultaneously shows the menu on the front panel. At the same time the OSD (On Screen
Display) will appear on the preview screen. Pressing both buttons again clears the menu from
the screen. The following explains how to display the desired menu and how to change
parameters on the menu in the OSD. See "HVS-30FP and HVS-30RU operation manual" (soon
be released) for details.
To Display a Desired Menu:
(1) Turn either of the control push-buttons to select a menu and press the button to confirm the
selection.
(2) The parameters in the menu are displayed. The name of the selected menu is displayed in
the mini-screen on the HVS-30RU panel. If the menu has submenus, go to the desired
submenu in the same way and display parameters. To go back to the main menu, select
RETURN and press the button.
To Change Parameter Setting
(1) Turn either of the control push-buttons to select a parameter and press the button to confirm
the selection.
(2) Turn the button to change the setting and press the button to confirm the change.
(3) To go back to the menu selection, turn the button to select RETURN and press the button. To
exit the menu, press both buttons.
204
34. Specifications and Dimensions
34-1. Specifications
Number of M/Es
Control Panel
Video Formats
Video Input
1.5M/E
5 types
HVS-35OU: 1.5 M/E 20-button model
HVS-35ROU: 1.5 M/E 12-button model
HVS-30OU: 1 M/E 12-button model
HVS-30RU: 1 M/E 12-button model (OSD menu display)
HVS-35GUI: GUI application (PC required)
1080/59.94i, 1080/60i, 1080/50i,
1080/24PsF, 1080/23.98PsF, 1080/25PsF, 1080/29.97PsF,
1080/30PsF,
720/59.94p, 720/60p, 720/50p
525/60 (NTSC) , 625/50 (PAL)
HD-SDI: 1.5 Gbps or SD-SDI: 270 Mbps 75Ω BNC x 8
* Frame synchronizer on each input
Video Input (optional)
HD-SDI: 1.5 Gbps or SD-SDI: 270
Mbps 75Ω BNC x 4
HVS-30HSAI
HD analog component
SD analog component
Analog composite
DVI-D: XGA to WUXGA (1080i)
HVS-30PCIN
(HDCP incompatible),
XGA to WXGA (720p) (HDCP
incompatible),
VGA to XGA (SD) (HDCP
incompatible)
RGB: XGA to WUXGA (1080i) ,
XGA to WXGA (720p) ,
VGA to XGA (SD)
Standard: 8 (SDI), Max.: 24 (with HSDI x 4 or HSDI-A x 4)
HD-SDI: 1.5 Gbps or SD-SDI: 270 Mbps 75Ω BNC x 8 (PGM,
M/E PGM and AUX1-AUX6)
HVS-30HSDI/HSDI-A
Number of Inputs
Video Output
Video Output (optional)
HVS-30HSDO
HVS-30HSAO
HVS-30PCO
Number of Outputs
AUX Outputs
HD-SDI: 1.5 Gbps or SD-SDI: 270 Mbps 75Ω BNC x 2
HD analog component
SD analog component
Analog composite
DVI-D: SXGA to WUXGA/HDTV (1080i) (HDCP
incompatible) ,
SXGA/WXGA (720p) (HDCP incompatible) ,
SVGA (SD) (HDCP incompatible)
RGB: SXGA to WUXGA (1080i),
SXGA/WXGA (720p) ,SVGA (SD)
YPbPr: HDTV(1080i)
Standard: 8 (SDI), Max.: 12 (with 2 output cards)
Standard: 6, Max.: 8
205
Signal Processing
Quantization
Effect
Transition
Still Store
Keyer/DSK
P in P
Multiviewer
Process Amp
Event Memory
Sequence Memory
Genlock Input
System Phase Adjust
Genlock Output
I/O Delay
* Crossfade switching available on each AUX output
* OSD menu is available on a PREV output screen
4:2:2 Digital component
HD/SD-SDI: 10-bit
WIPE
100 patterns, Border and Softness
DVE
56 patterns or more (2D, 3D and 2-channel)
Execution: Fader lever, AUTO or CUT button
Type: MIX or WIPE (DVE included)
4 channels (with backup feature)
6 channels (KEYER x 2 + DSK x 4) of Bus, Luminance or Full
key, 2D DVE on each channel
KEYER: Chroma key and Edge/Shadow effect
2 channels (up to full screen size) with Mix, Slide or Scaling
effect
2 channels with 4-, 10- or 16-way split views with title and
tally display, 1 frame delay relative to PGM output
Process Amp feature on each input
100 events
10 sequences (up to 80 steps for each)
BB: NTSC: 0.429 Vp-p/PAL: 0.45Vp-p or Tri-level Sync: 0.6
Vp-p
75Ω BNC x 1, loop-through (Terminate with 75Ω terminator, if
unused.)
Horizontal: -1/2H to +1/2H
BB: NTSC: 0.429 Vp-p/PAL: 0.45Vp-p or Tri-level Sync: 0.6
Vp-p
75Ω BNC x 1
1 H (minimum delay)
1 to 2 frames + 1 H (when FS or Up-resize engine used:)
2 to 3 frames + 1 H: (when FS or Up-resuze engine plus DVE
used)
3 to 4 frames + 1 H: (when FS or Up-resize engine plus
Output resize engine and DVE used)
Interfaces
100Base-TX/100BASE-T RJ-45 x 1
* For HVS-35GUI connection
15-pin D-sub (female) x 1 (inch screw) 10 inputs,
GPI IN
TTL negative logic pulse or Make-contact
GPI/TALLY OUT
25-pin D-sub (female) x 1(inch screw) 20 outputs
GPI IN/TALLY OUT 15-pin D-sub (female) x 1 (inch screw) 6-input/6-outputs, TTL
(HVS-35OU/ROU)
negative logic pulse or Make-contact
TALLY OUT
37-pin D-sub (female) x 1 (with inch screws), Make-contact
(with HVS-30TALR) (18 outputs added per card, up to 2 cards available)
9-pin D-sub (female) x 1 (with inch screws)
RS-422
* For HVS-30RU, VTR and tally unit connection
9-pin D-sub (female) x 1 (with inch screws), BVS-3000 or
EDITOR
GVG protocol
75Ω BNC x 1, loop-through (Terminate with 75Ω terminator, if
ARCNET
unused.)
* For control panel and AUX remote panel connection
Temperature
0°C to 40°C
Humidity
30% to 90% (no condensation)
Power
100VAC to 240 VAC ±10%, 50/60Hz
Ethernet
206
Consumption
Dimensions
Weight
Consumables
Accessories
Options
HVS-350HS: 520 W (at 100-120 VAC) 528 W (at 220-240
VAC)
HVS-35OU: 26 W (at 100-120 VAC) 29 W (at 220-240 VAC)
HVS-35ROU: 26 W (at 100-120 VAC) 29 W (at 220-240
VAC)
HVS-350HS: 430 (W) x 492 (D) x 132 (H) mm
HVS-35OU: 576 (W) x 382 (D) x 127 (H) mm
HVS-35ROU: 430 (W) x 382 (D) x 127 (H) mm
HVS-350HS: 17 kg (in Standard), 20 kg (in Full Option)
HVS-35OU: 8.5 kg
HVS-35ROU: 7.5 kg
HVS-350HS: Power supply unit. Replace every 5 years.
Cooling fan. Replace every 6 years
HVS-35OU/ROU: Power supply unit. Replace every 6 years.
Manual, AC cord, Rack mount brackets and BNC cable (10
m)
◇HVS-30HSDI: SDI Input card w/ up-resize engine
◇HVS-30HSDI-A: SDI Input card w/o up-resize engine
◇HVS-30HSAI: Analog Input card
◇HVS-30PCIN: PC Input card
◇HVS-30HSDO: SDI Output card
◇HVS-30HSAO: Analog Output card
◇HVS-30PCO: PC Output card
◇HVS-30TALR: Tally Relay Output card (18-output)
◇HVS-35ED: Editor Interface software
◇HVS-35VR: Virtual Link software
◇HVS-35S3D: 3D Monitoring software
◇HVS-35PSM: Redundant Power Supply Unit for Main Unit
◇HVS-35PSO: Redundant Power Supply Unit for Operation
Unit
◇HVS-AUX8/16/32: AUX Remote Control Unit
◇HVS-TALR20/32: Tally Relay Output unit (20/32-output)
◇HVS-TALOC20/32: Tally Open Collector Output unit
(20/32-output)
207
40
208
480
462
430
350
40
6.4
37.5
OFF
132
57
OFF
ON
ON
POW ER 1
POW ER 2
37.5
POWER 1 ALARM
POW ER 2 ALARM
D IG T
I AL VID EO SW T
I C H ER
HVS-350HS
40
t2.9
412
492
40
%%C‚Q‚P D‚U
12.2
2
1
A C1 00 - 24 0V 50/ 60H z IN
A C10 0V - 24 0V 5 0/6 0H z IN
RATING LABEL
OPTION S LO T
A C E
B D F
1
2
3
4
I/O
5
6
7
8
SDI I NP U T
PG M
M/E
PG M
1
2
3
4
5
6
ED ITOR
GPI I N
LA N
1
2
RS -4 22
AU X
P/ P
RE F O U T
RE F I N
CPU/G ENL OCK
TO OU
G PI /TA LL Y OU T
3
4
RS -4 22
GE NL O C K
(All dimensions in mm)
34-2-1. HVS-350HS
34-2. External Dimensions
34-2-2. HVS-35OU
(All dimensions in mm)
HVS -35 OU
O FF
(SE RVI CE )
TO MU
CO NTRO L
GP I/TA LL Y O UT
RATING LABEL
A C1 00-24 0V 50/ 60Hz IN
SE R.N O .
ON
P OW ER
POWER 1
POWER 2
(127)
MEMORY
WIPE
2DDVE
MENU
USERBUTTON
EVENT
27.4
(101)
BLACK
TRANS
SEQUENCE
CONTROL
ALARM
1
2
USER BUTTON
PAGE
POWER2
F1
F2
F4
F3
COPY
SWAP
NEW
STILL
MATT
FILE
DEC
4
5
6
KEY1
KEY2
PINP1
PINP2
+/-
1
CUT
2
DEL
3
DSK2
DSK3
DSK4
PLAY
STOP
2
1
P IN P
2
1
2
DSK
3
4
1
2
3
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
13
14
15
M/E
4
AUX
5
6
7
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
16
17
18
P/P
COPY
8
MV1
MV2
19
20
RECALL
0
CLEAR
KEYER
9
SETUP
DSK1
1
SEQEDIT
8
PASTE
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
(2DDVE)
WIPEPOS
POS
ROT
MENU
FINE
DEF
ADD
JOYSTICK
HVS-350HS
DIGITALVIDEOSWITCHER
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
REV
NOR/REV
BKGD
KEY1
TRANSITO
IN
RATE
P IN P
1
PATTERN
P IN P
2
KEY2
NEXT TRANSITION
FADERLIMIT
382
3
CHANNEL
INS
WIPE
DIRECTION
2
WIPE
KEY2
SELECT / KEYPAD
KEY/AUX
1
BKGD
KEY1
KEYER/PINP
DVE
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
MIX
20
303.7
POWER1
COPY/SWAP
7
INC
Ø12 .7
USBMEMORY
KEY 1
WIPE
TRANSITIONTYPE
DVE
AUTO
CUT
KEY 2
ON AIR
DVE
DSK 1
DVE
DSK 2
FADERLIMIT
DVE
P/P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
DSK 3
M/E
DVE
AUTO
DSK 4
CUT
24. 5
ON AIR
576
40
474
40
34-2-3. HVS-35ROU
(All dimensions in mm)
HVS- 35O U
O FF
(S ERV ICE )
TO MU
CONTRO L
GPI/TALLY OU T
RATING LABEL
AC100-240V 50/ 60Hz IN
S ER.NO.
ON
POWER
POWER 1
POWER 2
(127)
MEMORY
WIPE
2D DVE
MENU
USER BUTTON
EVENT
SEQUENCE
25
(101)
BLACK
TRANS
CONTROL
ALARM
1
2
USERBUTTON
POWER2
1
1
PAGE
F1
F2
F4
F3
NEW
SETUP
STILL
MATT
FILE
KEY2
DEC
4
5
6
KEYER/P IN P
KEY1
KEY2
P IN P1
P IN P2
+/-
1
2
3
PLAY
CUT
DEL
ADD
DSK1
DSK2
1
2
1
2
DSK
P INP
2
1
2
3
4
AUX
5
6
7
3
4
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
MV1
MV2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M/E
P/P
REC ALL
COPY
8
3
DSK3
0
STOP
2
BKGD
9
CLEAR
KEYER
SEQEDIT
8
SWAP
PASTE
KEY1
WIPE
CHANNEL
(2D DVE)
IN S
DSK4
WIPE POS
MENU
POS
ROT
FINE
DEF
JOYSTICK
HVS-350HS
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
STORE
ENTER
OVWR
WIPE
SELECT /KEYPAD
REV
NOR/REV
PATTERN
BKGD
KEY1
KEY2
DIRECTION
NEXTTRANSITION
P IN P
1
P IN P
2
FADER LIMIT
382
KEY/AUX
TRANSITION
RATE
DVE
M/E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MIX
12
305.7
POWER1
COPY/SWAP
7
COPY
INC
Ø12.7
USB MEMORY
KEY 1
WIPE
TRANSITIONTYPE
AUTO
DVE
CUT
KEY 2
ONAIR
DVE
DVE
DSK 1
DSK 2
FADER LIMIT
DVE
DSK 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M/E
AUTO
DVE
CUT
DSK 4
ONAIR
24.9
P/P
430
40
328
209
40
Appendix 1. Available File List
Available files for saving and loading (via USB flash memory or Ethernet connection)
File Extension
File Name (*1)
File Data Description
all
DATA.all
System data, all wipe data and all event memory data
sys
HVS350.sys
System data
mem
EVENT.mem
All event memory data
jpg (*2)
SEQDAT**.seq
Each sequence data
*.jpg
JPEG files (standard RGB),
JPEG sequential files
STILL1.jpg to STILL4.jpg
Stored still in JPEG format
tga (*2)
*.tga
TARGA files (uncompressed RGB),
TARGA sequential files
STILL1.tga to STILL4.tga
Stored still in TARGA format
bmp (*2)
*.bmp
BITMAP files (uncompressed RGB)
BITMAP sequential files
STILL1.bmp to STILL4.bmp Stored still in BITMAP format
Note that file names are limited to max. 8 characters in length (ASCII code).
(*1) The files are automatically named to the correct name as shown in the table above when saving to
USB flash memory.
(*2) When loading a jpeg, targa or bitmap file from USB flash memory, you can select a centered or
tiled format as well as a normal one. In this case, a centered or tiled format image file is saved to
STILL as a jpg, tga or bmp file.
Available files for loading (via USB flash memory or Ethernet connection)
File Format
File Name
File Data Description
mcb
XXXXXXXX.mcb
HVS-350HS upgrade data
ocd
XXXXXXXX.ocd
HVS-35OU/HVS-35ROU upgrade data
mfb
XXXXXXXX.mfb
HVS-350HS FPGA firmware upgrade data
ofb
XXXXXXXX.ofb
HVS-35OU FPGA firmware upgrade data
Available USB flash memory devices
Manufacturer
Series Name
SanDisk
Cruzer micro, Cruzer mini Series
I/O DATA
TB-ST Series
Transcend
JetFlash150 Series
TOSHIBA
TransMemory Series
Model Name (Tested memory)
SDCZ2-256
ToteBag
U2B-256MT
Appendix 1 - 1
Appendix 2. Transition Pattern List
2-1. WIPE Type
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
Appendix 2 - 1
2-2. DVE Type
Normal direction
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
161
162
170
170
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
Appendix 2 - 2
APPENDIX 3
HVS-30OU for HVS-350HS
Operation Unit
1st Edition
Appendix 3 - 1
Table of Contents
1. Upon Receipt............................................................................................................................ 4
1-1. Unpacking ......................................................................................................................... 4
1-2. About This Appendix ......................................................................................................... 4
2. Panel Descriptions ................................................................................................................... 4
3. Connection ............................................................................................................................... 6
3-1. Power ON .......................................................................................................................... 6
3-2. How to Connect between MU and OU Units ..................................................................... 6
3-3. System Signal Format Selection at the Initial Use ............................................................. 8
4. Menu Operations ...................................................................................................................... 9
4-1. How to Access Menus ....................................................................................................... 9
4-1-1. Menu Access Buttons ................................................................................................. 9
4-1-2. Other Menu Access Buttons ..................................................................................... 10
4-2. How to Set Values ........................................................................................................... 11
4-2-1. Changing Settings or Values by Using the Numeric Keypad .................................... 11
4-2-2. Changing Settings or Values by Using the Joystick ................................................. 12
5. Bus Operation ........................................................................................................................ 13
5-1. Selecting Video Sources ................................................................................................. 13
5-1-1. Selecting M/E or P/P ................................................................................................ 13
5-1-2. Selecting Video Sources on M/E or P/P ................................................................... 14
5-1-3. Selecting Video Sources on KEY/AUX ..................................................................... 14
6. Transition Operations ............................................................................................................. 15
6-1. Transition Block Description ............................................................................................ 15
6-2. Available Transitions ....................................................................................................... 16
6-3. Black Transitions ............................................................................................................. 16
6-4. Background Transitions ................................................................................................... 17
6-4-1. M/E Bus .................................................................................................................... 17
6-4-2. P/P Bus .................................................................................................................... 17
6-5. KEY1 Transition .............................................................................................................. 18
6-6. How to Select Patterns .................................................................................................... 20
6-6-1. Checking and Selecting Patterns ............................................................................. 20
6-6-2. Direct Pattern Function ............................................................................................. 20
6-7. IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK .......................................................................... 22
6-7-1. Setting the ON AIR Button Function (USER Transition) ........................................... 23
6-7-2. Setting the AUTO Button Function ........................................................................... 24
7. Modifying Patterns .................................................................................................................. 25
7-1. Pattern Modify Example1 (Pattern 20) ............................................................................ 25
8. Event Memory ........................................................................................................................ 26
8-1. Event Operation .............................................................................................................. 26
9. User Buttons........................................................................................................................... 27
9-1. USER Button Operation .................................................................................................. 27
9-2. USER Button Setting ....................................................................................................... 27
10. Arcnet ................................................................................................................................... 28
Appendix 3 - 2
11. Status Information ................................................................................................................. 29
11-1. Checking Alarm Status ..................................................................................................29
11-2. Verifying Versions .......................................................................................................... 29
12. Specifications and Dimensions .............................................................................................31
12-1. Unit Specifications ......................................................................................................... 31
12-2. External Dimensions ...................................................................................................... 31
Appendix 3 - 3
1. Upon Receipt
1-1. Unpacking
 HVS-30OU Box
ITEM
HVS-30OU
Control Cable
AC adaptor
Rack Mount Brackets
QTY
1
1
1 set
1 set
REMARKS
Operation unit with control panel
For ARCNET connection, BNC, 10m
Retaining clips included
EIA standard type
 Check
Check to ensure no damage has occurred during shipment. If damage has occurred, or items
are missing, inform your supplier immediately.
1-2. About This Appendix
Appendix 3 is intended to help the user operate HVS-350HS units using HVS-30OU units. Refer
to main manual pages for details about functions.
 Unavailable Functions with HVS-30OU
The following functions of HVS-350HS cannot be operated from HVS-30OU.
-Sequence
-2D DVE memory
-COPY/SWAP
-KEY2 fader transitions
-Simultaneous transitions including KEY2.
-Signal selections for AUX4 to AUX8 on the KEY/AUX bus
-Simultaneous M/E and P/P operation
2. Panel Descriptions
 Front Panel
POSITION
MENU
7/SET UP
8/STILL
9/FILE
DIRECT PATT
±/EVENT
4/WIPE
5/P in P
6/MATT
1
2/KEYER
BLACK
TRANS
USB MEMORY
CLR/TRANS RATE
0
.(DOT)
/RECALL
3/DSK
5
6
ENT/STORE
3
4
MENU/DIRECT PATT/EVENT/KEY PAD
USER BUTTON
SIZE
(PUSH to DEF)
PAGE
1
2
USER BUTTON
ALARM
F1
F2
REV
F4
F3
NOR/REV
HVS-300HS
DIRECTION
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
TRANS PREV
KEYER
DSK
1
2
3
4
P IN P
2
1
2
AUX
3
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
MV
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
BKGD
KEYER
KEYER
NEXT TRANSITION
KEY/AUX
1
P IN P
1
PATTERN/RATE
FADER LIMIT
PGM
MIX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
AUTO
PST
P IN P
2
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
CUT
DSK
ON AIR
Appendix 3 - 4
No.
Name
1
ALARM indicator
2
Menu Control Block
3
MENU
DIRECT PATT
EVENT
KEYPAD
4
BLACK TRANS
5
USER BUTTON
6
USB MEMORY
7
TRANS PREV
8
BUS SELECT Block
9
KEY/AUX Bus
10
PGM/PST Bus
11
Joystick Block
12
Transition Block
KEYER/DSK/PINP
Transition Block
13
Description
Indicates the alarm status in the main unit.
Fan and power alarms for HVS-350HS are indicated.
The indicator blinks red when an alarm occurs. In such
a case, power off the system and consult your FOR-A
supplier. The indicator is normally unlit.
This indicator works the same as the ALARM indicator
located on the front panel of the main unit.
The menu control block is composed of the menu
display, menu control push-buttons (F1 to F4) and page
up/down buttons.
Four mode buttons at the left side change the keypad
mode to the right.
In these modes, the keypad is used for menu access,
transition pattern selection, numeric input and event
control.
Used to perform black transitions.
User assignable buttons. Menu shortcuts or functions
can be assigned to these buttons.
Used to connect a USB flash memory for image file
import and export or system setting backup.
(USB1.1, Type-A)
Used to preview next transition.
This button cannot be used with HVS-350HS.
Used to select a bus. Then select a video in the
KEY/AUX bus (No 9).
Used to select a video signal for the bus selected at the
BUS SELECT block (No.8).
The video signal can be selected from KEY/AUX bus
buttons, PGM, PREV, CLEAN and MV.
Used to select video signal for the background.
Used to set position, size or color in the specific menu
parameters.
Used to perform transitions for background and keyer.
Refer to
4
4-1-1
4-2-1
8
9
5-1-1
4-2-2
6
Used to perform transitions for KEY, DSK and PINP1/2.
 Rear Panel
POWER
TO MU
S/No.LABEL
No.
Name
1
TO MU
2
CONTROL
3
DC 12V IN
4
POWER
ON
CONTROL
DC12V IN
OFF
Description
Arcnet port. Used for the main unit connection.
The other connector (loopthrough) can be used for AUX unit
connection. The loopthrough connector must be 75 ohm
terminated if it is not connected to other system equipment.
Used for service purposes. Do not use.
Used for DC power connection from the supplied AC
adapter.
Used for the unit power On/Off
Appendix 3 - 5
Refer to
10
3. Connection
3-1. Power ON
Before powering on the system, verify that all system connections are secured. (See the
previous section.)
 Control Pannel Power supply
Supply power to the control panel using the AC adapter provided and turn on the power switch
located at the rear panel of HVS-30OU.
 MU (Main Unit) Power supply
Supply power to the MU using the power cable provided and turn on the power switch located at
the front panel. Turn on both power switches if a redundant power supply is installed.
3-2. How to Connect between MU and OU Units
The multiple control panels (OU) and remote units (RU) can be connected to single HVS-350HS
(MU). The maximum system configuration is:
MU (HVS-350HS)
1
OU (HVS-35OU, HVS-35ROU, HVS-30OU) 3 (Multiple of same model is possible.)
RU (HVS-30RU)
2
MU and OU units communicate via Arcnet. If your MU and OU connection is a one-to-one
connection: an HVS-350HS and HVS-35OU or an HVS-350HS and HVS-35ROU, setup is very
easy. Just connect the MU and OU. Any additional network setting is not necessary.
However, if your HVS-350 series system has two or three OU units, the Arcnet ID of devices
should be changed before configuring the system, because the Arcnet does not work if two
devices with the same ID exist in the network. (The remote control units connect to the MU via
RS-422.)
Model
HVS-35OU
HVS-35ROU
HVS-30OU
HVS-350HS
Arcnet ID (default setting)
1
1
1
250
 To Change the Arcnet ID of HVS-30OU
(1) Connect the MU (HVS-350HS) and the HVS-30OU one to one.
MU ID: 250
2
‚`‚b ‚P‚O‚O |‚Q‚S‚O‚u @ ‚T‚O ^‚U‚O‚g‚š @‚h ‚m
‚`‚b ‚P‚O ‚O
OU ID: 1
1
|‚Q ‚S‚O ‚u @ ‚T ‚O ^‚U‚O‚g‚š @‚h‚m
RATING LABEL
OPTION SLOT
A C E
B D F
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
PG M
PGM
M /E
P/P
1
2
4
3
5
6
1
2
POWER
I/O
SDI INPUT
AUX
RS-422
REF OU T
REF IN
CPU/GE NLOCK
EDITO R
LAN
( 1 0/ 100 BA S E-T )
GP I IN
GP I/TALL Y OUT
75Ω terminator
TO OU
GEN LOCK
3
S/No.LABEL
4
TO MU
ON
CONTROL
DC12V IN
OFF
RS-422
Arcnet
75Ω terminator
(75Ω BNC cable)
(2) The MENU control button at the right of the menu display should light up at power ON.
(3) Press the MENU control button and then press the SETUP button.
Appendix 3 - 6
(4) The SETUP menu's top page appears in the menu display. Turn F1 to select SYSTEM and
then press F1.
SETUP
MENU
:>SYSTEM >INPUT
>OUTPUT
:>GPI/TLY >FUNCTION>STATUS
>PANEL
PAGE
(5) In the [SETUP-SYSTEM] menu, turn F1 to select ARCNET and then press F1 to display the
[SETUP-SYSTEM-ARCNET] menu.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
(6) Change GROUP from 300HS to 350HS.
SYSTEM
ARCNET
: OU ID :OU NO :CTRL MU: GROUP : 1/2
: = 1
:=OU1 : =250 : =300HS :
(7) To change the ID of OU, turn F1 to change ID to 2 , for example. Then press F1 to confirm
the change.
SYSTEM
ARCNET
: OU ID :OU NO :CTRL MU: GROUP : 1/2
: = 2
:=OU1 : =250 : =350HS :
IMPORTANT
Change the ID numbers until all of your devices in the Arcnet have different ID
numbers.
(8) Turn off the power of the MU and OU units.
(9) Connect all devices in the system and power them on.
Appendix 3 - 7
3-3. System Signal Format Selection at the Initial Use
When first switching on your unit, please select a signal format as shown below.
(1) The MENU button at the right of the menu display should be flashing at power ON.
(2) Press the MENU button and then press the 7/SETUP button.
(3) The SETUP menu's top page appears in the menu display. Turn F1 to select SYSTEM and
then press F1.
SETUP
MENU
:>SYSTEM >INPUT
>OUTPUT
:>GPI/TLY >FUNCTION >STATUS
>PANEL
PAGE
(4) The [SETUP - SYSTEM] menu as shown below appears. Turn F1 to select FORMAT and
then press F1.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
(5) The [SETUP - SYSTEM - FORMAT] menu as shown below appears. Turn F1 to select the
signal format used in the switcher. Then turn F3 to select the aspect ratio.
SYSTEM
FORMAT
:
FORMAT
: =1080/59.94i
:ASPECT :SW TMNG: 1/1
: =16:9 : =ANY :
PAGE
(6) Press the PAGE UP button to return to the [SETUP - SYSTEM] menu.
(7) Turn F1 to select REBOOT. Press ENT/STORE in the Keypad block to reboot the switcher.
SETUP
SYSTEM
:>FORMAT
:>RS-422
>REF I/O >ARCNET
>TIME
>INIT
>ETHERNET
>REBOOT
MENU
7/SET UP
8/STILL
9/FILE
DIRECT PATT
4/WIPE
5/P in P
6/MATT
2/KEYER
3/DSK
ENT/STORE
USB MEMORY
±/EVENT
CLR/TRANS RATE
1
0
. (DOT)
/RECALL ENT/STORE
MENU/DIRECT PATT/EVENT/KEY PAD
PAGE
1
2
USER BUTTON
ALARM
F1
F2
F3
F4
REV
NOR/REV
DIRECTION
(8) The selected format and aspect are applied after restarting the switcher.
Appendix 3 - 8
4. Menu Operations
4-1. How to Access Menus
4-1-1. Menu Access Buttons
Press the MENU button below, which changes the buttons in the Keypad block to the menu
buttons, and then press the buttons on the Keypad to access menus.
MENU button
MENU
7/SET UP
8/STILL
9/FILE
DIRECT PATT
4/WIPE
5/P in P
6/MATT
2/KEYER
3/DSK
Keypad Block
USB MEMORY
±/EVENT
CLR/TRANS RATE
1
0
. (DOT)
/RECALL ENT/STORE
MENU/DIRECT PATT/EVENT/KEY PAD
PAGE
1
2
USER BUTTON
ALARM
F1
F2
 KEYPAD Block
Button
Accessed menu
FILE
FILE TOP
STILL
STILL STORE
SET UP
SETUP MENU
MATT
PinP
WIPE
DSK
KEYER
MATT COLOR
PinP TOP
WIPE
DSK TOP
KEYER TOP
F3
F4
REV
NOR/REV
DIRECTION
Menu Description
Accesses menu for file operations using a USB
Accesses menu for still store operation.
Accesses menu for setup of system, panel, video
input, video output, external interface.
Accesses menu for matte colors.
Accesses menu for PinP 1 and PinP 2 setup.
Accesses menu for WIPE pattern modification.
Accesses menu for DSK1-4 setup and effects.
Accesses menu for KEY1-2 setup and effects.
MENU/ DIRECT PATT/ EVENT/ KEY PAD Block
The MENU/ DIRECT PATT/ EVENT/ KEY PAD block to the
right of the menu display has four modes: Menu Access,
Direct Pattern Selection and Event Control. The current
operational mode is displayed at the upper right of the menu
display.
MENU
7/SET UP
8/STILL
9/FILE
DIRECT PATT
4/WIPE
5/P in P
6/MATT
±/EVENT
1
2/KEYER
3/DSK
CLR/TRANS RATE
0
. (DOT)
/RECALL ENT/STORE
MENU/DIRECT PATT/EVENT/KEY PAD
Mode Selection Buttons
Button
Function
This button changes the Keypad to menu access buttons. Pressing
on a button in the Keypad displays the related menu.
MENU
The MENU button blinks if a parameter has changed and it requires
rebooting. In this case, reboot the switcher.
DIRECT PATTERN This button changes the Keypad to direct pattern selection buttons.
±/EVENT
This button changes the Keypad to event memory control buttons.
Appendix 3 - 9
4-1-2. Other Menu Access Buttons
By pressing once or twice specific buttons in the bus select section or transition control
section, the related menus can be displayed. (See the figure and the table below.)
POSITION
MENU
7/SET UP
8/STILL
9/FILE
DIRECT PATT
4/WIPE
5/P in P
6/MATT
BLACK
TRANS
USB MEMORY
±/EVENT
CLR/TRANS RATE
1
2/KEYER
0
. (DOT)
/RECALL
3/DSK
ENT/STORE
MENU/DIRECT PATT/EVENT/KEY PAD
5
6
3
4
USER BUTTON
SIZE
(PUSHto DEF)
PAGE
1
2
USER BUTTON
ALARM
F1
F2
F4
F3
REV
NOR/REV
BKGD
KEYER
HVS-300HS
DIRECTION
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
TRANS PREV
KEYER
DSK
1
2
3
4
P IN P
2
1
2
AUX
3
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
MV
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
KEYER
NEXT TRANSITION
KEY/AUX
1
P IN P
1
PATTERN/RATE
FADER LIMIT
PGM
MIX
1
2
3
4
5
PST
6
7
8
9
10
11
P IN P
2
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
12
AUTO
CUT
DSK
ON AIR
 PGM/PST bus
Button
Action
Accessed Menu
MATT1-2 (*1) Pressing twice quickly
[MATT1 COLOR] [MATT2 COLOR]
STL1-4 (*1)
Pressing twice quickly
[STILL]
SHIFT (*1)
Pressing twice quickly
[SETUP-INPUT-ASSIGN](4/4)
(*1) Note that MATT1, MATT2 and STILL1-4 buttons represent the bus buttons of PGM/PST and
KEY/AUX to which the MATT1, MATT2 and STILL1- STILL4 signals are respectively assigned.
(See section 5. "Input Signal.")
 BUS SELECT block
Accessed Menu (*1)
When controlling M/E:
When controlling P/P:
KEYER
Pressing twice quickly
[KEY1- SETUP]
[DSK1-SETUP]
DSK
Pressing twice quickly
[KEY2-SETUP]
[DSK2-SETUP]
MV
Pressing twice quickly
[SETUP-OUTPUT-MV SCRN]
P IN P 1
Pressing twice quickly
[PinP1-SETUP]
[DSK3-SETUP]
P IN P 2
Pressing twice quickly
[PinP2-SETUP]
[DSK4-SETUP]
PREV
Pressing twice quickly
[SET UP-OUTPUT-CLN/PREV](2/3)
CLEAN
Pressing twice quickly
[SET UP-OUTPUT-CLN/PREV](1/3)
AUX1
Pressing twice quickly
[SETUP-OUTPUT-AUX XPT] (1/2)
AUX2
Pressing twice quickly
[SETUP-OUTPUT-AUX XPT] (1/2)
AUX3
Pressing twice quickly
[SETUP-OUTPUT-AUX XPT] (1/2)
(*1) The M/E or P/P control selection is made at the CONTROL item in the [SETUP-INPUTASSIGN] menu.
Button
Action
 Transition Block
Button
Action
KEYER
Pressing once
BKGD
Pressing once
MIX
Pressing once
FADER LIMIT
Pressing once
WIPE
Pressing once
Accessed Menu
[RATE-M/E]
[TRANS BKGD/BLK]
[WIPE PATT]
User buttons can be assigned to specific menu pages and be used as menu shortcuts.
Refer to section 9. "USER Buttons" for details.
Appendix 3 - 10
4-2. How to Set Values
4-2-1. Changing Settings or Values by Using the Numeric Keypad
Users can also use the keypad to input numerical settings to a menu. The procedure
example for changing the matte color by using keypad is as follows.
(1) Press the MENU button.
(2) Press the 6/MATT button to display the [MATT1 COLOR] menu.
(3) To change the S (Saturation) item, press F1.
(4) Input new setting from the keypad.
(5) Press ENT/STORE to confirm the setting.
(6) To change the L (Luminance) item, press F2, input new setting from the keypad and press
ENT/STORE.
(7) To change the H (Hue) item, press F3, input new setting from the keypad and press
ENT/STORE.
MATT1
COLOR
:
BUS MATT1 COLOR
:RECALL : 1/1
:S=50.0 L=80.2 H=125.5: >GREEN:
POSITION
MENU
7/SET UP
DIRECT PATT
±/EVENT
8/STILL
9/FILE
4/WIPE
5/P in P
6/MATT
1
2/KEYER
BLACK
TRANS
USB MEMORY
CLR/TRANS RATE
0
. (DOT)
/RECALL
3/DSK
5
6
ENT/STORE
3
4
MENU/DIRECT PATT/EVENT/KEY PAD
USER BUTTON
SIZE
(PUSH to DEF)
PAGE
1
2
USER BUTTON
ALARM
F1
F2
F3
HVS-300HS
F4
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
IMPORTANT
When pressing a push-button, press it down lightly and release it within 1 sec. Note
that if you press and hold a control button for more than 1 sec., related setting will be
returned to their default value and a beep will be heard.
 Pressing CLR/TRANS RATE before ENT/STORE cancels the changes just made.
 ±/EVENT changes the sign of a value (ex. From “+10” to “-10”). To enter a negative value,
press ±/EVENT and then press ENT/STORE when the minus sign "-" is displayed.
KEYPAD Mode Display
The KEYPAD right next to the Menu Display has multiple modes such as Menu Access,
Direct Pattern and Event Memory. The mode buttons on the left-hand side are to switch the
KEYPAD modes. The current operation mode is displayed at upper right-hand side of the
menu display. To use the KEYPAD for menu input, display a desired parameter, press the
menu control push-button just below the parameter (F1-F4), and enter the value using the
numeric keypad and then press ENTER in the KEYPAD.
Appendix 3 - 11
4-2-2. Changing Settings or Values by Using the Joystick
Users can also use the joystick and the SIZE control in the JOYSTICK block for making
position, size and color settings to specific parameters.
 Controllable Parameters
See the "Changing Settings or Values by Using the Joystick" section in this main manual.
 How to Use the Joystick
The general procedure for making and changing operational menu settings using the joystick
are as follows.
Open a menu page you want to set. In the example below, to change the three parameter
values (BORDER COLOR S, L and H,), use the joystick’s X, Y axes (i.e. move joystick
horizontally and vertically) and the SIZE control respectively.
PinP1
:
BORDER COLOR
BDR COL :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
:RECALL : 3/3
: >BLUE :
Joystick
POSITION
SIZE
(PUSH to DEF)
Left
(-X)
Right
(+X)
Up
(+Y)
Down
(-Y)
Joystick operation
SIZE button (turn)
 Resetting Values with Joystick (the SIZE control)
If you need to reset parameters controllable from the JOYSTICK block to factory default,
display parameters and then press and hold down the SIZE control. These parameters are
returned to factory default all together.
Appendix 3 - 12
5. Bus Operation
The video signals input to the switcher are assigned to the bus buttons on the control panel for
usage. The assigned signals are shared by the M/E, P/P, and AUX/KEY bus sections. Video inputs,
Stills and Mattes can be assigned to the bus buttons which work in the same way as those on the
HVS-35OU/ROU.
5-1. Selecting Video Sources
5-1-1. Selecting M/E or P/P
The HVS-30OU units have a single M/E bus, however the HVS-350HS units have two. This
requires that the bus to be controlled, M/E or P/P, must be chosen before starting the switcher
operation as shown below.
NOTE
The M/E or P/P selection also affects the transition control.
(1) Press the MENU control button.
(2)Pess the SETUP button to display the SETUP menu’s top page.
(3) Turn F1 to select INPUT. Then press F1 or the PAGE DOWN button to display the
[SETUP- INPUT] menu.
(4) Turn F1 to select ASSIGN. Press F1 or the PAGE DOWN button to display the [SETUPINPUT- ASSIGN] menu.
SETUP
INPUT
:>SIGNAL
:
>PROC AMP>RENAME
>ASSIGN
(5) Press PAGE DOWN to go to PAGE4. The CONTROL item, which determines the
HVS-30OU controls M/E or P/P of the HVS-350HS, appears.
(6) Turn F4 to select a bus to be controlled.
INPUT
ASSGN
:SELECT : SHIFT : LINK
: =OU
: =TOGLE: =OFF
:CONTROL: 4/4
: =M/E :
NOTE
The CONTROL item is enabled on the HVS-30OU units and disabled on the
HVS-35OU units.
Appendix 3 - 13
5-1-2. Selecting Video Sources on M/E or P/P
Press the desired bus button on the PGM bus row. The video signal assigned to the selected
bus button is displayed on the program output screen. At the factory default setting, the
PGM bus is the upper row and the PST bus is the bottom row.
REV
NOR/REV
BKGD
KEYER
DIRECTION
NEXT TRANSITION
PATTERN/RATE
FADER LIMIT
PGM
MIX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
12
AUTO
PST
CUT
Button Indication on the P/P and the M/E buses
Indicates that the video is displayed on the P/P program screen.
Red
(Re-entry)
M/E bus
Green
Indicates that the video is displayed on the M/E program screen.
Orange
Indicates that the video is set to next output on the M/E bus.
Red
Indicates that the video is displayed on the P/P program screen.
P/P bus
Orange
Indicates that the video is set to next output on the P/P bus.
5-1-3. Selecting Video Sources on KEY/AUX
(1) Press the desired output bus button in the Bus Select section.
TRANS PREV
KEYER
DSK
1
2
3
4
P IN P
2
1
2
AUX
3
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
MV
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
KEY/AUX
1
Button
When controlling M/E:
When controlling P/P:
KEYER
KEY1
DSK1
DSK
KEY2
DSK2
PinP1
PinP1
DSK3
PinP2
PinP2
DSK4
AUX1-3
AUX1-3 (*1)
(*1) Select a signal in the [SETUP-OUTPUT-AUX] menu for AUX4 and successive buses.
(2) Press a button in the KEY/AUX bus section to select a signal for the selected output.
TRANS PREV
KEYER
DSK
1
2
3
4
P IN P
2
1
2
AUX
3
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
MV
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
KEY/AUX
1
Signals selected by the PGM, PREV, CLEAN and MV buttons (AUX1-3 only)
Button
Video signal
PGM
M/E program
PREV
M/E preview
CLEAN
M/E clean
MV
MV1
Appendix 3 - 14
6. Transition Operations
6-1. Transition Block Description
The transition block is used to perform transitions for M/E or P/P, depending on which is
selected in the menu. (See section 5-1-1. "Selecting M/E or P/P."
REV
NOR/REV
BKGD
KEYER
DIRECTION
KEYER
NEXT TRANSITION
P IN P
1
PATTERN/RATE
MIX
FADER LIMIT
P IN P
2
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
AUTO
CUT
DSK
ON AIR
Transition Block
 When Controlling M/E:
No.
Description
1
For transition direction setting for WIPE.
2
For selecting next transition bus.
3
For selecting transition type
4
The AUTO transition button for BKGD and KEY1
5
The CUT transition button for BKGD and KEY1
6
The pattern selection display
7
The fader lever for BKGD and KEY1 and transition limit ON/OFF button
8
The ON AIR and AUTO buttons for KEY1 and ON AIR indicator.
9
The ON AIR and AUTO buttons for PinP1 and ON AIR indicator.
10
The ON AIR and AUTO buttons for PinP2 and ON AIR indicator.
11
The ON AIR and AUTO buttons for KEY2 and ON AIR indicator.
 When Controlling P/P:
4
The AUTO transition (MIX only) button for BKGD.
5
The CUT transition button for BKGD
7
The fader lever for BKGD and transition limit ON/OFF button
8
The ON AIR and AUTO buttons for DSK1 and ON AIR indicator.
9
The ON AIR and AUTO buttons for DSK2 and ON AIR indicator.
10
The ON AIR and AUTO buttons for DSK3 and ON AIR indicator.
11
The ON AIR and AUTO buttons for DSK4 and ON AIR indicator.
* The buttons of No.1 to 3 in the figure above are not available, when controlling P/P.
 Other Transition Related Buttons
For BLACK transition use.
BLACK TRANS button
(Located on the right next to KEYPAD)
The button is disabled when controlling HVS-350HS.
TRANS PREVIEW button
(Located on the left next to BUS SELECT)
Appendix 3 - 15
6-2. Available Transitions
Bus
PGM output
Type
BLACK
M/E or P/P
BLACK
DSK
M/E or P/P
-
-
-
MIX
USER
TRANS
(1)
Available
-
-
Available
-
-
DSK ON AIR button
CUT
-
Available
-
Available
Available
-
-
Available
Available
Available
NOR/REV Fader lever
NOR/REV KEY >> WIPE >> AUTO button
-
Available
NOR/REV Fader lever
USER
TRANS
(1)
Available
-
-
CUT
-
-
-
MIX
USER
TRANS
(1)
CUT
Available
-
-
PinP ON AIR button
PinP AUTO button
PinP AUTO button
Available
-
-
PinP ON AIR button
-
BKGD >> CUT button
M/E
BKGD
M/E
Transition Execute
Button or Tool
CUT
WIPE
PinP
Wipe
Direction
setting
-
BLACK TRANS button
DSK ON AIR button
DSK AUTO button
DSK AUTO button
MIX
KEY
Transition Fader Limit
Rate
Setting
Setting
Available
-
KEY >> CUT button
KEY ON AIR button
KEY AUTO button
KEY >> MIX >> AUTO button
KEY AUTO button
KEY ON AIR button
-
Available
MIX
Available
-
Available
Available
-
BKGD >> MIX >> AUTO button
NOR/REV Fader lever
WIPE
(M/E only)
Available
-
Available
Available
NOR/REV BKGD >>WIPE >> AUTO button
NOR/REV Fader lever
M/E
CUT
-
Available
-
BKGD >> CUT button
MIX
Available
Available
-
BKGD >> AUTO button
(1) Transition type is selectable from CUT (default), SCALER, SLIDE (4 directions) and WIPE (4 directions)
BKGD
P/P
6-3. Black Transitions
Pressing the BLACK TRANS button initiates a fade to (or fade from) black whichever source
(background and DSK) is currently on air (program output). The Black transitions can be
performed either on the M/E and P/P bus. The BLACK TRANS button, however, is disabled as
factory default setting.
 Enabling Black Transitions
(1) Press the TRANSITION RATE button to display the [TRANS-BKGD/BLK] menu.
(2) Turn F4 to change BLACK TRANS from OFF to M/E or P/P.
TRANS
: M/E
BKGD/BLK: =30
: P/P
: =30
: BLACK TRANS
: =P/P : =30
: 1/6
:
(3) Set the transition rate, if necessary.
(4) Press BLACK TRANS button to the left of the joystick to perform the transition. Once the
button is pressed, the PGM screen will fade to black whichever source (background and
DSK) is currently on air. When the button is pressed again, the PGM screen will fade from
black to the image.
Appendix 3 - 16
6-4. Background Transitions
6-4-1. M/E Bus
 CUT Transition
(1) Select a video source in the PST bus block.
(2) Press the BKGD button in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(3) Press CUT to perform the background CUT transition.
 MIX Transition
(1) Select a video source in the PST bus block.
(2) Press the BKGD button in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(3) Press MIX in the TRANSITION TYPE block.
(4) Press AUTO or move the fader lever to perform the background MIX transition.
REV
NOR/REV
BKGD
KEYER
DIRECTION
KEYER
NEXT TRANSITION
P IN P
1
PATTERN/RATE
MIX
FADER LIMIT
P IN P
2
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
AUTO
CUT
DSK
ON AIR
 Pattern Transitions
(1) Select a video source in the PST bus block.
(2) Press the BKGD button in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(3) Press WIPE in the TRANSITION TYPE block.
(4) The [WIPE PATTERN] menu appears in the menu display.
(5) Turn F1 to select a desired pattern. (See section 6-6 "How to Select Patterns.")
(6) Press AUTO or move the fader lever to perform the pattern transition.
 To Check Next Video:
To check the Preview video, assign the Preview video to an AUX bus to display the image. To
check the clean video, assign the Clean video to an AUX bus to display the clear signal of
program video.
6-4-2. P/P Bus
 CUT Transition
(1) Select a video source in the PST bus block.
(2) Press CUT to perform the background CUT transition.
 MIX Transition
(1) Select a video source in the PST bus block.
(2) Press AUTO or move the fader lever to perform the background MIX transition.
NOTE
Pattern transitions for the P/P bus cannot be performed.
Appendix 3 - 17
6-5. KEY1 Transition
When controlling the M/E bus, both the AUTO button and fader lever can be used for KEY1
transitions.
(1) Set up a key for KEY1.
(2) Perform transitions for KEY1.
 CUT Transitions
<Method 1>
(1) Press the KEYER button in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(2) Press CUT to perform the CUT transition.
<Method 2>
Press the KEYER ON AIR button to perform the CUT transition. When the button is pressed,
KEY1 will be displayed on the M/E PGM screen. When the button is pressed again, KEY1 will be
erased from the screen.
See section 6-7. "IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK" for details about the KEYER ON AIR
button.
REV
NOR/REV
BKGD
KEYER
DIRECTION
KEYER
NEXT TRANSITION
P IN P
1
PATTERN/RATE
Method 2
FADER LIMIT
Method 1
MIX
P IN P
2
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
AUTO
CUT
DSK
ON AIR
 MIX Transitions
(1) Press the KEYER button in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(2) Press MIX in the TRANSITION TYPE block.
(3) Press AUTO or KEYER AUTO, or move the fader lever to perform the transition.
REV
NOR/REV
BKGD
KEYER
DIRECTION
KEYER
NEXT TRANSITION
P IN P
1
PATTERN/RATE
MIX
FADER LIMIT
P IN P
2
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
AUTO
CUT
DSK
ON AIR
Note that KEYER AUTO acts in the same way as AUTO, if KEYER is selected in the NEXT
TRANSITION block. For example, pressing KEYER AUTO performs the KEY1 MIX
transitions if the MIX type is selected or KEY1 pattern transitions if the WIPE type is
selected.
Appendix 3 - 18
 Pattern Transitions
(1) Press the KEYER button in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(2) Press WIPE in the TRANSITION TYPE block.
(3) Quickly press WIPE twice to display the [WIPE - PATTERN] menu.
(4) Turn F2 to select a desired pattern.
WIPE:BKGD
PATT:00
:KEY1
:20
:KEY2
:00
: 1/1
:
(5) Press AUTO or KEYER AUTO, or move the fader lever to perform the transition.
REV
NOR/REV
BKGD
KEYER
DIRECTION
KEYER
NEXT TRANSITION
P IN P
1
PATTERN/RATE
MIX
FADER LIMIT
P IN P
2
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
AUTO
CUT
DSK
ON AIR
 User Transitions
Press KEYER ON AIR to perform the User transitions which include Scale and SLIDE IN/OUT.
See section 6-7. "IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK" for details about the KEYER ON AIR
button.
Appendix 3 - 19
6-6. How to Select Patterns
Wipe patterns are available for background and KEY transitions. More than 150 preset patterns
are provided. This chapter explains how to select patterns for the transition, how to check which
pattern is currently selected and how to select patterns quickly using the Direct Pattern function.
6-6-1. Checking and Selecting Patterns
(1) Quickly press WIPE in the TRANSITION section twice to display the [WIPE - PATTERN]
menu.
The currently selected pattern numbers and icons are displayed. The letter "M" appears in
front of modified patterns.
WIPE:BKGD
PATT:00
:KEY1
:20
:KEY2
:00
: 1/1
:
(2) To change the pattern, turn F1, F2 or F3 to select a desired pattern.
6-6-2. Direct Pattern Function
The Direct Pattern Selection feature uses the number buttons on the keypad (0-9), to which
WIPE patterns previously registered can be recalled at the touch of one button. So it is useful
to assign frequently used patterns to number buttons. Up to 20 patterns can be registered.
The following procedures show how to register and select patterns.
 To Register a Pattern:
(1) Quickly press WIPE in the TRANSITION section twice to display the [WIPE - PATTERN]
menu.
(2) Turn F1 or F3 to select a pattern for registration.
(3) Modify the pattern, if needed. See section 7 "Modifying Patterns" for the pattern
modification.
(4) Press the DIRECT PATT button to the left of the keypad. The [DIRECT PATTERN] menu
is displayed and the keypad changes to DIRECT PATTERN mode.
DIRECT
STORE
:PATTERN
: =0
:
:
:SELECT
: =BKGD
: 1/1
:
(5) Turn F1 to select a page of the Direct Pattern memory. The patterns 0-9 are stored in
PAGE 1 and the patterns 10-19 are stored in PAGE 2.
(6) Press the STORE button.
(7)Turn F4 to select a bus where the pattern is being used.
(8) Press a number button (0-9). The selected pattern is saved to the number button of the
selected page.
(9) Repeat steps (1) to (8) to register patterns.
MENU
7/SET UP
8/STILL
9/FILE
DIRECT PATT
4/WIPE
5/P in P
6/MATT
±/EVENT
1
2/KEYER
3/DSK
CLR/TRANS RATE
0
. (DOT)
/RECALL ENT/STORE
MENU/DIRECT PATT/EVENT/KEY PAD
Appendix 3 - 20
When pressing the DIRECT PATT button, the number buttons onto which patterns are
already saved light up. If a user presses one of them to save a selected pattern, the
number button blinks. To overwrite the pattern, press the number button again. (To cancel
overwriting, press STORE.)
 To Select a Pattern:
(1) Press DIRECT PATT to display the [DIRECT PATTERN] menu. The [DIRECT PATTERN]
menu is displayed and the keypad changes to DIRECT PATTERN mode.
(2) Turn F4 to select a bus where the pattern is being used.
DIRECT : PAGE
PATTERN : =0
:DIRECT :CLEAR
: =ON
: >OFF
:SELECT : 1/1
: =BKGD :
(3) Turn F1 to select a page of the Direct Pattern memory.
(4) Press the number button where the desired pattern has been saved. The button blinks.
(5) Press RECALL to recall the registered pattern.
Appendix 3 - 21
6-7. IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK
There are two transition buttons available for each of PinP 1-2, KEY1-2 and DSK1-4: ON AIR
and AUTO. (See the figure below.) They are multiple function buttons. The CUT, MIX, SLIDE (4
types) and WIPE (4 types) transitions can be performed using these two buttons for each bus.
The multiple function buttons are used for KEY1, PinP1, PinP2 and KEY2 from the top when
controlling M/E.
The multiple function buttons are used for DSK1, DSK2, DSK3 and DSK4 from the top when
controlling P/P.
To Perform PinP, KEY and DSK Transitions
(1) Set up a desired key or a PinP.
(2) Press the ON AIR button. For example, to insert the PinP1 on M/E program video by using
CUT, press PinP1 ON AIR (button's default setting).
(3) Then press the AUTO button. For example, pressing PinP1 AUTO fades out the PinP1 from
the screen (button's default setting), if it is on the image.
HVS-300HS
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
KEYER
ON AIR ボタン
button
OFF
CUT (default)
(初期設定)
Scaler
Slide In/Out
Wipe In/Out
P IN P
1
FADER LIMIT
P IN P
2
AUTO ボタン
button
OFF
MIX (初期設定)
(default)
CUT (press)
(短く押す)
MIX (長く押す)
(press and hold)
DSK
ON AIR
Buttons turn on while On-Air.
Buttons turn off while Off-Air.
Buttons turn on while On-Air.
(Light color varies by output bus)
Buttons turn off while Off-Air.
Light Indications of the AUTO button, ON AIR button and the DVE lamp
The AUTO and ON AIR buttons turn on while On-Air and turn off while Off-Air. The light color of
AUTO varies depending on the output bus.
State
On-Air
On-Air
Transition
Off-Air
Output bus
P/P PGM (*1)
M/E PGM (*2)
P/P PGM, M/E PGM
-
AUTO indication
Lit red
Lit green
Flashing
-
ON AIR indication
Lit
-
(*1) Lit red when DSK is on the P/P PGM image or any key or PinP is on the P/P PGM image using the
re-entry function.
(*2) Lit green when DSK is on an AUX bus.
Appendix 3 - 22
6-7-1. Setting the ON AIR Button Function (USER Transition)
As factory default setting, the function of the ON AIR buttons is set to CUT.
To set the PinP1 ON AIR button to SLIDE TOP, proceed as follows:
(1) Press CLR/TRANS RATE in the keypad to display the [TRANS] menu. Then press PAGE
DOWN to go to PAGE 4.
Users can also display the [TRANS] menu by quickly pressing the following buttons twice:
BKGD, KEY1, and MIX in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(2) Turn F1 to select PinP1 at SELECT.
(3) Turn F2 to select SLIDE TOP.
TRANS
:SELECT : USER TRANS
USER/ADV: =PinP1: =SLIDE TOP
:ADV CTL: 4/6
: =AUTO :
HVS-300HS
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
KEYER
ON AIR ボタン
button
OFF
CUT (default)
(初期設定)
Scaler
Slide In/Out
Wipe In/Out
P IN P
1
FADER LIMIT
P IN P
2
DSK
ON AIR
Buttons turn on while On-Air.
Buttons turn off while Off-Air.
ON-AIR Button setting
Item
Setting
CUT
Description
Cuts images in or out.
Scales up to insert images or scales down to
remove images.
SCALER
USER
TRANS
SLIDE RIGHT/LEFT
SLIDE TOP/BOTTOM
WIPE RIGHT/LEFT
WIPE TOP/BOTTOM
OFF
Slides in to insert images or slides out to remove
images.
Wipes images in or out.
Disables the button function.
Appendix 3 - 23
6-7-2. Setting the AUTO Button Function
In the factory default setting, the function of the AUTO buttons is set to CUT.
To change the DSK1 ON AIR button function so that the CUT transitions can be performed by
briefly pressing the button and the AUTO (MIX) transitions cab be performed by pressing and
holding down the button, proceed as follows:
(1) Press the CLR/TRANS RATE button to display the [TRANS] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select DSK1 at SELECT.
(3) Turn F4to select C/AT.
TRANS
:SELECT : USER TRANS
USER/ADV: =DSK1 : =CUT
:ADV CTL: 4/6
: =C/AT :
HVS-300HS
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
KEYER
AUTO ボタン
button
OFF
MIX (初期設定)
(default)
CUT (press)
(短く押す)
MIX (長く押す)
(press and hold)
P IN P
1
FADER LIMIT
P IN P
2
DSK
ON AIR
Buttons turn on while On-Air.
(Light color varies by output bus)
Buttons turn off while Off-Air.
AUTO Button Setting
Item
Setting
AUTO
ADV CTL
C/AT
OFF
Description
Always performs MIX transitions regardless of how long the button is
pressed.
Performs Cut transitions when button is briefly pressed.
Performs MIX transitions when button is pressed and held down.
Disables the button function.
The transition time for MIX transitions can be set in frames under RATE in the [TRANS]
(1/6)-(3/6) menus.
Users can perform KEY1 transitions in the NEXT TRANSITION block in the same way as
M/E background transitions. Therefore, if KEY1 is set up to MIX or WIPE in the NEXT
TRANSITION block, pressing KEY1 AUTO performs the MIX or WIPE transition in the
same way as that for the AUTO button in the NEXT TRANSITION.
Appendix 3 - 24
7. Modifying Patterns
7-1. Pattern Modify Example1 (Pattern 20)
This modification example adds a border effect to the background transition using Pattern 20.
(1) Press BKGD in the NEXT TRANSITION block.
(2) Press WIPE in the TRNSITION TYPE block.
(3) Quickly press WIPE in the TRANSITION section twice to display the [WIPE-PATTERN]
menu.
(4) Press F1, enter "20" in the Keypad and press ENTER in the Keypad to select Pattern 20.
WIPE:BKGD
PATT:20
:KEY1
:00
:KEY2
:00
: 1/1
:
(5) Press MENU to the left of the Keypad (if it is not lit), and then press WIPE in the KEYPAD to
display the WIPE menu.
(6) Turn F1 to select BKGD to specify the WIPE modify channel.
WIPE
TOP
:>BKGD
:
>KEY1
>KEY2
(7) Turn F1 to select BORDER. Press F1 or the PAGE DOWN button.
WIPE BG :>BORDER
No.020 :>INIT
>POS/ANGL>MULTI
>SUB EFF
(8) The [WIPE - BORDER] menu appears. Turn F1 to select the signal used for the border under
the SIGNAL item. Select MATT in this example. Set the border width under the WIDTH item
and border softness under the SOFT item.
WIPE BG :SIGNAL : WIDTH : SOFT
BORDER : =MATT : =5.0 : =2.0
:
:
: 1/2
:
(10) Press the PAGE DOWN button to go to PAGE 2.
(11) Turn F4 to select a border color from eight standard colors. Press F4 to apply the selected
color. If you want to adjust the selected color or set the color by entering HSL values, turn F1,
F2 and F3 to adjust values or press F1, F2 and F3, enter a value in the Keypad and then
press ENTER in the Keypad. Users can also set these three parameters in the JOYSTICK
block. (See section 4-2-2. "Changing Settings or Values by Using the Joystick.")
WIPE K1 :
BORDER COLOR
BORDER :S=66.3 L=5.4
H=3.5
Appendix 3 - 25
:RECALL : 2/2
: >BLUE :
8. Event Memory
The HVS-30OU units can store and retrieve event data in the similar way as the HVS-350HS
standard operation units.
8-1. Event Operation
This section shows how to store and load events. See the main manual pages for details about
event menu operation.
To Store an Event (basic):
(1) Press the EVENT memory button right next to the Menu Display.
(2) Press STORE on the Keypad.
(3) Press a number button (0-9) on the Keypad to store the event.
MENU
7/SET UP
8/STILL
9/FILE
DIRECT PATT
4/WIPE
5/P in P
6/MATT
±/EVENT
1
2/KEYER
3/DSK
0 to 9
EVENT button
STORE button
CLR/TRANS RATE
0
. (DOT)
/RECALL ENT/STORE
MENU/DIRECT PATT/EVENT/KEY PAD
RECALL button
To Recall an Event (basic):
(1) Press the EVENT memory button right next to the Menu Display.
(2) Press the number button where the needed data is to be stored.
(3) Press the RECALL button. The selected event will then be applied to the panel.
Button
EVENT
0-9
LED indication
Lit
Lit
Flashing
Unlit
RECALL
Lit
STORE
Lit
Description
Indicates that the event operation is enabled.
Indicates that the button has event data.
Indicates that event data is going to overwritten.
Indicates that the button doesn't have event data.
Pressing the button recalls the data from the event
memory.
Pressing the button stores the event data in the event
memory.
Appendix 3 - 26
9. User Buttons
User buttons can be assigned to specific menu pages and used as shortcuts or specific
functions buttons.
9-1. USER Button Operation
The following 6 user buttons (OU1-OU6) are available in the switcher.
Pressing a user button lets you open the desired menu page or perform the desired function. In
the factory default setting, The GPI IN On/Off and Editor On/Off functions are assigned to OU1
and OU2 respectively.
POSITION
8/STILL
9/FILE
4/WIPE
5/P in P
6/MATT
1
2/KEYER
MENU
7/SET UP
DIRECT PATT
±/EVENT
BLACK
TRANS
OU3 to
OU6
USB MEMORY
OU1 and
OU2
CLR/TRANS RATE
0
. (DOT)
/RECALL
3/DSK
5
6
ENT/STORE
3
4
MENU/DIRECT PATT/EVENT/KEY PAD
USER BUTTON
SIZE
(PUSH to DEF)
PAGE
1
2
USER BUTTON
ALARM
F1
F2
HVS-300HS
F4
F3
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
NOTE
As the factory default setting, no menu page or functions are assigned to user buttons
on the Keypad. Assign a desired menu page or a function following the procedure
below.
9-2. USER Button Setting
USER Button Default Assignments
Button
Default Setting
USER BUTTON 1 (OU-1)
GPI IN ENABLE
USER BUTTON 2 (OU-2)
EDITOR ENABLE
USER BUTTON 3-6
NOne
(1) Press the USER BUTTON above the Keypad to display the [USER BTN] menu.
(2) Turn F1 to select a USER button for use. The selected USER button blinks.
(3) Select MENU or the function type under TYPE.
USER
:SELECT : TYPE : FUNC(F3)
: 1/1
BUTTON : =OU-1 : =NONE : =(NOT ASSIGN)
 If Menu Shortcut is Set:
Turn F2 to select TYPE to MENU and press F2. Then turn F3 to select a menu page and press
F3. Once the menu shortcut is assigned to a User button, pressing the button opens the
assigned menu page.
Appendix 3 - 27
10. Arcnet
 Connecting HVS-30OU to the Main Unit (HVS-350HS)
For the main unit (hereafter called MU) and HVS-30OU (hereafter called OU) to communicate, use
the BNC cable to connect an Arcnet port on each unit. If you want to connect other devices to the
Arcnet, use the other Arcnet port of the switcher or the control panel. If either or both of them are the
last devices in the network, the other port has to be 75 ohm-terminated.
 ARCNET Menu
The factory default settings for the ARCNET are shown in the table below. Change ARCNET
settings only when necessary. The settings can be made in the [SETUP-SYSTEM- ARCNET]
menu.
SYSTEM
ARCNET
: OU ID :OU NO :CTRL MU : GROUP : 1/2
: = 1
:=OU1 : =250
: =350HS:
SYSTEM
ARCNET
: MU ID :
: = 250 :
Item
OU ID
OU NO
: 2/2
:
GROUP
Description
Sets Arcnet ID for the OU.
Selects a group, members of which share the same
OU settings such as bus assignments and user
transitions.
Selects a network group connected from the OU.
Default setting Setting range
1
1-255
OU1
OU1-OU3
300HS
CTRL MU
MU ID
Selects Arcnet ID of the MU controlled by the OU.
Sets Arcnet ID for the MU.
250
250
300HS,
350HS
1-255
1-255
If you are configuring one MU and OU each via ARCNET, connect them by using the BNC
connectors and leave them to their factory default-set ID numbers (250 and 1 respectively).
Turning F2 displays the accessible MU ID(s) under CTRL MU ID in the menu. Select an MU to be
controlled. If you want to disconnect the MU from the OU on the Arcnet, select --- under CTRL MU
ID.
 Changing the MU ID
If you want to change the MU ID, connect the MU to the OU and disconnect other devices from the
network. Power on both MU and OU and change the MU ID. Turn the power of all units off,
re-connect the units in the system, and turn the system power back on to re-configure the network.
Note that the new ID will not be valid until the units are powered ON again.
 Adding ARCNET devices to the Arcnet LAN
If you want to connect other ARCNET devices to the MU and the OU, additional connection cables
are required and the network should be reconfigured again. Consult your FOR-A resellers for more
details.
Before loading system data from an installed memory card, verify that the ARCNET ID numbers
that are currently assigned to the OU and MU for operation are the same as those in the data being
downloaded.
If a conflicting ARCNET ID (one assigned to another OU or MU in the network) is applied
by loading the system data, network operation will fail after loading is complete.
Appendix 3 - 28
11. Status Information
The STATUS menu indicates the current status of the cooling fan, power and genlock and the
versions of hardware and software.
11-1. Checking Alarm Status
(1) Open the [SETUP-STATUS] menu. Turn F1 to select ALARM, then press F1 or the PAGE
DOWN button to display the submenu.
SETUP
STATUS
:>ALARM
:
>VERSION >OPTION
(2) The STATUS submenus display the current status of the cooling fan, power and genlock as
shown below.
STATUS :FAN1:NOR
MU ALARM: PS1:NOR
3:NOR
: 1/2
:
STATUS : GENLOCK:External Lock
MU ALARM:
: 2/2
:
Item
FAN1 - FAN3
Display
NOR
ERR
NOR
PS1, PS2
ERR
External
Lock
GENLOCK
Internal
Lock
2:NOR
2:NOR
Description
Indicates that FAN works properly.
Indicates that FAN has failed. Power off the switcher and
consult your FOR-A reseller.
Indicates that POWER works properly.
Indicates that POWER has failed. Power off the switcher
and consult your FOR-A reseller.
Indicates that a valid reference signal is present and video
signals are properly locked to the reference signal.
Indicates that the internal reference is being used.
In this case, a reference signal is not present, its level is too
low. or a reference signal with a different format from the
switcher is present.
11-2. Verifying Versions
To verify the version of software and FPGA firmware installed in the HVS-350HS, open the
[SETUP-STATUS-VERSION] menu. Before upgrading the switcher, be sure to check the
relevant version in this menu.
STATUS :SOFT MU:v1.00.0
VERSION :
RU1:v1.00.0
OU:v1.00.0
RU2:v1.00.0
: 1/5
:
STATUS :FPGA CNFG:v01-00
VERSION :(MU) SDI1:v01-00
CPU :v01-00
SDI2:v01-00
: 2/5
:
STATUS :FPGA
VERSION :(MU)
IN :v01-00
ME :v01-00
OUT :v01-00
MV :v01-00
: 3/5
:
STATUS :FPGA DVE1:v01-00
VERSION :(MU) DSK :v01-00
DVE2:v01-00
: 4/5
:
Appendix 3 - 29
STATUS :FPGA CPU :v01-00
VERSION :(OU)
Item
SOFT MU
SOFT OU
SOFT RU1-2
FPGA (MU) CNFG
FPGA (MU) CPU
FPGA (MU) SDI1-2
FPGA (MU) IN
FPGA (MU) OUT
FPGA (MU) ME
FPGA (MU) MV
FPGA (MU) DVE1-2
FPGA (MU) DSK
FPGA (OU) CPU
HVS-350HS
HVS-35OU/ROU
HVS-30RU
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-350HS
HVS-30OU
: 5/5
:
Description
Software version of HVS-350HS.
Software version of HVS-35OU/35ROU.
Software version of HVS-30RU.
CPLD firmware version of CPU card
FPGA firmware version of CPU card
FPGA firmware version of SDI1-2 cards
FPGA firmware version of IN card
FPGA firmware version of Out card
FPGA firmware version of ME card
FPGA firmware version of MV card
FPGA firmware version of DVE1-2 cards
FPGA firmware version of DSK card
FPGA firmware versions
Appendix 3 - 30
12. Specifications and Dimensions
12-1. Unit Specifications
Interface
TO MU
Temperature
Humidity
Power
Dimensions
ARCNET, 75Ω or loopthrough, BNC, 1 ea.
0°C - 40°C
30% - 90% (no condensation)
100VAC - 240VAC ±10%, 50/60Hz
12VDC, 1.0A (supplied with the accessory AC adapter)
420 (W) x 87.2 (H) x 246 (D) mm
Weight
3kg
12-2. External Dimensions
(All dimensions in mm.)
DC12V IN
S/No.LABEL
TO MU
OFF
CONTROL
ON
POWE R
(87.2)
(64.6)
POSITION
MENU
7/SET UP
DIRECT PATT
4/WIPE
8/STILL
5/P in P
BLACK
TRANS
9/FILE
6/MATT
USB MEMORY
±EVENT
1
2/KEYER
O
CLR/TRANS RATE
(DOT)./RECALL
3/DSK
ENT/STORE
MENU/DIRECT PATT/EVENT/KEY PAD
5
6
3
4
USER BUTTON
SIZE
(PUSH to DEF)
PAGE
246
1
2
USER BUTTON
ALARM
F1
F2
REV
F4
F3
HVS-300HS
NOR/REV
DIRECTION
DIGITAL VIDEO SWITCHER
TRANS PREV
KEYER
DSK
1
2
3
4
P IN P
2
1
2
AUX
3
PGM
PREV
CLEAN
MV
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
BKGD
KEYER
KEYER
NEXT TRANSITION
KEY/AUX
1
P IN P
1
PATTERN/RATE
FADER LIMIT
PGM
MIX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
AUTO
PST
P IN P
2
WIPE
TRANSITION TYPE
CUT
DSK
ON AIR
420
402
Appendix 3 - 31
(87.2)
Index
A
About This Manual ....................................................................................................................2
Additional Inputs......................................................................................................................35
Additional Outputs...................................................................................................................41
Adjusting the Key Signal .........................................................................................................80
Adjusting Video Signal Levels ...............................................................................................149
Advanced Settings for Transitions...........................................................................................65
Alarm Status .........................................................................................................................196
Ancillary Data ........................................................................................................................151
Arcnet....................................................................................................................................191
Assigning the Multiviewer to an AUX Bus .............................................................................115
Audio Mixer Control...............................................................................................................187
AUX Image Crossfade Transition............................................................................................38
AUX LINK................................................................................................................................43
Aux Signals .............................................................................................................................37
Available Files .......................................................................................................................142
B
Background Transitions ..........................................................................................................53
Backing Up Sequence Data ..................................................................................................141
Backing-up Stills......................................................................................................................97
Basic Connection ....................................................................................................................15
Black Transitions.....................................................................................................................52
Border (PinP) ........................................................................................................................114
BORDERS (DSK)....................................................................................................................95
Bus Key...................................................................................................................................78
Bus Matte................................................................................................................................33
Bus Operation .........................................................................................................................46
Button Switching Mode in M/E and P/P bus............................................................................48
Buzzer, Brightness and Screen Saver ..................................................................................152
C
CG WIPE ..............................................................................................................................104
CG WIPE Menu Quick Reference .........................................................................................108
Changing Settings or Values Using F1 to F4 ..........................................................................23
Changing Settings or Values Using the Joystick .....................................................................25
Changing Settings or Values Using the Numeric Keypad .......................................................24
Chroma Key ............................................................................................................................81
Clean Set Up...........................................................................................................................40
Clearing Clip Memory............................................................................................................103
Clip Memory ............................................................................................................................98
Connect between MU and OU Units .......................................................................................17
Connecting Control and Remote Panels ...............................................................................200
Connection..............................................................................................................................15
Control Panels (HVS-30OU/35OU/35ROU) ..........................................................................201
Copying / Swaping Settings ....................................................................................................27
Creating New Sequences .....................................................................................................129
CROP (DSK) ...........................................................................................................................92
Crop (PinP) ...........................................................................................................................114
Crosspoint Switch Timing ..................................................................................................... 147
Crosspoint Switches (Router) ............................................................................................... 180
Crosspoint Switches using the Menu (Router) ..................................................................... 179
D
Date and Time ...................................................................................................................... 152
DEFOCUS (DSK) ................................................................................................................... 93
Delay Line ............................................................................................................................ 102
Deleting Events .................................................................................................................... 125
Deleting Files in USB Flash Memory .................................................................................... 145
DIRECT Mode (Event).......................................................................................................... 122
Direct Pattern Function........................................................................................................... 59
Displaying Destination / Source Settings (Router)................................................................ 181
Displaying Parameters ........................................................................................................... 22
DSK ........................................................................................................................................ 87
Duration (Sequence) ............................................................................................................ 137
DVE Effects on Keys .............................................................................................................. 88
E
Editing Sequences................................................................................................................ 134
EDITOR Connector .................................................................................................................. 9
Editor Control (Option).......................................................................................................... 189
Effect Background .................................................................................................................. 67
Endpoint Processing for DVE Transitions............................................................................... 66
Ethernet................................................................................................................................ 192
Event Memory ...................................................................................................................... 120
External Dimensions............................................................................................................. 208
F
FADE (DSK) ........................................................................................................................... 89
Fader Limit ............................................................................................................................. 65
Features ................................................................................................................................... 1
File Operations ..................................................................................................................... 142
Frame Border (Multiviewer) .................................................................................................. 119
Frame Synchronizer ............................................................................................................... 33
FREEZE (DSK)....................................................................................................................... 94
Full Key .................................................................................................................................. 78
G
GPI IN................................................................................................................................... 161
GPI IN Connector ................................................................................................................... 10
GPI OUT............................................................................................................................... 162
GPI/TALLY OUT Connector ................................................................................................... 11
GPI/TALLY OUT Connector (HVS-35OU/35ROU) ................................................................. 12
Gradation Matte...................................................................................................................... 34
H
How to Assign Sources to Bus buttons................................................................................... 30
How to Back up Settings ........................................................................................................ 28
How to Give Name to Sources ............................................................................................... 29
How to Select Patterns ........................................................................................................... 59
How to Set Values .................................................................................................................. 22
How to Verify Version ........................................................................................................... 198
HVS-30RU............................................................................................................................ 203
HVS-350HS ..............................................................................................................................3
HVS-350HS ..........................................................................................................................208
HVS-35OU ............................................................................................................................209
HVS-35OU/35ROU (Operation Unit).........................................................................................5
HVS-35ROU .........................................................................................................................209
I
Image Data Transfer .............................................................................................................193
IN/OUT Effects for PinP ........................................................................................................111
IN/OUT Effects for PinP, KEY and DSK..................................................................................62
Inserting PinP Video..............................................................................................................111
Installed Options ...................................................................................................................197
Interfaces ..................................................................................................................................9
Interpolation (Sequence).......................................................................................................137
Inverting Key and Background ................................................................................................85
K
KEY and DSK .........................................................................................................................76
Key Edge ................................................................................................................................86
KEY INSERT AUX ..................................................................................................................80
KEY INSERT MATT ................................................................................................................79
Key Link ..................................................................................................................................79
Key Masks ..............................................................................................................................85
KEY OUT ................................................................................................................................41
KEY Transitions ......................................................................................................................55
L
Loading an Event at Start-up ................................................................................................126
Loading Data from USB Flash Memory.................................................................................144
Loading Setting Data.............................................................................................................199
Luminance Key .......................................................................................................................77
M
M/E Bus ..................................................................................................................................53
Mask and Invert.......................................................................................................................85
Matte Color .............................................................................................................................33
Menu Access Buttons .............................................................................................................20
Menu Operations.....................................................................................................................20
MFR Link...............................................................................................................................179
MFR Series Router ...............................................................................................................178
Modified Patterns ....................................................................................................................68
Modifying Patterns ..................................................................................................................68
MONO COLOR (DSK) ............................................................................................................93
MOSAIC (DSK) .......................................................................................................................94
Multiviewer ............................................................................................................................115
N
NEGA (DSK) ...........................................................................................................................94
Network Settings ...................................................................................................................191
O
On-air Tally (Multiviewer) ......................................................................................................118
Option Slots ..............................................................................................................................8
Optional Configuration ............................................................................................................16
OSD Operation .....................................................................................................................204
Other Menu Access Buttons ................................................................................................... 21
OU GPI/O ............................................................................................................................. 162
Overwrite Protection (Event)................................................................................................. 125
P
P/P Bus .................................................................................................................................. 54
PAINT COLOR (DSK) ............................................................................................................ 93
Panel Descriptions.................................................................................................................... 3
Pattern (WIPE/DVE) Transitions............................................................................................. 58
Pattern Modify Example1 (Pattern 20).................................................................................... 69
Pattern Modify Example2 (Pattern 117).................................................................................. 70
Picture-in-Picture .................................................................................................................. 110
PinP Image Crossfade Transition ......................................................................................... 112
Playback IN/OUT Points....................................................................................................... 101
Playing Back Sequences...................................................................................................... 130
Playing Back Sequences Using Advanced Settings ............................................................. 132
Playing Clips......................................................................................................................... 100
Position (DSK) ........................................................................................................................ 88
Position and Size of PinP ..................................................................................................... 113
Power ON ............................................................................................................................... 18
Preset Pattern Groups............................................................................................................ 68
Preview Set Up....................................................................................................................... 39
Proc Amp.............................................................................................................................. 149
Q
Quick Reference for Available Transitions.............................................................................. 52
R
Rebooting System ................................................................................................................ 160
Recalling Events................................................................................................................... 121
Recording Modes ................................................................................................................... 99
Recording Video ..................................................................................................................... 98
Recording Video and Key....................................................................................................... 99
Reference Signal .................................................................................................................. 148
Remote Panels (HVS-30RU) ................................................................................................ 200
Renaming Files in USB Flash Memory................................................................................. 146
Reset the WIPE Menu ............................................................................................................ 71
Resize Function...................................................................................................................... 31
Returning Menus to Default .................................................................................................... 28
Returning Parameters to Default ............................................................................................ 28
Rotating PinP........................................................................................................................ 113
Rotation (DSK) ....................................................................................................................... 90
Router Control ...................................................................................................................... 179
Router Control ...................................................................................................................... 185
RS-422 Connector 1-4.............................................................................................................. 9
S
Safety Area Markers............................................................................................................. 150
Salvo Switching (Router) ...................................................................................................... 183
Save Stills............................................................................................................................... 96
Saving and Loading Crosspoints (Router)............................................................................ 182
Saving CG WIPE Settings .................................................................................................... 108
Saving Data to USB Flash Memory ...................................................................................... 143
Selecting Patterns in the Menu ...............................................................................................59
Selecting the Split-screen Type ............................................................................................116
Selecting Video for Each Split Area ......................................................................................116
Selecting Video for PinP .......................................................................................................110
Selecting Video Sources for AUX Outputs ..............................................................................47
Selecting Video Sources on M/E and P/P ...............................................................................47
SEQ EDIT Mode ...................................................................................................................139
Sequence Memory ................................................................................................................141
Sequence Menu and Keypad Mode ......................................................................................138
SEQUENCE Mode ................................................................................................................138
Sequence Operation .............................................................................................................128
SHIFT function ........................................................................................................................48
Side Panel Image....................................................................................................................32
Simultaneous Transitions of BKGD, KEY1 and KEY2.............................................................57
Sizes or Aspect Ratios (DSK) .................................................................................................89
Specifications ........................................................................................................................205
Status Information .................................................................................................................196
Still Store.................................................................................................................................96
Storing Events.......................................................................................................................120
STROBE (DSK).......................................................................................................................94
SUB EFFECT (DSK) ...............................................................................................................93
System Initialization ..............................................................................................................160
System Setup Settings..........................................................................................................147
System Signal Format...........................................................................................................147
System Signal Format Selection at Initial Use ........................................................................19
T
Tally Color Setting.................................................................................................................165
TALLY OUT Connector (HVS-30TALR) ..................................................................................13
Tally Output...........................................................................................................................165
Tally Output Settings (GPI/TALLY OUT)...............................................................................165
Tally Output Settings (HVS-30TALR)....................................................................................168
Tally Units .............................................................................................................................169
Titles (Multiviewer) ................................................................................................................117
Transition Block Description....................................................................................................51
Transition Operations..............................................................................................................50
Transition Rate........................................................................................................................66
Transitions Using Event Recall .............................................................................................124
TSL messages ......................................................................................................................186
TSL Protocol (Router) ...........................................................................................................185
TSL Tally...............................................................................................................................184
U
Upgrading HVS-350HS .........................................................................................................198
Upgrading Operational Version .............................................................................................198
USB Flash Memory ...............................................................................................................142
USER Button.........................................................................................................................153
USER Button (Menu Shortcut) ................................................................................................21
V
VDCP Operation ...................................................................................................................173
Versions ................................................................................................................................196
Video Clip Operation Quick Reference................................................................................. 103
Video Level Clip.................................................................................................................... 149
Video Outputs......................................................................................................................... 37
Video Sources ........................................................................................................................ 29
Video Sources ........................................................................................................................ 46
VTR / VDCP Control............................................................................................................. 170
W
WIPE Menu ............................................................................................................................ 72
X
XPT DELAY............................................................................................................................ 32
Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
2013/03/25 Printed in Japan
FOR-A COMPANY LIMITED
Head Office
Overseas Division
Japan Branch Offices
R&D/Production
3-8-1 Ebisu, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 150-0013, Japan
Phone: +81(0)3-3446-3936, Fax: +81(0)3-3446-1470
Osaka/Okinawa/Fukuoka/Hiroshima/Nagoya/Sendai/Sapporo
Sakura Center/Sapporo Center
FOR-A America Corporate Office
11155 Knott Ave., Suite G&H, Cypress, CA 90630, USA
Phone: +1-714-894-3311 Fax: +1-714-894-5399
FOR-A America East Coast Office
2 Executive Drive, Suite 670, Fort Lee Executive Park, Fort Lee, NJ 07024, USA
Phone: +1-201-944-1120 Fax : +1-201-944-1132
FOR-A America Distribution & Service Center
2400 N.E. Waldo Road, Gainesville, FL 32609, USA
Phone: +1-352-371-1505 Fax: +1-352-378-5320
FOR-A Corporation of Canada
346A Queen Street West, Toronto, Ontario M5V 2A2, Canada
Phone: +1-416-977-0343 Fax: +1-416-977-0657
FOR-A Latin America & the Caribbean
5200 Blue Lagoon Drive, Suite 760, Miami, FL 33126, USA
Phone: +1-305-931-1700 Fax: +1-305-264-7890
FOR-A UK Limited
UNIT C71, Barwell Business Park, Leatherhead Road, Chessington Surrey, KT9 2NY, UK
Phone: +44(0)20-8391-7979 Fax: +44(0)20-8391-7978
FOR-A Italia S.r.l.
Via Volturno 37, 20047 Brugherio MB, Italy
Phone: +39-039-881-086/103 Fax: +39-039-878-140
FOR-A Corporation of Korea
1007, 57-5,Yangsan-ro,Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul 150-103, Korea
Phone: +82(0)2-2637-0761 Fax: +82(0)2-2637-0760
FOR-A China Limited
708B Huateng Bldg., No. 302, 3 District, Jinsong, Chaoyang, Beijing 100021, China
Phone: +86(0)10-8721-6023 Fax: +86(0)10-8721-6033
FOR-A Middle East-Africa Office
Jebel Ali Free Zone, LOB-16, Office 619, P. O. Box: 261914 Dubai, UAE
Phone: +971 4 887 6712 Fax: +971 4 887 6713
http://www.for-a.com/
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising